:/*ou^z> /?3e HARVARD UNIVERSITY LIBRARY OF THE MU9E0M OF COMPARATIVE ZOOLOOY £l)^cH/^NOri MAY 1 1 m? -^Årr^bO^ BERGENS MUSEUM HYDiGRAPHICAL AND BIOLOGICAL INVESTIGAIiOIIS IN NORWEGIAN FIORDS By O. NORDGAARD THE PROTIST PLANKTON AND THE DIATOMS IN BOTTOM SAMPLES E. JØRGENSEN WITH 21 PLATES AND 10 FIGURES IN THE TEXT BERGEN JOHN GRIEG 1903 m 11 1927 HYOROGRAPHICAL UNO BIOLOGICAL INVESTIGATIONS NORWEGIAN FIORDS \ =^ id,.a 159 IV. Page Asteroidea 1 60 Ec)iinoidea KiO Holothurioidea 16i Nemertinea 161 Annelida 161 Gephyrea 164 Bryozoa or Polyzoa 164 Braohiopoda 174 Pelecypoda 174 Scaphopoda 1 78 Placophora 178 Gastropoda 1 7S Nudibrancliiata 181 Cephalopoda 1 82 Crnstacea 182 Pantopoda 189 Tunicata . , 189 Pisces 190 B. Bottom Samples. a. Foraminifera 192 b. Diatoms in Bottom Samples from Lofoten and Vesteraalen. By E. Jørgensen 195 General remarks on the character of the bottom diatom flora 220 Index 222 Combination of Hydrographical and Biological Facts. A. The natural Conditions of the Fiords. a. Topographical Notes 229 b. Hydrographical Notes 231 c. Biological Notes 234 Notes on the Animal Life in some of the Fiords examined . 235 The northernmost Lophohelia-reef, liitherto known 239 A few Words on the Fauna in Clay 241 Remarks on the Fauna of the Ocean Banks 242 Shallow-water shells found at great depths 242 Fauna and Hydrography 243 Further Remarks on Plankton 244 B. The Investigations considered from a practical point of view. a. Some Invertebrates of Economic Importance 245 b. The ,,Skrei^ Fishery in Lofoten L'47 c. Some Remarks on the Cod-fishery in Finmark £53 ERRATA. 3, line '2 from foot, for 150 m. (siiniple nr. 154), read 180 iii. 9, for Landego 3" 19' E, read Landego 14° 4' E. 9, for Arno 3" 15' E, read Arna 14» E. 10, line 2 from foot, for E t S, read E b S. 172, line 21, for Rlmmphostella, read Rhamphostomclln. HYDROGRAPHY. NOTES. The water samples were taken by means of prof. Petteesson's water-bottle ami the titration has been made at the laboratory of the Beriren Biological Station by Messrs. Thom.\s Mathiesen (samples of 1899) and R.\gnak Bakmax (samples of 1900) according- to the methods of prof. Petteessox. I have made every temperature observation myself with a termometer of dr. H. Geissler Nachf. Fez. Mi'llee in Bonn. The distances of the tables are expressed in nautical miles (= 1852 metres). A. Obsei *^ atioiis at the Northeni (Joast aud in the Northern Fjords. 1899 1 111 i If Sal lie contents 1899 1 Saline contents Nr. 1 :!i Localitv 'a ji ^f CI. Salt Salt Locality %.it CI. Salt Salt Date 1 ^ illi per liti-e per litre per mUle Date ^ nil per per litre 1 litre mille January Hola at Svolvær Metres Metres C» ^ ' January Metres Metres c« 1 1 11 eSOlO'.S X., 150 3.3 18.79 :;i,n(. :;:i.i(i 79 17 Reine. 110 7.0 19.41 35 10 34.23 •J 14«35'.5 E. 10 3.5 18.79 .■;i.iiii .',:;, li> 80 130 7.1 19.51 35 27 34.40 1 :> 20 3.6 18.79 :i I.I 'l 1 :; ;.ii. 81 Stamsund. 3.9 18.89 34.18 i 33.33 | 4 3(J 3.7 18.79 :; I.I II 1 .;.;,ii. 82 8 miles Sto of 150 10 4.1 18.92 3423 i 33.39 40 3.7 18.79 ;> I.I Hi :;.;.ii; 83 Stamsund. 30 4.2 1 1^ 50 3.7 18.82 :ii II.-, '■''■<:J\ 84 50 4.3 18.92 34 23 33.39 7 80 3.8 18.82 :ii.ii'i .f-'.'J] 85 80 4.45 18.96 34.31 , 33.46 s 100 4.6 18.82 ii l.il.'i .'i:; _'l 86 100 5.5 19.13 .34.60 33.74 >i 110 6.4 19.37 :;,-, 111 :;|.IT 87 120 6.9 19.51 35.28 34.40 10 127 6.6 19.45 :!.■.. 1 s :;i.:;ii 88 150 6.8 19.58 35.41 34.52 U 1.50 6.6 19.58 :i.j.4l :ji..->2 89 ! Henningsvær. 180 4.2 18.92 34.23 33.39 12 Outside Ski-oven. 4.0 18.85 34.11 33.26 90 7 miles S of. 10 4.2 18.92 34.23 33.39 I.< Between Groto 4.4 18.92 34.23 33 39 91 18 Yttersiden. 110 4.1 18.99 34.36 33..50 14 and Skroven. 10 4.4 18.92 34.-23 33.39 92 Outside the Lofoten 10 4.6 18.99 34.36 33..50 i:. hi the middle of 20 4.4 IS ;»_' :'i 1 1'.; 93 islands. 20 4.6 18.99 34..36 ; 33..50 l :"! 1 '_':! :;:;.:',!i 143 120 3.9 19..32 34 \>:> :u.o.s 1 67 10 miles SOtO of 30 4.3 Is. ill' : ; ! _' ; 144 140 4.0 19.32 34.95 34.06 68 Evenstad. 50 4.5 Is. hi; :; 1 ;] :; ; [i, 145 Kvæuanot.u II. 1 180 2.6 19.20 34.74 33.87 69 80 4.6 Is IK) :; i..:i .■;,; 1,; 146 i 70" 1' N., 10 2.6 19.20 34.74 33.87 70 100 4.7 is/jy :ii :;i :;:', li; 147 21"28'..'> !■:. 20 2.6 19.20 34.74 33.87 71 120 5.4 19.13 :il.i;ii :;:; 7 1 1 IS l',rUv,...ii SpiMei-en 30 2.6 19.20 34.74 33.87 72 150 6.5 19.65 : ; .■) .'i 1 : ; 1 1 i 1 14!l iiiiH K\ ^1 ii.iii'S- 50 2.6 19. -20 34.74 : 3.87 73 17 Reine. 130 4.18 IS.!)-.' :; 1 ■_',; 150 limlfnir. 80 2.6 19.20 3 1.74 3i,87 74 8 miles SO of R. 10 4.2 Is.HJ 1 ^ • ' , 151' 100 2.6 19.20 34.74 33.87 75 30 4.3 Is.'iij 1 ~ -J '' 152 1 120 2.6 19.20 34.74 33.87 76 50 4.3 IS.ilLj |s.L',; 1.53 1 1.50 2.8 19.20 34.74 33.87 77 80 4.3 1«.92 34.-23 33.3!l 154 ' 1.50 3.1 19.20 34.74 33 87 78 100 5.1 19.09 34.54 33.68 1.55 27 Lynat-n I. 118 1.1 19 20 34.74 33.87 1 1899 -st Saline contents 1899 1 1 1 III lit Saline contents Xr. Locality o - ''^-^ i r r Cl. Salt ' Salt Nr. Locality 1 5^1 S -15 CI. Salt Salt Date M III ^ o t; per litre per per litre j mille Date ^ III g'S 5 per litre per litre per mille January Lyngen I. Metres Metres CO February Henningsvær. Metres Metres 158 27 Abreast of Ski- 10 1.1 19.20 34.74 33.87 236 ' 1 8 miles StW of H. 30 8.6 18.98 34.34 33.49 lo7 botten. 20 1.1 19.20 34 74 33.87 237 , 50 8.6 18.91 34.22 33.37 158 30 1.1 19.20 34.74! 33.87 238 60 3.6 18.98 34.34 33.49 159 50 1.1 19.20 34.74! 33 87 239 80 5.3 19 13 34.60 83.74 160 80 1.1 19.20 34.74 1 33.87 240 100 6.2 19.32 34 95 84.08 1«1 100 1.1 19.20 34.74 33.87 241 Skroven. 300 3.3 18.94 34.27 33.42 162 118 1.1 19.20 34.74 33.87 242 4 miles S of 50 3.4 18.98 34.34 33.49 163 Lyngen II. 250 3.0 19.17 34.68 33.82 243 I Skroven. 100 5.6 19.24 34.81 33.94 164 63037' N., 10 3.1 19.20 34.74 1 33.87 244 1 200 6.9 19.88 35.95 ' :i.'i.ii:! 165 20024' E. 20 3.1 19.20 34,74 ! 33.87 245 300 6.4 19.88 35.95 :!."..' i:'. 166 Off the Kaafjord. 30 3.0 19.24 34.80 i 33.94 246 3 Raftsund I. 40 2.9 18.87 34.14 3:5.30 167 50 2.6 19.32 34.95 : 34.08 247 Abreast of the 10 3.1 18.87 34.14 1 33.30 168 80 2.5 19.20 34.74 33.87 248 Troldfjord. 20 3.3 18.91 34.22 33.37 169 100 2.5 19.20 34.74 ' 33.87 249 30 3.4 18.94 34.27 33.42 170 150 2.2 19.17 .34.r,S 3:l.s2 250 40 3.4 18.94 34.27 33.42 171 180 1.9 19.17 3-1. r.^ :'.:;.><■-' 251 Raftsund II. 270 2.7 18.91 34.22 33.37 172 200 1.7 19.17 ;i-l,ii-s :;:; ,s_' 252 Between Aarstenen 20 2.9 18.91 34.22 33.37 173 250 1.6 19.17 34.1 ;s :i:i,,s- 253 aud Ulvaag-. 50 2.9 18.99 34.36 33..50 174 Lyngen m. 1.8 18.47 33.41 1 32.60 254 80 4.0 19.05 34.46 .Ci.iil 175 69"45.5 N., 10 3.2 19.09 34.54 33 68 255 100 6.2 19.51 35.28 ::i-lii 176 20022' E. 80 3.4 19.20 34.74 1 33.87 256 150 6.5 19.65 .35.54 :U.. 14 :; 1.2(1 184 and Stonnesbotn. 20 2.9 19.23 34.79 1 33.92 264 150 7.1 19.80 3r).«(.i :;i ^9 185 30 2.9 19.23 34.79 ! 33.92 265 200 7.0 19.95 36.07 :i.'i.l4 186 50 2.9 19.2.J 34.79 : 33.92 266 2.50 6.9 19.95 36.07 ::.■>. 14 187 80 2.9 19.23 34.79 1 33.92 267 300 6.4 19.95 36.07 :i.'i.l4 188 100 2.9 19.23 34.79 1 33.92 268 375 6.3 19.95 36.07 ; *").14 189 120 3.0 19.26 34.84. 33.97 269 6 Tranodvbet. 630 2.5 18.99 34.36 83.50 190 150 3.2 19.26 34.84' 33.97 270 68015.5 N., 20 2.7 18.99 34.36 33 50 191 180 3.9 19.33 3J.!)7 ;i| 111 271 15049' E. 50 2.8 18.99 34.36 33.50 192 i 200 4.1 19.33 ;-H!i7 :;i 1m 272 Between Lødingen 80 4.6 19.13 34.60 83.74 193 250 5.5 19.58 v>'i. 11 :; i 'ri 273 and Tranø. 100 5.5 19.36 35.02 34.15 194 300 5.5 19.58 o5. Jl i ;> \.'yl 274 1.50 6.5 19.80 35.80 34.89 1-15 350 5.5 19.58 35.41 34.52 275 200 6.4 19.88 85.95 35.03 1116 31 Hela. 150 2.1 18.84 34.09 33.25 276 250 6.4 19.88 35.95 35.03 197 Svolvær, Lofoten. 10 2.5 18.84 34.09 33.25 277 300 6.3 19.95 36.07 35.14 198 20 2.5 Is sj :;i.ii!i :;;;.L',-| 278 400 6.3 19.95 36.07 35.14 199 30 2.6 1 S ,s 1 :;i n'i :;:; j.-, 279 500 6.3 19.95 36.07 35.14 2(J0 40 2.7 1 -s s 1 :;| n'i :; ; :;.-, 280 600 6.3 19.95 36.07 35.14 201 50 3.3 18.91 :; !,_'_' .;:; :'i7 281 630 6.3 202 60 3.9 1895 282 7 Ofoten I. 360 1.7 18 87 34.14 33.30 2U3 80 5.2 19.11 :!l.."i7 :i:''.7_' 283 Between Havnes 20 1.9 18.87 34.14 33.30 204 100 6.4 19.39 :i.-,.n7 :;|.jii 284 and Ramsund. 50 1.9 18.87 34 14 1 33.30 205 120 6.7 19.54 :-ii.:;i :;i 1.-. 285 80 3.6 19.02 .•iJ.42 :i:i..-.(i 206 150 6.8 19.62 :!.">. |s :; 1 .".'i 286 100 5.7 19.32 :i|.'.i.-. :!l,(i.s 207 Lilandsbugten. 2.2 18.80 :il.nl :;:;is 287 120 6.2 19.61 :;,■., (7 ;i 1 .■). 208 Østnesfjord. 10 2.2 18.84 34.119 1 o:;.-;;,-. i 288 150 6.4 19.7:f :;,■!, 1;^ :;I77 209 20 2.4 18.84 34.09 33.25 289 200 6.8 19.8t ,';,'i s7 ,■; 1 Mil 210 30 3.3 18.91 34.22 33.37 290 250 6.3 19..N1 ;'i ^7 '. 1 '"■ 211 40 3.4 18.91 34.22 33.37 291 300 6.3 19..SS 212 46 3.5 18.95 3 l.:in :'.:i 1 1 292 350 6.3 19.8S 213 55 4.7 19.10 :;i,-.i; :;:;,7n 293 i Ofoten II. 258 1.5 18.87 :;i,ll :;:;,:;n 214 Kolstad. 120 2.5 18.84 :;i.n!. :;:;,-.-, 294 1 Between Bogen 20 1.8 18.87 :;i.l! :;:;:;(i 215 Østnesfjord. 10 2.7 18.84 295 and Ballangen. 50 1.8 18.87 :;i II :;:;,:;'i 216 20 2.8 18.84 :;|n:, :,:;j.-, 2il6 i 80 1.9 18.91 , 1 J- ,■,,; ,;7 217 30 3.4 18.95 :!|:;m :;:; 11 297 100 5.4 19.-1(1 218 40 4.0 18.99 :;i:;i, :::i.-,n 298 ; 120 6.2 19.6.-. :;,•,„-,! :;i,(;i 219 50 4.3 19.03 :>l 1 1 :;;:.-- 299 150 6.2 19.73 35.6S 31.77 220 60 4.6 19.07 :;i ,Mi :;■; 1.:. .300 200 19.80 35.80 34.89 221 80 5.5 19.23 :'i 1 ■, '1 :;'; 'i' :foi 250 6^2 19.84 35.87 34.96 222 100 6.5 19..50 :i02 ■ 8 Rombaken I. 40 0.2 18.80 .3101 3:i.ls 223 120 6.7 19.58 :i03 At the hea 230 60 4.3 19.03 :il.ll ir..-..-^ 310 ' 80 0.7 18.84 :;i,(i:i ww.-i^i 231 80 5.4 19.09 3 1.-. 1 :;:;.i;s 311 no 0.6 18.91 :; i.-jl' ."..'l :i7 232 100 6.4 19.32 3l.!l.-. 3 1. ON 312 Rombaken III. 310 1.4 18.87 :; 1 1 1 ii i.:iO 233 120 6.7 19.54 35.34 34.45 313 Inside Oijord. 20 1.4 18.87 34.14 33.30 234 February 140 6.7 19.62 35.48 34.59 314 315 50 80 1.4 1.4 18.87 18.87 34.14 34.14 33.30 33.30 235 1 Henningsvær. 100 10 3.4 18.98 34.34 33.49 316 100 4.8 19 28 34,88 34.01 IIydrograi)liy. 1899 .1 ill 11} Saline contents 1899 1 ig-i III Saline contents Nr. . r:i « ? -3 CI. Salt Salt 1 Nr. Locality t:i 2 ?'= Ill CI. Salt Salt Locality ■ g-l; f^^ per per per Date l^ s per per per '"' æ Q|g H"S^ litre litre mille 00 P|g i£lx litre litre mille Febiuai-v l{,.Mil.aki'n III. Metres Metres CO February Reine I, Metres Metres CO :U7 8 120 6.0 19.54 35.34 34.45 392 1 23 120 6.5 19.69 35.60 34.70 :iI8 150 6.0 19.69 35.60 31.70 293 150 6.2 19.91 36.00 35.08 31(1 200 6.0 19.69 3.V(;(. :il.7o .394 180 6.2 19.91 36.00 .35.081 :i:iii 250 6.0 19.76 3."i 7:; ; ; 1 s J 395 Heine 11. 130 3.0 19.12 34.59 33.73 3-21 300 6.0 19.76 :i.').7:; : ; 1 ,^-_' 396 8 mill's OtS of R. 20 3.1 19.12 34.59 33.73 ■åJ-J ■1 Skjomen I. 40 1.9 18.91 :il,i.'L' 397 50 4 5 19.29 34.90 34.02 ■i-23 At Elvegaartl. 20 1.9 18.84 34.09 33.25 398 80 5.0 19.44 35.16 .34.28 324 40 2.0 18.94 34 27 33.42 399 1 100 5.6 19.51 35.28 34.40 325 Skjonu-n II. 150 1.8 18.99 34.36 33.50 400 120 6.8 19.72 35.66 .34,75 326 Abreast of Kontind. 20 1.8 18.91 31 ■_'■_' 33 37 401 Reine 111. 85 2.7 19.04 .34 45 33.59 327 50 1.8 18.91 3 1 L'_' ;;:;,:;7 102 4 miles (.Its of R. 20 3.7 19.19 .34.72 ,33.85 328 100 1.7 18.91 3 1 L'L' 403 .50 4.5 19.33 34.97 34,10 329 At Frost isen. 150 1.7 1.7 18.94 18.94 31 -J 7 34.27 33,42 404 March 85 6.1 19.55 35.36 .34,47 At the head of the 405 1 Evenstad I. 157 3.9 19.31 34.93 34.06 Skjomenfjord. 406 7 miles SO of 20 3.9 19.31 34.93 ,34.06 331 Ofotenfjord. Abreast of Skarstad. 550 6.3 19.95 36.07 35.14 407 408 Lofot odden. 50 80 4.3 4.5 19.40 19.47 35.09 35.22 .34 21 34.34 332 13 Stronnnen I. 80 2.2 19.02 34 42 33.56 409 100 5.55 19.62 35.47 34.58 333 At Henningsvær. 20 2.3 18.94 34.27 33.42 410 120 5.8 19.65 35..53 34.64 334 50 3.3 18.94 34. -JT :'.3, [J 411 150 5.6 19.69 35.60 34.70 335 80 3.4 19.13 31 i;ii 3:; 7 1 412 Moskenstronnnen I. 204 2.8 19.16 34 66 33.80 336 Stronnnen 11. 35 1.7 19.02 3 1, 1-.' :'<:, ,"iO 413 10 miles SO of 20 3.4 19.20 34 74 33,H7 337 20 1.7 18.94 ;;:; )o 414 Lofotodden. .50 3.4 19.20 317 1 3:; ^'7 338 30 1.75 18.94 31 -JT :i3.Il' 415 80 3.9 19.3.-) ; 1 1.1 339 Skroven. 248 2.1 19.05 3( hi 33.0 1 416 100 4.5 19.43 ; 1 -.; 340 5 miles SWtS of S. 20 2.9 19.02 34.4 L' 33 ."ili 417 120 4.7 19.47 ;■ ) ; ) 341 50 3.0 19.02 34.42 33.56 418 150 5.0 19.51 35.28 34.40 342 80 3.1 19.05 34.46 33.61 419 200 6.6 19.85 35.89 34,97 343 90 38 19.13 34.60 33.74 420 3 Kirkfjord I. 108 2.0 18.79 34.00 .33,16 :U4 100 5.4 19.35 35.00 34 13 421 Inside the Vorfjord. 20 2.5 18.90 34.18 33,35 345 110 6.4 19.51 35.28 34.40 : 422 50 2.6 18.97 34.33 33,48 346 120 6.85 19.69 35.60 34.70 1 423 100 2.7 18.97 34 33 33.48 347 150 6.8 19.83 35.85 34 94 424 Kirkfjord II. 50 1.5 18.67 33.78 32,95 348 200 6.7 19.91 3(1.011 3.1. 0.S 425 In the middle of 50 2.5 18.93 34.26 33.40 349 240 6.6 19.91 30.011 3."i.os the Kirkfjord. 350 Brettesnes— Skroven. Between Brettesnes and Skroven. 410 6.3 19.91 30. on .i.i.os 426 427 428 4 Beine I. 11 miles SO of R. 150 20 40 2.1 2.3 2..35 19.01 19.01 19.01 34.40 34.40 34.40 33..54 .33,54 33.54 351 17 Ø.xsund. 630 1.1 18.83 34.07 33.23 i 429 50 2.5 19.05 34.47 33,61 352 6801' N., 20 1.8 18.86 .34 13 33 28 ! 430 60 3.4 19.13 34.60 33,76 353 l.^OlS'.o E. 50 2.7 18.97 3 1.3-J :;3.4s 431 70 .5.1 19.35 35.00 34.13 354 Between Hammerø 80 5.4 19.29 34 110 :;i,nj 432 80 5.9 19.43 3.5.15 34.26 noo and Lundø. 100 6.4 19.38 3."i.o0 34.10 433 100 6.5 19.58 35.41 34.52 356 150 6.9 19.72 35.0(i 34.75 434 120 6.6 19.62 35.48 34.59 357 200 6.8 19.83 35.85 34.94 435 1,50 6.7 19.69 35.60 34.70 358 250 6.6 19.83 35 85 34 9 4 436 5 Ure I. 230 2.6 359 300 6.6 19.91 36.00 S.'ros 437 9' „ miles SSO of U. 20 2.7 19.13 34.60 33.76 360 400 6.4 19.91 30 o 1 3,"i OS 438 50 2.7 19.13 34.60 33.76 361 500 6.3 19.91 31 ; 1 1' 1 3,'i.lls 439 80 2.8 19.13 34.60 33.76 362 630 6.3 19 91 3.1.110 3."i 1 IS 440 100 4.0 19.24 34.80 33 94 363 Sagfjord I. 210 2.7 18.97 3 1 .;!' :;,; is 441 120 5.2 19.43 35.15 ,34.26 364 At Furruuesvæggen. 10 3.1 19.00 3 1..;'-. 442 150 6.7 19.65 35.53 ,34.64 365 20 3.9 19.08 3 1 'i-J :; ; oo 443 200 6.8 19.85 35.89 34.97 366 50 6.1 19.37 3.->.ol lu'io. 444 6 Henningsvær I. 142 2.1 19.01 34 40 33.54 367 100 6.85 19.58 35.42 34 52 1 445 6 miles SWtWi/„W 20 2.0 19.01 34.40 33.54 368 200 6.4 19.80 35.80 34 89 446 of H. 50 2.1 19.01 34.40 33.54 369 21 Henningsvær I. 85 2.6 19.00 34.38 33.52 1 447 3.1 19.13 34.60 33.76 370 4 miles SSW of H. 20 2.6 IIMII) 3-1, 3.S 448 100 5.4 19.39 35.07 34.20 371 50 3.2 ]\l \-J :; 1 ,"i!i ;;:; ;;; 449 120 .5.4 19.39 35.07 34.2fl 372 85 4.2 r.i -j'l :; 1 !io ;; 1 1 i^< 450 140 62 19..58 3.5.41 3152 373 Henningsvær II. 98 2.6 I'.I.IH) 3 1 :;.s 45] Henningsvær II. 110 1.7 18.97 34.32 ,33.48 374 6 miles SSW of H. 20 2.6 19.00 452 5 miles SWtW of H. 50 2.1 19.01 34.40 33 54 375 60 3.0 19.08 ; ; 1 ,-, J :;:; oo 453 80 25 19.04 34.45 33,59 376 90 3.9 19.26 ;j:; i|7 454 100 5.1 19.39 35.07 34.20 377 Henningsvær III. 260 2.6 l!i nil .". 1 3.-^ 33.52 455 10 Risværflaket. 175 1.2 18.82 34.05 .33 21 378 16 miles SSW of H. 20 2.9 IIMIS 3 l,.'i-' 33.60 456 Outside the Ogs- 20 1.25 18.90 34.20 .33,35 379 50 4.0 m.L'ii 3|M .33 97 457 fjord. 50 1.3 18.90 .34.20 33.35 380 80 5.3 i;).44 3 1 2s 4.58 80 1.3 18.90 3 1 20 33.35 381 100 6.9 19,62 :{,-, |,s 3 1 .VI 459 100 1.4 18.93 3 1 L' 1 33 111 382 120 7.0 19.69 3 1 7i 1 460 150 1.5 18.9.3 3 1 'J 1 1 :; , M 383 1.50 6.9 19.80 3.'i,so 34 Ml 461 170 1.6 18.93 3 1 I'll 3.t to 384 200 6.7 19.88 35.95 35.03 1 462 Flaket II. 225 220 1.7 18.93 34.26 33.40 385 2.50 6.6 19.88 35.95 35.03 Nearer to the mouth 386 22 Jlortsund I. 230 220 6.6 19.88 35.95 35.03 of the Ogsfjord. SO of Jlortsund. 463 Brettesnes I. 177 1.7 1901 34.40 33..54 387 23 Reine I. 180 2.7 19.04 34.45 33..59 464 21/4 miles SOV4O 20 1.8 19.01 34.40 33..54 388 12 miles OtS of R. 20 2.7 19.04 34.45 33.59 465 of B. 50 1.9 19.01 34.40 33.54 389 50 4.1 19.29 .34.90 34.02 466 ' 100 2.7 19.13 .34 60 33.76 3S»0 80 5.0 19..58 35.42 34.52 467 120 4.9 19..35 35.00 34.13 391 100 5.2 19.51 35.28 34.40 , 468 150 19.65 35.53 34,64 0. Nordgnard. Nr. 1899 Locality 1 c .£ £ ■= III Saline contents Nr. 1899 ||| 5 !l fil Saline contents Cl. Salt Salt Locality Cl. Salt j Salt Dato g r- '- r - ■= per per per Date o "S T-. pl per per ! per -"s ? ~ O ^ litre Htre mille æ «fl £j^ litre litre mille i March Metres Metres c j March Tranødybet. Metres Metres co 469 10 Brettesnes I. 170 6.7 19.77 35.75 34.87 547 18 100 5.0 19.47 35.22 34.34 470 Bi-ettesnes II. 180 1.5 18.97 34.32 33.48 548 150 6.2 19.72 35.66 34 75 471 1 mile NtO'/nO 20 1.8 18.97 34,32 33.48 549 200 6.5 19.87 35.92 35.00 472 of B. I. 50 1.9 19.01 34.40 33.54 550 500 6.5 19.87 35.92 35.00 473 i 80 2.4 19.13 34.60 33.76 551 20 Hola. 150 1.0 18.96 34.31 33.46 474 i 100 2.6 19.16 34.66 33.80 .552 At Svolvær. 20 1.2 19.00 34.38 33.53 575 120 4.0 19.31 34.93 34.06 553 50 1.3 19.03 34.44 33.58 47(5 140 6.3 19.58 35.41 34. .52 554 80 4.0 19.29 34.90' 34.03 477 150 6.8 19.73 ,'l.").li,S :il 77 555 100 4.5 19,36 35.02 34.14 478 180 6.7 19.80 :;l -vil 556 120 5.2 19.51 36.28 34.40 479 Eaftsiind I. 48 2.3 18 82 :-i 1 II.". . 1 ; ■_' 1 557 150 6.5 19.77 35.75 1 34.84 480 Off the Troldfjord. 20 2.4 1«.||- .". \:.\i :;:;.|s 558 Bålstad. 95 4.3 19.44 :;,- 17 :; i.oi) 48J 45 3.1 : ; 1 1 .", :; I.."!'! 559 1 Bålstad L 180 2.0 19.1s 1 7.1 L'.; s| 482 11 Kanstadfjord I. 30 1.6 INV'I :;i lill :;,;.l(; 5(;o lO'.o miles 8S0 20 2.J 19.11 .0 1.07 o,,;.7l' 483 At the head of K. 30 2.2 1S.1I7 :; 1 'i-j :;:; Is 561 of B. 50 2.6 19.22 :il.77 00 Hl 484 Kanstadfjord II. 84 1.7 18.86 :-; 1 1 : ; ;:;.L's 562 80 3.1 19.39 35.07 34.20 485 Inside the Kvalø. 20 2.2 18.97 : 1 1 : 1 _' :;:;. |.s 563 100 3.4 19.32 34.95 34 08 486 50 2.0 18.97 ol .'11' ;;:;. is 564 120 5.15 19.47 35.22 34.34 487 80 1.8 18.97 34.32 33.48 565 150 6.3 19.69 35.60 34.70 488 Kanstadfjord m. Inside the ridge. 94 90 1.6 18.97 34 32 33.48 566 567 Bålstad n. 130 180 6.7 2.0 19.69 19.15 35.60 -34.70 34.65 1 33.79 489 Kanstadfjord IV. 95 20 1.4 18.90 34.20 3335 568 6i,/„ miles SSO of B. 20 2.0 19.15 34.65 ' 33.7H 490 Outside the ridge. 90 4.4 19.31 34.93 34.06 569 50 2.1 19.15 34.65 o:!.77 491 13 Hela. 150 1.3 18.97 34.32 33.48 570 80 3.0 1925 34.82 0.111(1 492 Svolvær, Lofoten. 20 1.5 18.97 34.32 33.48 571 100 3.95 19.39 3.5.07 iil.L'd 493 50 2.0 19.13 34.60 33.76 572 130 5.75 19.58 35.41 54.52 494 80 3.45 19.20 34.74 33.87 573 Bålstad III. 75 3.5 19.22 34.77 i 33.91 495 100 4.0 19.27 84.86 34.00 574 Henningsvær I. 105 1.5 19.08 34.52 1 .33 67 496 120 5.1 19.43 35.15 34.2(i 575 [3V„ miles'StO of H. 20 1.5 34.52 3:i 67 497 150 6.1 ]9.(;-j :;,-.. IS :; 1 ,-|i) 576 50 1.5 19!os 1.52 o.i (17 41)8 Henningsvær I. 100 1.5 111,111 :;i l.'i :;:;.. 'ill 577 80 2.0 19.0S i.Ol' :;o 07 499 5 miles SOtO'/eO 50 2.4 lli.Ki :; 1 (ill :;:>.7(i .578 105 4.8 19.3K :io (i7 'il ■'II 500 of H. 100 3.2 19.31 34.93 34.01) 579 Henningsvær H. 280 1.7 19.08 34^52 33.67 501 Henningsvær II. 250 1.8 19.04 34.45 33.59 i 580 6 miles StOVoO 20 2.0 19.04 34.45 33.59 502 6 miles StOVaO 20 2.2 19.13 34.60 33.76 ! 581 of H. 50 1.8 19.08 34.52 33.67 503 of H. 50 2.6 19.13 34.60 38. 7t; 582 80 2.5 19.37 35.04 34.17 504 80 3.7 19.35 .-i5.(io : ; 1 . 1 .' 1 583 100 3.9 19.44 3.5.17 34.29 505 100 5.3 19.51 584 120 5.5 19.51 35.28 34 40 506 120 5.9 19..58 :;."> 1 1 :; \'yi 585 150 6.5 19.72 35.66 34.75 507 150 6.7 19.73 :;ri iis : ; 1 77 ,'S() ' 180 6.8 19.79 35.78 34.87 508 200 6.8 19.88 :;.'i o:; Os 7 200 6.8 19.82 38.84 34.92 5(i9 250 6.7 19.96 :ii; oil ,■;.".. 10 OSS 250 6.6 19.87 35.92 35.00 510 14 Eisvær I. 60 2.0 19.04 ol.l.J :;3..")'j oS9 , 280 6.55 19.90 35.98 35.06 At Eisvær in East 590 21 1 Moskenstrommen. 100 100 6.5 19.72 35.66 34.75 Lofoten. 5 miles sots of 511 Eisvær II. 250 100 4.6 19.39 35.07 34,20 ' Lofotodden. 512 150 6.1 l'i.i;5 :;i.i; 1 591 Beine I. 105 2.5 lll.lK 1.72 o:i.,s(i 513 200 6.6 1 II. so :;.'. --1 1 :;| ,s!i 592 5 miles SOtS of R. 20 2.65 1 II l'l' 01,77 :;o.|i| 514 Eisvær III. 50 2.8 r. 1 111 :;i.o., ,-93 50 2..s(i 1 11. l'l' 1.77 0.; 01 515 85 4.7 19.i:j :;i.:iO 594 80 2.95 1 9.-2 .') 1.77 , ;;:; lU 516 Paulsgrunden. 125 20 1.6 18.96 34.31 33.46 i i 595 105 5.00 19.51 35.28 ; 34^40 517 Fishingplace at 50 1.8 18.96 34.31 33.46 596 Væro. 175 3.2 19.33 34.97 34.1(1 518 Eisvær. 80 2.7 597 [ 7 miles StW of 20 3.25 19.33 34.97 .34.1(1 519 100 3.4 19.22 .■i 1.77 :!.'i.ii 1 59.S 1 Maaliornet. 50 3.3 19.33 ;"ii.iii :ii,|ii 520 110 4 3 l!i. .".■_' :;i.ii.". :;l,iis onii 1 80 4,3 19,43 00.11 oi'l'1. 521 120 5.6 ];i ,-,,", :i.-, :;i; :;i. 17 (idd 100 5.1 19.5S 00.11 0,1 0_' 522 Øgsljord I. 2.1 I8.4:i :;:; :;t Ol' ,'. i (iOl 120 5.65 19.6.5 :'0.."..o .01 01 523 At the head of the 20 2.2 18.72 :;:; ,^7 :io I • I 602 1.50 6.7 1 9.8.0 ;0 s.-. ;;| .,) 524 fjord. 50 2.1 18.75 :;:; ol' :;.; |n 603 170 6.8 19.9(1 .00. '1-^ :;.o I. li 525 100 2.1 18.75 00, 1 1 1 (104 22 Hosthavet. 930 5.05 19.87 526 Øgsfjord II. 207 1.3 Is. 117 :;:; 7s 505 680,3' N.. 20 5.2 19 87 .,'!-' 0.'. 1 II 1 527 At Halvarso. 20 1.6 1 s.sii :;i.i:; (106 10"0'.5 E. 50 6.0 ;..''! .;■. I i'i 528 50 1.7 In, Ml :: 1 is (107 80 6.4 20.(11 529 100 1.5 i.s.y.i ". 1 . 1 s (108 100 6.4 20,05 .;i. -.0 .;o 01 530 150 1.4 18.89 :;i is (1(19 120 6.4 20.O.-1 ;i..lo ;.-, 01 531 200 1.4 18.89 :n.ls 610 150 6.3 20. 0.-. 532 16 Tranodvl.et. 640 1.5 19.03 31.11 611 200 6.15 20.00 :;.. L'.o ,0.'. 0,1 533 Between Trano and 20 1.6 111,0(1 :;i :;s 612 250 5.S L'(l l'.'. ;■, ,1 534 Lod ingen. 60 3.0 :; 1.711 ". s 1 613 300 5 6 ■'II 1 1.0 . - ' . . 535 80 4.2 19 -II .".I. 'Ill :; 1 II.; (114 400 'h.\ ■'II ilO ... J". : 0:1 536 100 4.2 19 29 34. '.10 :i 1.1)0 615 500 4.05 19.111 537 150 6.5 19.72 35.6(i 34.75 1 616 600 2.5 19. Hl ...,' '.' ,'.1 :; 538 200 6.4 19.83 35.86 34.94 617 700 1.3 19.S7 539 250 6.5 19.90 35.99 35,06 618 900 1.1 19.87 540 300 6.5 19.90 00. Ol. 619 20 miles NW of 3.7 19,51 35.2S , ;).i.|(i 541 500 6.3 19.90 Eøst. 542 607 6.3 19.90 1120 30 miles NW of 100 5.6 19.72 35 66 34.75 543 640 6.3 19.90 ;!."i.'.);i O.ooo 621 Eost. 195 6.4 19.97 36.10 35.18 544 18 20 1.4 1.5 18.93 19.00 34.25 34.38 33,41 33.53 622 40 miles NW of Rost. 4.4 19.68 35.59 34.69 546 50 3.0 19.18 34.70 33.84 1 623 24 Eøst I. 120 3.1 19.52 35.30 34.42 1899 1 il m Saline contents Nr. 1899 1 i M Saline contents Ni-. 1 1 Cl. per litre Salt per litre Salt 1 per j mille Date I o,"ilitv ^ Cl. litre Salt Salt per mille Date Looality a 1 March 1 Eost I. Metres Metres C" ' April Hola. Metres Metres c tilU 24 Ontsi.te Rost. 20 3.15 19.52 35.30 34.42 704 4 At Svolvær. 20 1.0 19.03 34.44 33.58 &2r> ; 50 3.05 19.52 35.30 34.42 705 50 1.05 19.15 34.65 33.78 U-J« 1 80 3.05 19.52 35.30 34.42 701) 80 4.1 19.41 3.5.10 34.23 H27 1 100 3.5 19.55 35.36 34.47 707 100 5.6 19.63 35..50 34.60 &2S • , 120 4.25 19.63 35.50 34.iin 70s 120 5.9 19.74 1 3.5.70 1 34.79 629 ' Kost II. 1 105 2.9 19..55 35.36 34 47 709 1 150 6.4 19.85 1 35.89 j 34.97 6:t0 Outsiao Kost 1 20 3.35 19.55 35.36 34.47 710 6 , Ht-nninysvær I. ; 95 1.1 19.18! 34.40 1 33.84 m\ 50 4.4 19.67 35.57 34.67 711 14' B miles SU of H. 20 1.1 19.18 i 34.40 33.84 ti:VJ 80 4.5 19.67 35.57 34.(i7 712 50 1.1 19.18 1 34.40 33.84 ir.u 100 4.85 19.74 35.70 34.79 713 70 1.4 19.18 34.40 3384 ti:U ".^o Rost I. 136 2.9 19.44 35.16 34 2S 714 80 1.7 III. Is .'il. lo ;j.i ,s 1 t;:i.-, , Insi.le Rost. 20 2.8 19.44 35.16 34.28 ; 715 93 2.5.-) (i:i(i 50 3.4 19..52 35.30 34.42 716 Henningsvær II. 165 1.7:. 1 ;i.'_'_' '. 1.77 :i:j m (i:i7 80 3.5 19..52 35.30 34.42 717 6 miles SO ot H. 20 1.85 l;).22 , :il.77 , ■i3,'.n ii:i8 1 100 3.8 718 50 1.85 19.22 34.77 33.91 h:m 120 3.8 19.55 35.36 34 47 719 80 2.85 19.30 34.91 34.05 (UO Rost II. 150 2.5 19.74 35.70 34.79 720 100 4.3 1937 35.04 34.17 (Ul 1 Inside Rost. 50 4.05 19.55 35.36 34.47 721 120 5..55 19., 56 35.37 34.49 (U2 1 100 5.6 19.74 35 70 34.79 722 160 6.6 19.74 35.70 ; .34.79 ii43 I 120 6.6 19.85 35.90 34.97 723 7 Steue I. 85 1.05 19.06 34.49 33.63 (144 ■ 1.50 67 19.93 36.04 35.11 724 6>;2 miles Sto of S. 20 1.3 19.10 34..56 33.70 i; 4.') 27 Risvær. 45 45 2.8 19.33 34.97 34.10 735 50 1.5 19.14 34.63 33.77 ii4ii Gulvik. 100 0.9 19.03 34.44 33.58 7 26 80 1.65 19.14 34.63 33.77 (i47 20 1.2 19.11 34.57 33.72 727 Stene II. 194 1.95 19.21 34.75 33.89 «48 50 2.5 19.22 34.77 33.91 728 9'/„ miles Sto of S. 20 1.95 19.21 34.75 33.89 «49 80 0.4 19.55 35.36 34 47 729 50 2.9 19.37 35.04 .34.17 6.50 100 6.1 19 74 35.70 34.79 ,: 730 80 2.95 19.'37 35.04 34.17 6.51 28 Tysfjord I. 725 0.75 19.03 34.44 33..58 ' 731 100 4.6 19.52 35.30 34.42 652 68''12'.o N., 50 2.3 19.15 34.65 33.79 732 120 5.7 19.67 35.57 34.67 653 16<'12'.5 E. 90 4.4 19.44 35.16 34.28 733 150 6.6 19.78 35.77 34.86 654 Inside Skårberget. 100 .5.5 19.59 35.43 34.54 734 194 6.6 19.86 35.91 .34.99 (i"i5 120 6.4 19.67 35.57 34.67 735 Reine. 110 2.0 19.21 34.75 33.89 (i56 150 6.4 19.81 35.82 34.91 736 6i/„ miles SSO 20 2.0 19.21 34.75 33.89 ii.57 200 6.3 19.85 35.90 34.97 737 ■ of R. 50 2.35 19.21 34.75 33.89 tio8 250 6.3 19.85 35.90 34.97 738 80 4.0 19.44 35.17 .34 29 659 300 6.3 19.93 36.04 3.5.11 1 739 110 4.5 19.52 35.30 34.42 660 400 6.3 19.93 36.04 35.11 740 Moskenstronmien. 90 1.95 19.21 34.75 33.89 661 500 6.3 19,93 36.04 3.5.11 741 5 miles S of Lofot- 20 2.0 19.21 34.75 33.89 662 600 6.3 19.93 36.04 3.5.11 742 odden. 50 2.3 19.21 34.75 33.89 66.^ 700 6.3 19.93 36.04 35.11 743 90 4.1 19.44 35.17 34.29 664 29 Tysfjord II. 409 1.55 19.07 34 50 33.60 744 11 Off Gaukværø. 2.75 19.44 35.17 ! 34.29 665 Inside Tvsfiord 50 1.4 19.11 34.57 33.72 745 Gaukværo I. 40 2.6 19.37 35.04 34.17 666 chui-ch. 80 5.2 19 48 35.24 34.35 746 68O4I' N., 20 2.6 667 100 .5.75 19.59 35.43 34..54 747 1402' E. 40 3.7 19.48 35.23 34.35 668 120 6.1 19.67 35.57 34.67 i 748 Gaukværø n. 2.85 19.37 35.04 ! 34.17 669 150 6.2 19.74 35.70 34.79 749 680.34' N.. 20 2.65 19.37 35.04 34.17 1)70 200 6.2 19.81 35.81 34.90 750 14017' E. 50 2.7 19.37 35.04 34.17 li71 250 6.3 19.85 35.90 34.98 751 80 3.2 19.44 35.17 34.29 (I70 400 6.3 19.93 36.03 35.11 752 100 4.0 19.56 35.37 i 34.49 April 753 120 4.4 19.63 3o..50 34.60 1)73 1 Gulvik. 100 .5.3 19.59 35.43 34.53 7.54 150 4.6 19.71 35.64 34.74 1)74 190 6.5 1981 35,81 34 90 7.55 200 5.05 19.74 35.70 34.79 675 4 Lilaudsbugten. 58 0.4 18.86 :u.i:; :;:5 2n 756 i 250 5.2 19.78 35.77 34.8ti H76 Østnesfjorden. 20 1.1 19.07 ;;l.M) :!:',. (i."i 757 ; 12 Malangen. 380 1.6 19.25 34.82 33.96] 677 58 3.4 19.33 :! 1.117 :; 1 1 (} 7.58 69033' N., 20 1.75 19.33 34.96 1 34.10 678 Brettesnes I. 77 1.05 19 03 34.44 :,',i .")N 7.59 1800' E. . 50 1.6 19.33 34.96 34.10 679 Inside Moldora. 20 1.1 19.07 34.50 33,60 760 Off Stoimesbotn. 80 1.85 19.40 35.09 34.21 680 50 2.5 19.22 34.77 33.91 761 100 2.15 19.48 35.23 34.35 681 4.7 19.48 35.23 34.35 762 120 2.3 19.48 35.23 34.35 682 Brettesnes II. 145 1.1 19.07 34 50 33..i5 763 1 150 3.25 19.56 35.37 34.49 (;83 20 1.1 19.07 34.50 33.65 764 1 200 3.7 19.59 35.43 34.54 684 50 19.26 34.84 33,97 765 1 250 4.05 19.67 35.57 3467 685 80 4J5 19.48 35.23 34.35 766 ^ 300 4.01 19.67 35.57 34.67 686 100 6.2 19.70 35.62 34.72 i 7(^7 ■ 380 4.1 19.67 35.57 34.67 687 140 6 5 19.81 35.81 34.90 768 , 13 1 «enjenhavet. 80 3..35 19.63 35.50 34.60 688 Følstad. 77 I -^0.4 18.88 34.16 33.32 769 , 1 69040' N., 20 3.45 19.63 35.50 34.60 689 Østnesfjorden. 20 0.25 19.07 34.50 33.6.5 770 1 16047' E. 50 5.1 19.85 35.90 34.97 690 50 2.9 19.22 34.77 .33 91 771 80 5.3 19.85 35.90 34.97 691 77 4.9 19.48 3.5.23 34.35 772 , 1 Nearer land. 2.6 19..56 35.37 34.49 692 Helle. 118 0.5 19.86 34.13 33.28 1 69038' N., 693 Østnesfjorden. 20 1.0 19.07 34.50 .33.65 1709' E. 694 50 2.9 19.26 34.84 .33.97 773 14 Malangen. 382 1.7 19.37 35.04 34.17 695 80 5.0 19.48 35.23 34.35 774 Off Stønnesbotn. 10 1.65 19.37 35.04 34.17 696 118 5 7 19 63 35.50 34.60 775 20 1.7 19.37 35.04 34.17 697 «kroven. 190 LI 19.11 34.57 33.72 776 30 1.7 19.37 35.04 34.17 698 At the edge inside S. 50 2.2 19.18 34.70 33.84 777 40 1.75 19.40 35.09 34.21 699 80 4.9 19 48 35.23 34.53 778 50 1.8 19.40 35.09 34.21 700 100 6.3 19..59 35.43 34.53 779 80 2.15 19.44 35.17 34.29 701 120 6.2 19.74 35.70 34.79 780 100 2.4 19.48 35.23 34.35 702 180 6.7 19.89 35.96 35.04 781 120 2.7 19.48 3.5.33 34.35 703 Hola. 1.50 0.8 19.11 34.57 33.72 782 350 4.1 19.67 35.57 .34.67 Xr. 1899 Locality .1 1 m III |2| Saline contents 1899 1 if! III 'ås 'S Saline contents CI. Salt Salt Nr. CI. Salt Salt Locality Date 1 Mu per per per Date §1 ? per per per ^it i-ol litre Utre mille fill h'S -g litre litre mille April Metres Metres CO Mai Metres Metres CO 783 19 Kvænangen I. 167 0.75 19.40 35.09 34.21 860 2 Silden. 1.55 19.41 3.5.10 34 24 784 1 Between Spilderen 20 0.75 19 40 35.09 34.21 At Silden Island. 785 and Kvænangs- 50 0.75 19.40 35.09 34,21 861 3 Lyngen I. 120 1.7 19.37 35,04 3417 786 tindeme. 80 0.75 19.40 35.09 34.21 862 Off Skibotten. 20 1.9 19.41 35.10 34.24 787 100 0.75 19.40 35.09 .34.21 ! 863 50 1.9 19.41 35,10 34.24 788 120 0.75 19.40 35.09 :14 21 8(1-1 80 2.1 19.4.5 35,18 34.30 789 160 2.0 19 56 35.37 .■■■1 I'l ,Ml."l 100 2.3 19.45 35.18 34.30 790 1 Kvænangen U. 90 1.0 19.44 35.17 3 1 L'll 81 111 120 2,55 19.48 35.23 .34.35 791 At Xoklen island. 20 0.75 19.40 35.09 :il.--'l 867 Lvngen H. 250 1.1 19.37 35.04 34.17 792 50 0.75 l!l |o :15 o!i ■ ll.-JI 868 Off tiie Kaafjord. 20 1.1 19.37 35.04 34.17 793 90 0.75 lit 10 :)5.o:i :il -Jl 869 50 1.15 19.37 35.04 34.17 794 20 Jokeli'jurd I. 110 0.85 ni.io 35.09 :i l._'l 870 80 2.05 19.45 35.18 34.30 795 At the head of the 20 0.85 19.40 35.09 34.21 : 871 100 2.2 19.48 35.23 34,35 79H fjord. 50 0.85 19.40 35.09 .34.21 872 150 2.55 19.48 35.23 34,35 797 80 0.90 19.44 3.5.17 34.29 873 200 2,7 19.55 35..36 34.47 798 100 1.00 19.44 35.17 34,29 8,4 250 2.85 l'l..55 35.36 34.47 799 21 Jøkelfjord III. 95 0.80 19.44 35.17 34.29 875 Lyngen m. 320 l,:i.-. I'l :i7 :i,"p04 34.17 800 Off the Tverfjord. 20 0.75 19.44 3.5.17 34.29 876 69054' N., 20 l.'^'i Iii,:i7 :i.").iil 34.17 801 50 0.90 19.44 35.17 34.29 877 20027' E. 50 1.7_ III, l."> :;,-, |,s 34 30 80-J 90 1.4 19.48 :i 1 :i.'i 878 Between vtre Gam- 80 111, In :i.-..23 34,35 8(J3 Kvænangen. 343 1.05 19.48 :;i :i,"i 879 vik and Ulo. 100 iji.-i :!."). 36 34.47 8t)4 7002'.5 N,, 20 0.8 19.48 : 1 1 ; ."i 880 120 3.J."i 111. ."ill 0.-..43 34.54 805 21041' E. ' 50 0.8 19.44 li.'i. 1 7 :i 1 -'l 881 150 3,45 19.(i6 35.55 34 65 806 Between Spilderen 100 19.48 :il.:i.'. 200 3.3 19.66 35.55 34.65 807 and the northern 150 l'.45 19.48 11 ,;:, s>:l 250 3,5 19.73 35.68 34.78 808 mainland. 200 1.95 19.63 :i,"i..".ii .11 l,H N.Sl 320 3,65 19.77 3.5.75 34.84 809 250 2.2 19.56 .11 l:i S85 , 5 Hola. 150 2.65 19J2 34.59 33.73 810 340 2.3 19.5() :il 111 S86 1 At Svolvær. 10 2,55 19.12 34.59 33.73 811 24 Ingohavet. 315 3.2 19.78 :;.-, 77 ;; 1 ,s,i 887 20 19 19.12 34.59 33.73 812 71010' N,. 10 3.15 19 82 :;."i si .11 'i:i 888 30 2,45 19 23 34.79 33.92 813 23» 10' E. 20 3.111 ll^^.' :i."..si :il :i:i 889 50 4..-. 111 1.". :i.-..18 34.30 814 30 50 3.3 3.65 1!IM, l!i.90 :>."■. :il iil.'i'.i 890 891 80 100 5.:i."> 5.5 111,1111 :i,-,,55 35.55 34.65 34.65 81 ti 70 3.65 19.93 .'ill.OI :i5 l-j 892 120 5.8 19,73 35.68 34.78 817 80 3.8 19.93 :iii.oi :i.-..Il' 893 150 6.15 19.77 3.5.75 34.84 818 100 3.8 19.97 ;',(i.l(i :i.-|.ls 1900 819 120 3.65 20.01 : ;,',■_! I 820 150 3.55 ■Jii.iij .111.17 March 200 3.5 L'O.Ol :iii.l7 ;;-, ., ] 894 20 Hola, 150 2.85 19.28 34.88 34.02 822 250 3.45 L'onl .111. 17 ;;;, .; | 895 10 2.85 19.35 35.01 34.04 823 300 3.45 -'O 111 llil.lT :i."i Jl 896 20 2.9 19.35 35.01 34.04 824 Ingahavet n. 2.75 Mt.iiT .11 117 897 50 2.95 19.35 35.01 34.04 825 Between Ingo and 20 2.80 I'.l.iiV :; 1 i;7 898 80 3,4 19.43 35,15 34.28 82li the preceding 50 3.25 19.74 111. 711 899 100 4.05 19.44 .■■.'.17 31.29 827 station. 100 3.8 19.86 :;,"i.!i 1 :ii.!i:i 900 120 4,6 19..-,1 :;,"., :iii lll.tl 828 200 3.8 19.97 :i.-..|s 901 150 .5,4 19.il."i : 1 1 65 829 Havet III. 3 miles off Ingø. " 20 19.63 35.50 3 1.60 1 902 903 Skroven. 1 mile SSO of S. 400 20 2,75 {;;:;:; ;;■:;;; :il 14 :il 14 830 Breisund. 100 1.7 19.59 35.43 34.54 904 50 2,8,"> 111 :i'i :i.-, (IS :il.21 831 Between Hjelmesø 50 1.65 19 59 35.43 34..54 905 80 3,15 ill. .I'l :il 21 832 and Have. 100 17 \'j 59 34.54 1 906 100 4,55 1 1 1 ."l 1 .11 -17 833 27 Porsangerfjord. 200 1.05 I'l,'-; :;,', .Ml 34, (ill ' 91.(7 120 5,10 19J,-| :| 115 834 Between Great and 20 1.05 i;i,i;.'. 31,60 908 150 6.10 ]!1,N- 11. HI 835 Litle Tamso. 50 1.0 l;i (j7 ;;.7i ;,7 34,67 j 909 200 6.5 I9.8N :;;, ;i,; r. ii5 83(3 80 1.0 19^67 35.57 34 67 910 250 6.5 19.94 3(>.07 35:i5 837 100 0.95 19.63 35.50 34.60 911 300 6 5 19.94 36.07 35.15 838 120 95 19.63 35.50 31.60 912 400 6.35 19.94 3607 35.15 839 150 0.75 1 9.117 .'11 117 913 Henningsvær. 270 2.85 19.35 35.01 34.14 840 200 0.2O 1 9. .'li' :il Is 914 6% miles SSO of H. 20 2.85 19.:5 35,01 .34.14 811 28 Porsangei'fjord. 275 2.25 1 '.1 Ti',! :i.">. 1.1 :ii :.l 915 50 2.9 19,35 3.5.01 3-1.14 812 70058'.5 i\., 20 2.25 l!l ."ill :;:<, l:; : 1 1 '. 1 916 80 3.0 19.37 35,04 34 1 7 813 26025' E. 50 2.15 I'.i.'.'.i :i.', 11 : 1 1 .M 917 100 3.15 19 II :;,-,lj m.L'i 844 Off Sværholt- 100 1.4 1 'i.'<:i :;■> :iii :i 1, 17 918 120 3.7 19.111 :il :;s 815 klubben. 200 1.3 l!l.-"ill :;,-, I:; :il..'il 919 135 5.40 :;i (l."> 84G May 250 2.75 19.73 35.68 "■'"i 1 920 ! 921 150 200 6.10 6.6 li'so 3 1,84 .■!| 111 847 1 Vardo. 225 2.0 19.70 35.62 .34.72 922 Henningsvær 11. 165 2.7 19.211 11,1111 :il.o4 848 70"21'.5 N., 20 1.9 19.66 35,55 3-1. (15 923 23/4 miles of H. 20 2.8 19,311 :; \ \\j :il o5 849 31028' E. 50 1.95 19.6(i :!"i,."i.') .1 1 il.'i 924 50 2.9 19,11 :il ml 850 80 1,95 19.66 :il,ii,', 925 100 2.95 19,3:i '\ 1 117 :il II 851 100 1.95 19. (16 :il 1,'. 926 120 4.0 19,511 :i.'i.:lli 111 ."ill 852 150 2.25 Ml.iKl -•■ 1 (.'. 927 ! 150 6.25 19.81 35^8 1 34^93 853 200 2.25 I'.i.iiil i:i.:,:, :i 1 1,.-, 928 165 6.V5 19.81 35.94 34.93 854 Vardo II. 183 1.9 1:m;i; il.i.:, !t29 ; 21 Stronnneli. 65 2.8 855 180 2.05 19.(1(1 :;.'j..'i.'i :;i.i.,'i , 930 1 , Between Ilenuings- 20 2.7 19.35 3497 34 11 856 Vardø III. 1.45 19.63 35^50 34.60 931 vær and Valberg. 60 2.7 19.36 35.03 34.16 Close np to 932 I Bålstad I. 212 3.05 19.33 84.97 34.11 Vardo. 933 ! 3 miles of B. 20 2.9 19.36 35.03 34.16 857 Nordkvn. 53 1.9 19.63 35.50 34.60 934 50 2.9 19.39 35.08 34.21 858 7108' N., 20 2.05 19.63 35.50 34.60 935 80 5.35 19.47 35.22 ;i 1 :i."i 859 270-12' E. 50 2.05 19.63 35..50 34.60 i 936 88 5.65 19.47 35.22 3 1.:;.". 1900 ! 1 ill lit 3.2 « Saline contents t 1900 1 111 li! «aline contents \,-. Locality ', | |^ _ •§ {'l. 1 Salt 1 Salt 1 Nr. Locality 1 1 - '''2 CI. ; Salt Salt Date 1 « II! per litre litre per mille Date M K; per litre per litre per Miille March Metres Metres (■0 March Metres Metres C» (137 21 Balst;ul 1. 100 6.2 19.69 35.62 34 72 1018 30 LandcKo. 1.50 5 3 19.66 35.67 34.67 >);!8 IL'O 6.2) 19.70 3.5.64 34.74 1019 200 5.9 19.90 36.00 35.02 !):i9 150 6.6 19.82 35.68 34.94 1 1020 260 6.0 19.90 36.00 35.08 94(1 180 6.6 19.96 36.11 35.18 lOil 300 6.05 19.93 36.04 .3.5.13 -141 200 6.6 19.96 36.11 3.5.18 i 1022 400 6.2 19.93 36.04 .35.13 W2 Balsta.l 11. 110 2,95 19.32 34.95 34.09 1023 450 4.0 r i)4:i 20 2.8 19.34 34.99 34.12 1024 .\rnii. 410 400 6 55 19,96 36.11 35.18 944 50 2.8 19.39 35.08 34.21 67"! 1' N'., !M5 80 3.45 l!l.39 35.08 34.21 1 1 April :i<'\ry K. ;i4(> 100 3.1 1!i:'.j ■ -il :. :U.()9 1028 100 3.5 19.21 34.75 33.90 950 80 3.85 19.36 35.03 i 34.16 1029 150 3.2 19.26 34.85 33.99 951 100 2.85 19.36 35.03 34.16 ; 1030 185 3.35 1926 34,85 33.99 952 Nufsfjord. 125 3.05 19.29 34.90 34.04 : 1031 Skjersladfjord IV. 330 250 .3.2 19.29 3490 34.04 953 «i/s; miles SSO of N. 50 2.95 19.29 34.90 34.04 I 1032 300 3.2 19.29 34.90 34.04 954 80 2.95 19.32 34.95 34.09 1033 3.30 3.15 19.29 34.90 34.04 955 100 2.95 19.39 35.08 3421 1034 Skjerstadfjord V. 420 2.4 19.18 34.70 i 33.85 956 120 3.0 1035 Off Kvænflaaet. 20 2.45 19.18 34.70 33.85 957 Reine. 112 2.95 19.32 .34.95 34.09 1036 50 3.4 19.18 34.70 33.85 958 .nO 2.85 19.32 34.95 34.09 1037 80 3.55 19.21 34.76 33.90 959 80 2.85 19.32 34 95 34.09 1038 100 3.5 19.21 34.76 j 33.90 9H0 100 4.2 19.39 35.08 34.21 1039 150 3.3 19 26 34.85 33.99 9H1 22 Tranodybet. 620 2.7 19.32 34.95 .34 09 1040 ■ 200 3.2 19.26 34.85 33.99 9H2 Between Trano and 50 2.75 19.32 34.95 34.09 1041 2.50 3.2 19.27 1 .34.86 34.(.tO 963 Lødingen. 80 2.75 19.32 34.95 34.00 1042 300 3.15 19.29, 34.90 34.04 964 100 2.7 19.32 34.95 34.09 i 1043 400 3.15 19.32 34.95 1 34.09 965 120 2.65 19.32 34.95 34 09 1 1044 Skjerstadfjocd UI. 230 200 3.2 19.26' 34.85 33.99 966 150 19.32 34.95 .34.09 1045 Skjerstadfjord VH. 480 400 3.2 19.32, 34.85 33.99 967 180 2^8 19.52 35.31 34.43 1046 Off Fauske. 475 3.15 19.32 34 85 33.99 968 190 6.25 19.75 35.73 34.83 1047 4 Skjerstadfjord XII. 515 2.3 19.11 34.58 33 73 969 200 5.5 19.75 35.73 3483 1048 Off Skjerstad 20 2.7 19.11 34.58 33.73 970 250 6.25 19.75 35.73 34.83 1U49 church. 50 3.45 19.18 34.70 33.85 971 400 6.3 19.91 36.02 35.10 1050 100 3.4 19.24 34.81 33.'5 972 500 6.3 19.91 36.02 3.5.10 1051 150 3.3 19.26 34.85 33.99 973 600 6.3 19.91 36.02 35.10 1052 200 3.25 19.26 34.85 33.99 974 Øgsfjord. 195 2.06 19.22 34.77 33.92 1053 300 3.2 19.29 34.95 34.04 975 At the mouth. 20 2.2 19.24 34.81 33.95 1054 500 3.15 19.32 34.95 34.09 976 50 2.3 19.24 34.81 33.95 1055 Skjerstadfjord XIV. 400 400 3.05 19.32 34.95 34.09 977 80 2.35 19.24 34.81 33.95 i 10.56 5 Saltenfjord H. 320 3.2 19.33 34.97 34.11 978 100 2.35 19.24 34.81 33.95 1057 67»14'.5 N.. 20 3.15 19.33 34.97 34.11 979 150 2.4 19.24 .34.81 33.95 1058 14026' E. 50 3.1 19.33 34.97 34.11 190 2.6 19.27 3486 34.(30 1059 60 3.6 19.54 35.35 34.47 9S1 23 Østnesfjord I. 27 2.1 19.22 34.77 33 92 1060 80 4.4 19.62 35.49 34.60 9S2 At the head of the fjord. Østnesfjord II. 20 2.35 19.24 34.81 33.95 1061 1062 100 120 5.0 5.9 19.73 19.76 35.69 35.75 34.79 34.84 983 135 2.3 19.22 34.77 33.92 10tj3 150 6.2 19.82 35 86 34.94 984 Between Vaterfjord 20 2.3 19.22 3477 33.92 1064 200 6.55 19.89 35 98 35.06 985 and Følstad. 50 2 5 19.24 34 81 33.95 1065 250 6.65 19.93 36.05 3.5.13 986 80 2.9 19.24 34.81 33.95 1066 320 6.65 19.93 36.05 35.13 987 100 3.45 19,32 34.95 34.09 1067 6 Foldenfjord I. 530 3.2 19.33 34.97 .34.11 988 130 .5.75 19.36 35.03 34.16 1068 67037' N., 20 3.1 19.33 34.97 34.11 989 Østnesfjord III. 135 2.35 19.22 34.77 33 92 1069 1.502' E. 50 3.1 19.46 35.21 34.33 990 Abreast of Helle ?0 2.45 19.22 34.77 33.92 1070 80 4.2 19.46 35.21 34.33 991 50 2.6 1071 100 4.15 19.50 35.28 34.39 992 80 2.65 19.24 34.81 33.9". 1072 120 5.55 19.78 35.78 34.88 993 100 3.2 19.36 35 03 34.16 1073 150 6.4 19.91 36.02 35.10 994 130 4.4 1074 200 6.6 19.78 35.78 34.88 995 26 Orsnes. 105 2.8 19 39 35.08 3421 1075 250 6.6 19.82 35.86 3494 996 50 2.8 19.39 35.08 3421 1076 300 6.6 19.82 35.86 34.94 997 80 2.8 19.39 35.08 34.21 1077 400 6.55 1992 36.04 3.5.12 998 100 4.7 19..50 35.28 34.39 1078 500 6.55 19.85 35.91 35.00 999 Hennings\ær. 160 2.7 19.32 34.95 34.09 1079 7 Vestfjord. 315 2.85 19.31 34.94 34.07 1000 50 2.8 19.32 34.95 34.09 1080 Between Fladø and 20 2.8 19.33 3497 34.11 1001 80 2.8 19.40 35.01 34.23 1081 Skroven. 50 3.6 19.38 35.06 34.19 1002 100 4.3 19.46 35.21 34.33 1082 60 4.55 19.60 35.46 34.57 1003 140 4.65 19.54 3.5.35 34.45 i 1083 80 5.65 19.63 35.51 34.62 1004 Bålstad. 135 2.8 34.95 34.09 : 1084 100 6.4 19 63 35 51 34.62 1005 50 2.8 19.32 34.95 34.09 1085 120 6.45 19.83 35 87 34.9(> 1006 80 3.3 19.54 35.35 34.47 1086 150 6.45 19.85 35.91 35.00 1007 100 4.5 19.57 35.40 34.52 1087 200 6.5 19 90 36.00 35.08 1008 130 4.0 19.57 35.40 34..52 1088 250 6.5 19.90 36.00 35.08 1009 27 Reine. 170 2.55 19.36 35.03 34.16 1089 300 6.5 19.92 36.04 35.12 1010 50 • 2.8 19.40 35 01 34.23 1090 Hola. 1.50 2.95 19.25 34.33 33.97 101 1 80 2.9 19.40 3.5.01 34.23 1091 At Svolvær. 10 2.55 19.25 34.33 33.97 1012 100 4.6 19.54 35.35 3447 1092 20 2.5 19.32 34.95 34.09 1013 1.50 6.3 19.75 35.73 34.83 1093 50 2.5 19.34 .34.99 .34.12 1014 30 T.andeiro 450 3.25 19..57 35.40 34.52 1094 80 2.75 19.25 34.83 33.97 11115 67''2:i' X.. ' 50 3.95 19.50 35.27 34.39 1095 100 3.95 19.51 35.30 34.41 lOlh 3019' K. ' 100 3.65 19..54 .35.S.-1 :U.47 l(J9b 120 4.95 19..57 35.40 34.52 1(117 i 120 4.3 19.64 ; 35.;^:5 , 34(14 1097 1 1.50 5.85 19.78 1 .3.5.80 1 34.881 B. Remarks on the Observations. a. The Vest Fiord and the Coast Sea. The observations, made in the Vest Fiord in January 1899, proved that at that time a comparatively high temperature prevailed oil the surface of the water. At Høla, near Svolvær, the surface temperature was S^.s C. on January 11th, halfway between Grøtø and Skroven 4.4 was i-eaistered on the surface and between Helligvær and Værø on the 13th of the nionth 4.6. About 4.0 was the surface temperature in Moskenstrømmen, and on the fishinggrounds beyond Reine, Stam- sund and Henningsvær. The highest degree which was registered in January, and in fact the liighest surface temperature which was registered during tlie whole winter by this expedition was 5.9 (^Vj) beyond Vester- aalen, 40 miles NNW of Gaukværø. Further, as a result of the observations in the Vest Fiord, it is found that in the majority of places the maximum temperature is not reached at the bottom. At the station in the middle of the fiord between Grøtø and Ski-oven ("/i) the maxinmm (6.9) was at a depth of 100 meters. At the station at Helligvær ('-/i) tiie maximum (7.6) was reached at a depth og 140—150 meters, and at the station between Helligvær and Værø the maxinunn 7.2 — 7.6 at a deptii af 120—150 meters. In tiie Lofot tishhigbanks too, there was a less clearly defined maximum, for instance at Stamsund (^Vi) 6.9 at 120 m., and on tiie same day 6.7 at 120—150 m. at Henningsvær. On .January .•?lst, the minimum at Høla was 2..5 on the surface, and the maxi- mum ().8 near the bottom at a depth of 150 meters. Corresponding conditions were noticed on the same day in the Østnes Fiord (Li- iaiids Bay, Følstad, Heilo). Also at Skroven on Feliniary 41li tiie maximum (7.1) was found at a iic]i1h of \W motors, tiic Imttom temperature being 6.3 (380 m.). ill tiie (iceii oil' M'raiio tlic iiiaxiiiuuii (72) was reached about 150 m. down, tiio l)Ottom temperatnrc lieiug (>.3 at 630 meters. In Øxsund ("/a) the higliest temperature (6.9) was at a depth of 150 meters, and here too tiic temperature at 630 meters was 6.,3. Here arc some instances from the Lofot fishing banks: — 'V-.. 16 miles SSW of Henningsvær. Surface temperature 2.6, maximum 7.0 at deptii of 120 iiitrs., bottom temperature (260 mtrs.) 6.6. '"/;. 12 miles EtS of Reine. Surface 2.7. max. (12() mtrs.) 6.5. Imttom temp. 6.2. Hence it may be gathered that in tiie months of .Tanuary and February, the maximum temperature was to be found at a depth of 120 — 150 meters. Towards the end of February this maximum will be found near the bottom over large portions of the flshmg banks. Observations on the Lofot banks in March show niinimuin on the surface, and, as a rule, maxiinuni near the bottom at a de|)th of 150—200 meters. At greater depths in the fiords a less cleaily defined maximum could at the same time be traced at a depth of 150—200 meters. Measurements taken in April show a continued cooling of the upper layers, with a surface temperature of 1 — 2 at Henningsvær, Stene and Reine. The section beyond Ingø ('-V4 1899) 71° 10' N. 23" 10' E' showed minimum (3.2) on the surface, and maximum (3.8) at a depth of about 100 meters. But on the otlier hand, from observations made off Nordkyn and Vardø (Vs) it was found that the temperature at these places was evenly disposed from the surface to the bottom. On the first days of May there was no indication of any spring minimum, on the sea coast of Finmark nor in the Lyngen Fiord'). But when on May 5th I again took the temperatures at Høla near Svolvær the surface showed 2.65 and minimum (1.9) tiiere had already reached a depth of 20 meters. To give an idea of the changes in temperature and salinity in the course of the winter months, a talile of observations made at Gaukværø off Vesteraalen is subjoined. 18/j 1899 680 35' N. 140 13' E. 11/4 1899 68» 34' N. 140 17' E. Deptli in meters Temperature CO. Salinitv "/oo" Depth in meters Temperature Salinity "/go 4.1 33.50 2.85 .34.17 10 4.4 33.B6 20 2.66 .34.17 20 4.6 . 33.50 50 2.70 34.17 :}0 4,G 33.66 80 3.2 34.2,. so or. 34.04 100 4.0 .34.49 150 H.i> 34.27 120 4.4 .34.60 2.50 7.1 3433 150 4.G 34.74 200 5 06 34.7!) 2.50 5.2 34.86 1) At Lyngen III (cf. no. 87 deptli of 20 m. Hvdiogrnpliy. As (lie iilai'os at which thi'S(> ohscivalions woro made arc so near oacli otlior that one iii,i\, wilhnnt any tVai' of making any mistake worthy itt' the name, eoiisider them as one and the same, it is made clear from this table tiiat iVom .lannaiy to April there is a considerable decrease in the temperatuie, but an increase in the salinity of the layers of water on the Noi-thcrn coast banks. We see too that although at Vardø and Norkyn there was no indication (if the spring mininiuin, yet on tlic sea coast off Vesteraalen the minimum (2.65) was I'eachcd at a ilcptli of 20 meters as early as April nth. Here is a table of obsei'vations made ou tiie coast sea otf Senjcn. -' , mm. The Senjen Sea, 12 miles NWtW of Maanesodilen •»/4 1899. The Senjen Sea. Deptli in meters Temp. C. Salinity "/oo Depth in meters Temp. CO. Salinity o/oo a.3 3:!.i3 3 35 34.60 10 s.. 3:3.13 20 3.45 34.60 20 ;u Xi 13 50 .5.1 34.97 40 ;.{.ii 33.13 80 5.3 34.97 50 4.3 33.13 ISO 4.5 33.33 100 4.(; 33.33 120 4.4 33.33 'i'he comparatively high temperatures and salinity on 'V4 indicate tiiat water from the south has displaced the Avater whose temperature and salinity on "Vi is mentioned above. That the layers of water on the banks of the northern coast are tolerable homogeneous in the winter, was also gathered from the observations of previous years. Captain l^ie on '% 189'^ found the following conditions at a station situated west of Søroen: 'V4 1897. 70» 45' N.. 20" 30' E. Depth in meters Temperature C». Salinity 4.1 34.56 10 4i 34.56 20 4.1 34.64 50 4.0 34 54 80 4.0 34 56 120 4.3 34.61 In February 1897 I measured off Vesteraalen: 1" , l.S!J7. OS" .50' N.. 1 1" :!<;' K. Depth in meters Temperature Salinity 0/00 3.9 33.87 50 4.2 .33.92 100 4.35 33.92 150 4.35 33.92 170 4.35 33.92 When the salinity is as even as tabulated above, a fall in the surface temperature caused by the giving of^' of heat to the atmo- .sphere is easily balanced by the vertical currents. So as to give a clear idea of the decrease of surface temperatures, I will now compare ob.sei'vations made in tlic (Iccj) dlf Tiano Tlio Vest Fiord — on Feb. (ith and March jr.th is'.i'.). Tranødybct. 68" 15'.5 N., 15" 49' E. ■ — ==_^=_ '% 1899 "Va 1899 Depth in meters Temp. Salinity Temp. Salinity 33.50 l5 3.3.68 20 2' 33.50 33.60 3.0 3.3.63 33.84 80 4.6 .3;i.74 42 34.03 100 34,16 4.2 34 03 1.50 li.o 34.89 6.6 .34.75 200 H.4 ;35.03 6.4 34.94 250 «4 :J5.os 6.6 35.06 ;500 :^r,.u 6.5 35.00 400 (>3 :35.i4 500 fi.3 ;3.5.i4 6.3 35.00 (iOO li.3 .35.14 6.3 :^5.„6 It will be noticed that the fall in temperature has principally taken place in the upper 20 meters, which in the time mentioned became about 1" coldei'. The observations made along the Lofot fishing banks in March 1900 bear great resemblance to those in March of the year before. Minimum (2 — .3) was found on the suifacc, and maximum at a depth of 150—200 metei's. This again proved that the maximum temperature is found at or near the bottom in the majority of the fishing banks. Measurements at Høla near Svolvæi' and in the Vest Fiord, halfway between Skroven and Fladø (''A) proved that spring mini- mum was even then beginning to be evident. The salinity of the waters which covered the Lofot banks in January 1899 was from 33—35 "/oo. The titration of the samples taken in that month only rarely, however, show so high a saUnity as 35. The complete series of observations made on '7i on the sea off Vesteraalen (40 miles NNW of Gaukvæi'ø) did not even reach so high as 35 although samples were taken from the surface right down to a depth of 1000 meters. But as this is an isolated case, I will not give any particular weight to it. During measurements in February, 35 "on was reached in some "/2 1899, neai- Skroven 200 m. 35.08. ''/2 „ Oxsund 300 m. 35.08. -V2 ,, Henningsvær III 200 m. 35.03. "/2 „ Reine I 150 m. 35.08. It will be found too that measuiements in the Vest Fiord in March showed a salinity of about 35 at a depth of 200 m. and the same holds good with regard to April. Neither was any ex- ception to this rule discovered in the measnromcnts in the Vest Fiord in March I'JOO. If the salinity on different dates be compared, for instance that at (Jaukværo (Gaukvær Island) on >7i and ''A 1899 and at Senjen on -'Vi and "A it "^vill at once be seen tliat a considerable increase has taken place. So as to emphasize this fact still more, I will mention my observations at Høla neai' Svolvær. Høla uear Svolvær. Depth in meters 9/4 1896 "/a 1897 V3 1897 .0/3 1897 ii/i 1899 31 /j 1899 13' 1899 "-% 1899 ^/4 1899 5/s 1899 =0/3 1900 '/4 190(J T S T ^ T s T S 1 T S T S T S T S T S T s T s T s ^ 32.24 2.1 33.36 "4 2.3 33.68 3.3 33.16 2.1 33 25 1.3 33.48 1.0 33 46 0.8 33.72 2.66 33.73 j.„ 34.02 2.95 33.97 10 9 0. 2 3 33.68 .3.5 33.16 2.5 33.25 2.66 33.73 (2.86 34.14 2.55 3.3.97 21) 3.67 33.27 3.6 33.16 2.5 33.26 1.5 33.48 1.2 33.63 1.0 33.58 1.9 33.73 2.9 34.14 2.5 34.09 30 3.70 33..19 2.3 3.7 33.16 2.6 33.25 2.45 33.92 40 3.93 33..58 3.7 33.16 27 33.25 50 2..^ .33.42 2.5 33.61 2.4 33.68 3.8 33.21 3.3 33.37 2.0 33.76 1.3 33.68 1.05 .33.78 4.5 134.30 2.95 3414 2.5 31.12 80 3.8 .33.21 5.2 33.72 3.45 .3387 4,0 34.03 4.1 34.23 5.35 34 65 3.4 34.28 2.75 33.97 100 4.95 33.98 4.2 33.80 2.7 33.68 2.5 33.68 4.6 33.21 6.4 .34.20 4.0 34.00 4.5 34.14 5.0 .34.60 5.5 34.65 4.05 34.29 3.96 34.41 120 4.7 33.92 6.7 34.46 5.1 .34.26 5.2 .34.40 5.9 34.79 5.8 34.78 4.6 34.41 4.95 34.52 130 4.7 84.11 4.0 34.11 6.6 34.30 ! loO 5.93 34.29 6.6 34.52 6 8 34.59 6.1 .34 69 65 .34 84 6.4 34.97 6.15 1 34.64 5.4 .34.66 5.85 34.88 Fi'diii tlic al>ove table it seems to be sufficiently clear that the salinity of the layers of «ater increa.ses all through the months of .January to April inclusive. The reason for this is probably that the rainfall in the winter months is less than in the autumn. The fall which takes the form of snowis also at that time of year a factor which may be ignoi'ed. A g-ood deal of influence on the salinity of the water in the winter, is probably to be found in the fact that much fresh water is im- pi'isoned in the ice, which is formed in the smallei' fiords and at the ends of the ijreater ones. fJenerally speakini;' it may be aftirmed that the surface temjx^- rature and the surface salinity decreases the further in one goes in the Vest Fiord, and the values are of coui'se least at the ends of the branch fiords. This will be made clear if one foUuws tlie results of the ob- servations made, e. g. from Rombaken to X-æra and Røst. \Mth regard to the factors mentioned, it may be said that the continental and the oceanic powers oppose each other, and one would at once expect to find that the oceanic influence would be more strongly felt in ])r(iportion to distance from the ends of the fiords and ince rerm. While tlie temperature and salinity of the surface in the deep offTrano (Tran Island) "'A 1899 was 1.5 and 33.58, the corresponding fiyures at Værø wei-e 3.2 and 34.10 on the -ilst of the same month. ,\nd on the 22nd, there was found 35 pro mille water on the surface (if the sea NW of .Røst and a tempei'ature of .5.05. The ol)servatioiLs made there are of consi(h'rable interest. -73 1899. 68« 3' N. 10''.05' E. Depth ill Temp. Saliiiitv metei'.s C. ;«o 5.05 35.00 20 5.2 35.00 .50 6.0 35.09 80 6.4 35.24 100 6.4 3.5.31 120 6.4 35.31 1.50 6.3 35.31 200 6.15 35.31 250 5.8 .35.31 300 5.6 35 31 400 5.1 35.31 500 4.05 35.13 600 2..'-, .35.13 700 1 ;i 35 ...1 900 1.1 35.,m So that comjjarisons may be made. I also give Professor Mohx" bsei'vations made at ;i neighltouring station in June 1877. -"ir. 1S7 7. (is" 3' N.. 9" 53' E. Depth in Temperature meters C». 8.2 91 7.1 183 6.:! 366 5.3 549 3.6 732 - 0... ^•14 - 1.1 These observations are made with a Mileee-Csaella's deep water thermometer, while I used Professor Petteeson's waterbottle, which although it is an excellent instrument can hardly be depended upon with respect to its isolating properties when the depths are as great as from 7 to 9 hundred meters. The observations made on -7':'. 1899 at any rate siiow that 35 pro mille Avater may oif the banks of Lofot — Vestcraalcn i-each to a depth of at least 900 meters. I>y eom])aring the measurements on the Rost Sea (--/s) with those in tlie Tys Fiord (-"/.•;) very interesting results are obtained. -'Vs 1899. The Tvs Fioi'd 1. Depth in Temperature Salinity meters CO. %o 0.75 r 33.58 50 2.3 33.79 90 4.4 34.28 100 5.6 34.54 120 6.4 34.67 1.50 6.4 .34.91 200 6.3 34.97 2.50 6.3 34.97 .3110 6.3 3.5.11 400 6.3 .3.5.11 Hydvdgi-ii 13 Till" tompeiiiturc values in tlic uppcM- layers show consklorahlc (Ircrcase. while in the ilei^p a iiroixt eonstaney ]ircvails. P>ul un the other hand, on the Kost Sea the npiier layei's show a coni- jiaratively hig'h temperature. At hut the 1.1 (1 ) (leiith of !■_>() uietei's. tin then there is a -real dill' teuiiieratui'e falls from r,.- uit in the Tvs KionI at Ih tempeiature at hotli plaecs was lenee het ween them. On the to l.;i het ween 120 and 7(H) same deiiths it only falls from What eaii he It will at nni layers in the sea ditl'ereuee is tound eo.dini:- of the surf stra 10 reas(m oi th he nolieed that the i-e pretty uuudi the sar n the Tys l-'iord. At e iiives rise to vertieal dinai'y diHerenee? :iliuity of the ditfcrent ■. w hile a, eonsiderablc the former jilaee. the ■urreuts. wliieh in their turn almost halanee the ditt'crcnec in tenii)ci'atuie. In this way even a pi'ctty deep layer of water ma,\ exehaiii^e heat with the atmos])hei-e. But when the eondition.s arc like those in the Tys Finril. w here the salinity in the upper layers is so varied, even a consideiahle deercasc of surface temperature will not distui'b the ei|uilihriuui o\' the watei-. As niiw the distrihutiim of heat through the water takes place slowly, the result nuist he that the surface itself decreases consider- ahly in temperature, and that it is only a comparatively thin layer which exchang-es heat with the atmosphere. So as to get an idea of the extent of the changes which take jilaee in the upper layers, let us examine H. H. Gkan's observations made in the Tys Fiord in the summer of ISDsM {Hydrographical Tables s. XXVII). 1898. (>8» 1.5'.4 N., 16" "'.3 E. Korsnes in the Tvs Fiord. I)ei)tli in meters Temperature C». Salinity "/oo" * 13.„- 30.71 10 11. r, 33.(15 20 9.18 33.4S m 7.118 33.112 40 fi.05 .33.84 oO •n.n 33..S., As Gkan's station was close to the place where 1 made my ob- servations (Ty.s Fiord I), the results may be compared. We get the impression that the top layers are subject to great increase of temperature in summer and g-reat decrease in winter, and wee see too that the temperature at a depth of 100 meters on the -'7- was 5.4 and 5.5 on the '-'Va- lt is wellknown that the natural conditions in the depths of the large tiords are tirmly established. The water in the deep fiord basins is tolerably homogeneous, the temperature and salinity are almost unvarying throughout the whole mass, and there are only 1) H. H. Gr.^n. Ocean and the I'oasi Investigations. Vol. L.graiihioal, Biol u-dlaiul. (Rejmi- O. Nr. 5). Atlantic i Marine very slight dilferenees in the course of a year. There are especially two thiu-s which control this. In the lii'st place, the topography of the bottom of the .sea is of extreme importance, foi-, if for instance the deep part of the Tys Fiord was lengthened out towards the ocean, the probability is tliat conditi(uis would then be .somewhat different. In the .second place, the supply of continental fresh water, A\hich by weakening the surface layers forms these into an isolating belt, is doubtless of great imjjortancc in connection with the stability of the conditions in the depths of the iiords. There is certainly every reason to believe that there is a thicker layer on the sea which gives oif heat to the atmo.spherc than in the tioi'ds, but this does not, all the same, explain the great iall in temperature in the deep wliich takes place beyond the .sea boundary. One can scarcely think that this is kept up in any other way than by the How of watei- from colder regions. There must 1)0 a cold undercurrent in the ocean.') b. The Fiords. In the winter of 1899, I had an opportunity of visiting sevei'al of the northern fiords, and as I was able to make two sets of observations in some of these, 1 am in a position to give results which make it possible to compare. I was however prevented from making observations in the same fiords during the following wintei-. i)Ut I had the pleasure of obtaining several observations in tlie Skjerstad l'"iord, which presents many pecuUarities on account of its considerable depth and its being so shut otf from the sea. In the following pages, some details will first be given of each of the fiords visited, then an attempt will be made to give a gene- ral characteristic, by help of which the similarities and dissimilarities in physical conditions will be made clear. Sandhorno (o-island) which is situated S. of Bodo on the south side of the Salten Fiord is separated from the mainland by two .smaller fiord.s. Jietween Gildcskaal and Sandhorno we have Mor s- dal Fiord (also called S. lieier Fiord and Sund F'iord) and on the opposite side Ave have N. ] Jeier Fiord. In these two small fiords di'edgings were made "/a 1900. The farm Sund lies at the point of Gildeskaal peninsula. Here dredgings were made at a depth of 50 — 150 meters, and in the adjoining fiord just inside Kvarsnes at a depth of 50 metei's. Neither of the.se tiords seemed to be very deep. The Salten Fiord is the tolerably broad fiord arm which runs into the land near Bodii. The islands Stromo and GodO se- parate it from the Skjerstad Fiord, which farther in is also cal- led the Saltdal Fiord. The Salten and the Skjerstad Fiord are con- nected by three comparatively shallow sti-eams, of which the cen- ti'al one, the famous „Saltstrom" is a rival to the Moskensti'om in bulk and force. With regai'd to the depth of the Salten Fiord, two soundings are marked on the sea chart about half A\ay be- tween Sandhorno and the peninsula on which Bodo is situated, the one states a depth of 131 f. (246.60 m.) the other 112 f. (210.84 m.). A little further in, 1 sounded .380 meters but it was from a depth of .•i20 m. that the samples of water wei-e taken (Salten- fiord II). 1) Cf. nouniphical Hesnlt.s of 1900. N. Mag. u O. Nordgaard. Thus it appears that the bed of the Salten Fiord, Avhieh has a maximum depth of at least 380 meters, slopes fairly evenly out- Avards, but someAvhat steeply inwards; for at the outer end of ^alt- strommen 40 m. was reached and at the inner 60 m. It is said that in the most sliallow pai-t of the stream tlie depth is only about 20 meters. .Several soundings were taken in the Skjerstad Fiord, by means of which a very good idea of the depth can be formed. If not othei'wise specified, it may be taken for granted that the soundings were made in the middle of the fiord. At the end of the fiord (Skjerstad Fiord I) the bottom was reached at 30 — 50 m. About 1.5 miles out (S. II) the depth was 100 — 185. S. Ill and S. IV lie in the outer half of that part of the Skjerstad Fiord which runs southwards, and the depths here were respectively 230 and 330 meters. Opposite Kvænflaaet (S. V.) I sounded at -120 m., and in the arm of the fiord close to Fauske (S. VI) at 100 — 150 m. ; while the depth in the middle of the fiord opposite Fauske (S. VII, VIII) was 470 — 490 m. Just off the coast of Skjerstad in the direction of the Misvær Fiord the depth was 80—50 m. and at the mouth of the Misvær Fiord (S. X) 10 — 30 m., while a little further in the same fiord the depth was 50 m. (S. XI). On the other hand, the depth in the middle of the Skjerstad Fiord just opposite the church (S. XII) was 515 m. A little further out (S. XIII) strangely enougli it was only 110 m. deep, and from here the bed again sinks to the greatest depth sounded in the whole fiord, viz. 518 meters. Then it again inclines evenly upwards, for at the following stations in the direction of Saltstrommen (S. XIV, S. XV, S. XVI) the respective depths were 400, 380, 330 m. Measurements taken in the middle of the fiord from the end to the inner part of Salt- strommen give the following figures: 30, 50, 100, 185, 230, 330, 420, 470, 490, 515, 110, 518, 400, 380, 330, 40 m. How far the rise from 110 to 515 and 518 is an isolated I)oint, or whether there is a ridge stretchhig across tlie fiord, I am not able with certainty to decide. It will be seen from the foregoing that tiie Skjerstad Fiord is considerably deeper than the Salten Fiord, and that the greatest depth sounded in it up to the present time is 518 meters. Observations in the Skjerstad Fiord gain increased interest as the Norwegian North Atlantic Expedition in 1877 had a couple of stations here.') Temperature i-ogistratioiis are liere given for the sake of com- pai'ison. '■'A 1877. Tile Skjerstad Fiord. Doptli ill meters. Temp. CO. :i -j:! 'Vs 1877. The Skjerstad Fiord. Depth in Temperature meters. CO. 11.4 18 8.7 .37 7.8 .55 7.5 73 H.7 91 5.7 110 5..I 128 4.0 146 3.2 Kio 3.1 183 3.0 20\ 3.2 219 3.1 238 33 457 34 494 3.2 Now I will compare tliis table with one from my series of obsei'vations. V4I900. The Skjerstad Fiord XII. Depth in Temperature Salinitv meters. C. "oo- 2.3 33.73 20 2.7 33.73 50 3.45 33.aR 100 3.4 33.95 1.50 3.3 33.99 200 3.25 33.99 300 3.2 34.01 500 3.15 lU.o., These last two tables resemble each otlier in so far as in both of them the physical conditions from a depth of 150 m. down are seen to be pretty much alike, and this can hai'dly be looked upon as due to chance. The Skjerstad Fiord is a typical shut in basin, so tiiat there can be no I'enewal of the water in its bottom from any under- current. The temperature \\aves must come from above downwards, and according to what has already been mentioned one must be able to conclude that, e. g. the distribution of heat in the deep is in a high degree prevented by the mixing of fresh water with the surface layers. There are also signs which seem to indicate that the changes in degrees of heat take i)lace exceedingly slowly in the water at considerable depths. Reference has already been made to the conditions with regard to the maximum of temperature in the month of March in the Lofot i'anks. P>ut if one looks over the measurements in the Skjerstad l-i'iord in the beginning of April, it will be seen that even so late as that the maximum has not got very far. Hydrography. 15 Thus -4 .S. ir. so - , N. V. so 111. ■"!..") I max. I .ludying- IVom tlie liirui'es just uotcd for ■* i S. .\ll. it iiuiy also hv concluded that the maximum lies between 50 and loo in. Hut this again shows that the changes in temperature take place veiy slowly. In the ISalten Fiord, where the ocean water has free access, there was no sig-n of the maximum at a depth of 80 ni., the autumn maximum had entirely disappeared and the hiirhest temperature was reached at the bottom at a depth of 320 ni. .See the foIlo\\iiii;- table. 1900. The .Salten Fiord 11. Depth in Temperatm- Siiliiiitv nietors. C'\ "'«• 3.2 34.11 20 3.15 34.11 oO 3.1 34.11 HO 3.0 .34.47 80 4.4 34.00 100 .5.0 34.71. 120 .5.0 .34.,s4 130 6.a 34.'i4 200 6.65 .3.5.00 250 6.05 .35.1:! If the above table be compared to that of the section S. XII (^.4), a striking- difference will at once be noticed. Not only is the bottom temperature in the .Salten Fiord much higher than in the Skjerstad Fiord (.3°.5 difference) but the salinity on the surface of the former is even a little higher than at the depth of 500 m. in .S. Xll. That such decided differences in the hydrographical con- ditions of the Salten and Skjerstad Fiords, as shown by tempera- ture and salinity, also cause biological differences, is a foregone conclusion. This subject will be dealt \\-ith further on in this treatise. From the Folden Fiord, 1 have only one sounding (74 1900 Foldenfj. I; taken halfway between Hjerto and the south mainland. The depth was 5-30 meters. From the hig-h temperature and sali- nity of the water from the bottom (Vide no. 1067—1078) one may conclude that the ocean water is not prevented from floning into, at any rate, the outer part of the fiord. It should be added that there is another Norwegian fiord which bears the name of the Folden Fiord, it is in the county of North Trondhjem, just south of the 65th degree of latitude. In the old days, the Kristi- ania Fiord also used to be known by this name. The Ox Sound and the Sag Fiord. One of the entrances to the Sag Fiord from the Vest Fiord is formed by the Ox Sound (between Hammero and LundO). While in the sea chart for that part of the Vest Fiord which is beyond the Ox Sound the depth is given as 211—252 fathoms (397.21—474.38 m.) we took in the Ox Sound the following depths from the mouth inwards: 455, 450, 630, 620, 620 meters. So that this short, narrow sound (the length is about 5 miles, and the breadth about 1 mile) has a maximum depth of 630 meters. I believe this is the one single case in the whole of Norway. Respecting temperature and salinity, attention is drawn to the tables (nr. 351—362). It will be seen that it is especially from the upper 20 meters that the accumulation of the summer heat is given off to the atmos- phere. It may probably also be stated as a fact that the less salt surface layers serve as an isolating belt, by means of which the loss of heat fi-om the layers beneath is to a great extent prevented. In the Sag Fiord proper, only a couple of soundings were taken in the inner end outside Furrunes (Sagfj. I, II). The depths here were respectively 210 and 315 m. From the high temperature and salinity of the water at the bottom {Vkh nr. 363—368) I conclude that this inner part of the fiord is not shut off by any ridge from the rest of it. The innermost parts of the Vest l''iord and of tJie Tys Fiord are very interesting on account of their great depths. The greatest depth in the Vest Fiord is found north of TranO, for the sake of brevity 1 refer to this as the Trani3 deep (Tranodybet). On the old sea charts soundings are not marked beyond a line Kjeo- Trano, but I have taken many soundings from here, from which it is made clear that the great fall of 5—600 m. and more contiines almost up to Baro. Halfway between liani and Rotvær 280 m. were sounded, from here in the direction of Tranii the following depths were noted: 324, 570, 608, 610, 630, 620, 535. In a straight line across the fiord from Offerso in the direction of Tiltvigtind the following were sound- ed: 250, 630, 680, 640 m. and from Offerso to the mouth of the Tys Fiord: 485, 580, 585, 320, 465 m. Thus it will be seen that there is a rise directly outside the mouth of the Tys Fiord. After this rise there is again a fall in the bed of the Tys Fiord, for soundings taken in a straight line from the centi'c of the mouth of the Tys Fiord to the inner half of Skårberget gave the following figures: 615, 630, 615, 725, 725 m. This great depth is almost without variation right up to Skårberg. As far as I knoAv, 725 m. is the greatest depth reached in any fiord north of Trondhjem, and I take the Uberty of calling the great basin which stretches from Korsnes to Skårberg, the Tysfiord deep. The innermost boundary for this basin I am unable to give precisely; the last sounding at 725 m. was taken a little further in than Skårberg, and here dredgiligs ^\-ere made and samples of plankton and water taken (Tysfiord 1). A sounding between Ulvo and the Northern mainland gave a depth of 230 m., while tJie depth at the station Tysfiord II, which is a little further in than Tysfiord church, was 409. A little further in, in the same arm of the fiord, the bottom was reached at 130 and 140 m. respectively. That there is no high submarine ridge between Tys Fioi'd church and the mouth of the fiord, may be seen by comparing the observations made at the two stations {Vide nrs. 651 — 672). The observations made in the basins of the Tys Fiord and Tranii show a great similarity. There is reason to believe that the bot- tom temperature at the places mentioned remains for years at 6 — 7, with a salinity of about 35. The animal and plant existences in the basins, thus live in physical conditions of remarkable constancy. The Vest Fiord is continued in the Ofot Fiord, which again has several important arms. Of these, the .Skjomen Fiord and the Rom bak Fiord were vi.sited in 1899. There is a rise in the bed a little west of Baro, which is again succeeded by a fall towards the Ofot Fiord. Between Baro and Tjelodden 545 m. were reached, and opposite .Skarstad 550. Then there is a rise; for opposite Havnes the depth was 360 (Ofoten 1, '/■. 1899) and between Bogen— Ballangen (Ofoten II, 'h. 1900) 258 m. There are considerable depths also in the Rombak <,rcVa Fiord, a little further in than Oijord 310 m. was sounded (Rom- baken III, Vo 1899). Furthest in at Rombakbotnen the depth was only 40 m. (Rombaken I) and opposite outer .Sildvig- 110 m. (Rom- baken II, Vide nrs. 302—311). At the station .Skjomen lat the end of the Skjomen Fiord near Elvegaard the deptli was also only ■10 m. (nrs. 322—324). In the middle part of this fiord (Skjomen II) the depth howe- ever was 150 m. (nrs. 325 -329) and the same depth was sounded just a little further in than the mouth, while a sounding taken in the mouth projjor gave only .S5. Moreover, judging fi'om the figu- res giving the temperature and salinity at the station Skjomen I and II, it may be concluded that this fiord is shut off by a submarine ridge from any floM- of warm, salt ocean water. Thus we have V2 189». Skjomen II. Dejith in T umperature Salinity meters. C'O. "Zoo- 1.8 33.50 20 1.8 33.37 50 1.8 33.37 100 1.7 33.37 150 1.7 :!3.4o Generally there is ice on the Skjomen Fiord in the winter. Similar physical conditions are found in Rombakbotnen, which is connected to the Rombak Fiord proper by a shallow stretch known as .,StrOmmen" (The current). On the other hand, obser- vations in the outer Rombak Fiord (R. Ill, 72 1899, nrs. 312—321) show that the warm, salt ocean water has been able to get access to this place. From the measurements taken in February in 1897 and 1899 in the Ofot Fjord, it is made sufficiently clear that the surface layers of the fiord in question gave off much more heat than is the case in the Lofot fishing grounds, and the loss of heat is still greater in the smaller fiords which adjoin the Ofot Fiord. The Ogs Fiord is shut ott' from the Vest Fiord by innumer- able .small islands and holms, but the Kanstad Fiord has a more direct connection with the principal fiord. When we visited the Kanstad Fiord on "/.i 1899 its inner part M'as covered with ice, (lur first station (K. I) thus being just beyond ,,Str()mmen" Avhich connects the inner and outer half. The depth here is only 30 m. I'^uither in than Kvalo 84 ra. was reached. Just beyond KvalO outwards there is a rise in the bed which is called ,,the ridge" (revet). From this point onwards to just opposite Nes the follow- ing depths were reached: 4(J, 75, 95 ni. About halfway between Offersii and liarO the de])tli was found to be 215 metens. On 'V3 1899 the temperature inside „tho ildge" at a depth tif 90 meters was 1.6 and the salinity 33.48; outside at the same depth the temperature 4.4 and the salinity 34.06. It may also be gathered fi'om this that tiic outtM- i)art of the Kanstad Fiord is connected witJi tJic Vest liord by an unbi'okcn cliannol. while the ridge prevents the Avarnier bottom water fnim pcnctratinL'- into tiie inner pai't of the fiord. Outside the mouth of the Ogs Fioid, there is a stretch of water, which is nearly free for islands and holms, which is called ..Flaket''; and here I have sounded from 175—220 meters. This comparatively open stretch of water continues towards Pundslet- vaagen and Aarstenen. ObserA'ations made on '% 1899 however (nrs. 455 — 463) give such low temperature and salinity that one must conclude that ,,Flaket" is pretty much shut off. At a depth of 220 m., for instance, the temperature was 1.7 and salinity only 33.4o. On the inner part of the Ogs Fiord there is ice in the winter. Station I ("/s 1899) was just on the border of the ice. The depth here was 100 m.; temperature 2.1 from the surface to the bottom, but the salinity varied from 32.54 — 33.10 (nrs. 522—525). Station IT ("A 1899) was situated near Halvorso towards the mouth of the Ogs Fiord. The depth here was 207 m. As several observations were made here, I adjoin the various results for the sake of com- The Oi;s Fiord II. Depth in Tei iperature Salinilv meters. C». «Zoo- 1.3 32.05 20 1.6 33.28 50 1.7 33.33 100 1.5 33.33 150 01 11 1 1.4 33.33 On -'-'/i 1897 I also had a station not far from Halvorso') (Hydr. Tables p. 16). Then the following results were obtained: Depth in Temperature Salinity meters. CO. °/oo- 1.4 33.26 10 2.1 3.3.49 50 2.3 33.40 100 2.G 33.61 145 2.7 ;33.6: At the same place on ■'■'/■j obtained : illowing results were Depth in Temperature Salinity meters. CO. "/go- 2.06 33.92 20 2.2 33.05 50 2.3 88.06 80 2.3.^, 33.05 100 2.36 33.06 150 2.4 33.96 190 2.0 34.00 It will he seen from these observation tables that the hydro- graphical conditions in the Ogs Fiord vary in no small degree from year to year. One might almost bo tonipted to say that more of ') H.10RT, Gran and NoRDOAAnn. Kh gatious 1895—97. Bergen 1899. Norwegian Marine Inv Hydrography. 17 I ho salter water floAvs in one year than another, which ap'ain one mig-ht ;K-L'Ount for, as tlie curve for ."54 pro niilio in tiio corresponding- part of tiie Vest Fionl reached iiiiilier one year tiian tlie otiier. How- ever nothing certain can be said on tiiis point. There is another tiord, the Ostncs Fioid. w hidi from the Vest Fiord goes into Ostvaagii. and this liord is of far more importance economically speaking tliaii tlic two Hords just mentioned on Hinno. Tn the 0)stnes Fiord there is ol'tcii very good cod fishing. The greatest depth which was measured in isii'.i was 140 meters just opposite lleUc in the oiitei' part of the tiord. Respec- ting the hydrographieal conditions refer to the tables nrs. 207—234, iiSl— li;)4. The Kirk Fiord stretches in to Moskeueso from the Vest Fiord. The greatest depth we measured on 'Va 1S99, a little way from the mouth of the Vor Fiord inwards, was 130 meters. From 0—100 m. here the temperature rose fi'om 2.0 to 2.7, while tile salinity increased from 33.lti to 33.48. At Station II in the inner half of the tiord tiic rise in tem- perature and salinity was respectively (from 0—50 m.) 1.5 — 2.5 and 32.95-33.40. Ville the tables nrs. 420—425. In the Vest Fiord at the same time (11 miles iSE of Reine) the temperature at a depth of 100 m. was (;.5 and salinity 34.52. In the Mai ang Fiord, I have only observations from the deepest part between Senjen and Kval(3. But I have two sets of observations taken on -7i and '-/4 1899 respectively. It is interesting to compare these, nrs. 182—195, 757—767). In this fiord just as at several other places in the month of .January, there was on -"/i a homogenous layer from the surface to a depth of 100 m. with a temperature of 2.9 and a salinity of 33.92. From 120 — 350 m. the temperature rose from 3.0 to 5.5 and salinity from 33.97 to 34.52. On ^'A the conditions were con- siderably altered. As one would expect, the cooling of the surface layers was still farther advanced. The upper 50 m. had a tempe- rature of l.H, which is equal to more than one degree's fall. There is nothing remarkable in this, but more unexpected was ir to find that the temperatuix> at a depth of 350 m. had fallen from 5.5 to 4.1. Such a considerable change of temperature at such a great depth has not previously been observed in our fiords. Neither can it be explained as the result of a cooling process, by which the layers of water have given off heat to the atmosphere. Tlie most likely solution of this problem is that this change is occasioned by an undercurrent from the ocean. A hint in this direction is also given by the fact that tiie salinity was also some- what higher. Measurements in the Lyngen Fiord (-'/i and ^5 1899) also furnish interesting examples of a considerable change in hydro- graphical conditions. AMth regard to tiic deptJis in this fiord it should be mentioned that we sounded lis — 125 m. opposite Ski- botten; 250 m. outside the mouth of the Kaa Fiord; 200 m. op- posite Spokenes, and 320 m. between outer Gamvik and the north ]ioint of Ulo. Thus it appears that Lyngen, like the majority of tlie northern fiords, is deepest in the outer part. Observations made on -"/i (nrs- 155 — 162) at station L. II show a remarkable uniformity from the surface to the bottom. At the next station the state of things was still more remark- able (nrs. 163—173), as the temperature decreased from the sur- face downwards. This is exactly contrary to what is usual in the fiords in the winter, and I therefore call it the reversed win- ter state. At station L. Ill too. there was an indication of some- thing similar, the temperature at a depth of 150 m. being 3.4 and at 200 m. 2.9 (nrs. 174-181). But on the other hand on "Vr, the state of tilings in the same liord was altogether different. On this date at station L. I there was an inequality, both in temperature and .salinity (nrs. 861—860), and at st. L. II the usual winter state, with quite an even rise in the temperature from the surface downwards (nrs. 868-875). The same conditions were also found at St. L. Ill') (nrs. 875—884). The question now arises how can the unusual distribution of heat which was found at st. L. II on ^7i (tlie reversed winter state) be explained. As, however, tiie case here nieiitioned is not an isolated one, I will not give my theory to explain it. until 1 have described the other similar cases. In the Kvænang Fiord we took soundings between LokO and P.ry- nilen at a depth of 150 m., between Spilderen and the south main- land at a depth of 180 m. Between Spilderen and the north main- land 343 m. was sounded, and it is probable that this is tiie grea- test fall in the bed of the Kvænang Fiord. Further in the fionl near the island Noklan the depth was only 90 m., and in the JOkel Fiord which joins the Kvænang on the north 110 m. were reached on the border of the ice right in at the end of the fiord close to the glacier. This depth was also reached just outside the Tver Fiord. Measurements on =Vi 1899 at K. I and II (nrs. 135 — 154) showed a remarkable uniformity in the temperature and salinity of the layers of water. This uniformity was also found on '"A- To verify this the values are compared in the following table. It should be noticed that K. I on -Vi = K. I on *74- Kvænangen 70" 1' N., 21° 28'.5 E. Between Spilderen and the southern mainland. -*/l 1899 ... 1899 Depth in meters Temp. Salinity Temp. ■ Salinity «/oo 2.0 33.87 0.73 34.21 10 2.6 33.87 0.75 34.21 20 2.6 33.87 0.75 34.21 30 2.0 33.87 0.70 34.21 50 2.0 33.87 0.75 34.21 SO 2.0 33.87 0.75 34.21 100 2.0 33.87 0.75 34.21 120 2.0 33.87 0.73 34.21 150 KiO 33.87 0.75 2.0 34.21 34.49 ISO H. 33.87 From this table it will be seen that from -\ i to the '''/4 there was a cooling in the upper 120 m. of nearly 2°, and that during the same period the salinity increased. The slight irregularity found in the observations on '-'A (nrs. 803 — 810) is probably to be accounted for by some process of mix- ing. On the other hand, the physical conditions in the Jokel Fiord are particularly uniform (nrs. 794—802) with a low temjie- rature and a rather high salinity. The depths in the Porsanger Fiord are well known, as it has been sounded long ago. According to the sea chart the maxi- mum depth 150 f. (282.37 m.) is reached in the mouth between Sværholtklubben and Heines on Magero. Hence and inwards to Stoi'e Tamso the depth is about 200 ni. or more. Depths of about 200 m. have also been sounded further in than the island mentio- ned; but the Porsanger Fiord on the wliole may be said to be comparatively shallow. According- to dr. Hjort') a remarkably low temperature -f- 1".15 C. was registered, at a depth of from 90— 100 meters, in the summer of 1900, by the „Michael Sars" expedition. Further out in the tiord at a depth of 200 m. a tempei-ature of 3°.(> C. was measured. When we visited the Porsanger Fiord at the end of April 1899, the whole of the inner part of the tiord was covered vith ice, but, as the observations made on ■''—^^/i (nrs. 833—846) show, a temperature so low as 0^.2 C. was taken between Store and Lille Tamso at a depth of 200 m., and this is the lowest temperature jwhich has ever been registered in any Noi'wegian fiord at such a great depth. And the tempei'ature H- f.is C, which was registered by the „Michael gars" expedition ill the summer of 1900, is the lowest which has been found at all in any Norwegian fiord. The temperatures noted in the Porsanger fiord give similar results to those already kno^\■n from the Lyngen Fiord. There is a fall in temperature from the surface do\\-nwards (the reversed winter state). At the mouth of tlic Porsanger Fiord on -*/4 1900 the follow- ing conditions were noted: Depth iu Temp. Salinity meters CO °'do 2.26 .H4.54 20 2.25 34.54 50 2.15 1.4 s:; 150 1.4 ;i4 54 From the surface down to 200 m. the salinity is fairly uniform, liut the temperature falls from 2.25 to 1.3. On the other hand, along the bottom at a deptli of 250 m. a flow of warmer and .■waiter water has jieuctratcd (2°.75 C. and 34.78 %o). ISctween Store and I^ille Tamsii where observations were made on -74 1899 we noted the following: Depth iu Temp. Salinity meters C %o 1.06 34.00 20 1.05 .54.00 50 1.0 .34.07 80 1.0 34.07 100 0.05 34.00 120 0.95 34.07 150 0,75 34.07 200 0.2 34. 1H M (T. ILion-r, Fiskeri Of^ Hvalfangst, (iiero-en lil Mulluskeii cler er.sten Nordmeerfahrt. (Bergens mn? There is reason to lielievo that the ..reversed winter state" describes conditions which are ea.sily disturbed. It is true I had no opportunity of repeating the vertical section at any other places than those in the Lyngen Fiord, but thei-e it was found that the usual winter conditions were again prevalent on the Vo- When giving oneself the task of judging concerning these peculiar con- ditions, it is helpful to remember that nothing corresponding has been noticed in the western fiords (vestlandske fjordc) where we have for several years taken measurements also in the winter. To settle the hydrographical conditions, in any single fiord for instance, several factors may have to be reckoned with. That the tempera- ture of the atmosphere plays an important one, is clear, and by comparing the results obtained in the northern and southwestern fiords, as I have done, I have come to the conclusion that the fall of rain is a factor which must be considered. From Mohn's rainfall-charts ') it will be seen that the fall is most uneven in the different parts of the country. Although there has of course been some slight variations in the fall in one and the same place from one year to anothei-, yet on the whole it is seen that the distribution has been fairly uniform during the period that these measurements were made. It is another matter that there may pos.sibly be something periodical in the distribution of the fall. It may thus be stated that there is a greater fall in the we- stern fiord districts than in the fiords of TromsO and Finmark, and it is reasonable to suppose that this circumstance must have some influence both hydrographically and biologically speaking. I will now only allude to the hydrographical part of the subject. One must expect in the Finmark fiords, where there is less fall, to be able to trace a rise in salinity, especially as so much falls in the form of snow so that it does not at once make its influence felt. Besides this, in the northern fiords large quantities of fresh water is retained in the layers of ice in the inner parts of the fiords. Fi'om these circumstances one might attempt to ex- plain the greater average salinity of the surface layers of the nor- thern fiords in winter as compared to the fiords in the west country (vestlandske f^jorde). On account of the slight flow of fresh water into such a fiord as the Kvænang, in the course ol' a winter a great uniformity in salinity may be established, and ( ]"nlc obsei-vations) just for this very reason the cooling of the atiimspliere will exert a great in- fluence on the cooling of the layers, the vertical current taking with it the water with its low temperature (which it has reached by being cooled by the atmosphere) from the surface downwards. The observations made furnish sufficient proof that in the coui'se of the winter a gi'cat levelling in temperature and salinity goes on. and tluTc are instaiircs of complete iinilbniiity from the surface right down Iu the bottom, llowevei', it is pos.sible that these conditions may be disturbiMl hy warmer coast water being driven into the fiord by the wiml. .\nd in such a case the „re- verscd winter state" would be lound, the original fiord water having it settles under the inflowing coast water, diiilitly salter. After all, this is only a pa- lic ..Xonlliav" (the North Ocean) where the V lidin iiioro .southerly regions settles above water «liich ciiincs from the north. cooled so much that even if the latter is rallel case to that in t warm salt ocean \\at( tile cold and less salt c. Hydrographical CharaclerisLie of Ihe Fiords of Norlhern Norway. It is a woll known ffaturc in tiu' western (vestlandske I tiorils that the niaxinnnu depth is found in the inner pai-ts, but several (if the northern fiords are found to be ditt'ei'cnt in this respect. It is true that the greatest depth (about (ioO ni.) in the Vest Fiord is fui'lher in than Ti-ano (Ti'ano-dee])! and in the Varangrer Fiord the Lireatest depth I li't ni.i is just otV the Rot;- Fiord (in the middle part of tile tiordi, but it may be slated liiat the maximal depth is found in the outer half of many of the fiords. In file following table I have i^iven a special name to the place where the greatest depth is found. Fiord Max. depth Situation Malanos dnep 4.33 lu. Just opposite Stonnesbotn. m<'33' X., 1800' E. Lyngen Gamvik deep 320 m. Between outer Gannik and U16. 69054' N., 20027' E. Kvænang Kvænangs deep 343 m. Between Spildereu and the northern mainland. 7002'.3 N., 21041' E. Porsanger Porsanger deep Between Sværholt and Heines. 700,58'.5 N., 26025' E. Lakse Sværholt deep A little inside the mouth. 70056' N., 26053'.5 E. Tana Tana deep 318 in. Just off the Tv Fiord. 70050' N., 28136' E. Vai-anger Varanger deep 424 m. Just off the Bog Fiord. 69056'..', N.. .30010' E. 1 owe the majority of the above data to the general charts of Geographical Survey. I have relied on my own measurements, which are on the whole not a large number, with regard to the Lyngen and Kvænang fiords. A little beyond the mouth of the Salten Fiord inwards I have sounded .'^so ui.; liut this depth is less than may be found in the Sk,jei-stad Fiord which is still further in. I reached a depth of 518 m. a little out.side Skjerstad church. It is ([uite remarkable in the district between the Skjerstad and the Ofot Fiords how many depressions there are, as will be seen from the following table. Fiord Depth Situation Sk,jerstad Skjerstad deep 518 m. A little beyond Skjerstad church. Folden Hjertii deep 530 m. Betwfi'U Hjertii and the southern main- 67037' N., 1502' E. Fiord Max. depth Situation O.NSUIUI 0.xsund deep 630 m. Between Hannnerii and Lundii. 6801' N., 15«I8'.s E. Tvs Tvsfiord deep 725 m. A little inside Skårberg. 68012'.5 N., 16012'.5 E. Ofot Skarstad deep n.->0 m. Just opposite Skarstad. m02H.r, N. 16017'.', K. This series of greater depths lies between <>'" and fi8030' N. The powers which combine to form fiords must have been exer- cised in an unusually large degree in this district, and it is probably very difficult to find any parallel instance of such depths in such a limited area. It will 1)0 found on careful consideration of the observations taken that a great many of the fiord deci)S arc very uniform with regard to temperature and salinity. So as to make this clear at a glance the following tabulated observations have been inserted. Fiord Locality Date of observa- Soun- dings in Depth measured Temp. C» Salinitv Salten 67014'.6 N. 14026' E. = 4 1900 380 320 6.65 35... Folden 67037' 1.502' % 1900 530 .500 6.55 35.00 O.xsund «'^"1' i >7o 1899 15018'.5 630 630 6.3 35.08 Tys 68012'.5 L/3 1899 16012'.5 ' ' 725 700 6.3 35.11 Vest 68015'.5 „ ^ igyg 15049' 630 630 6.3 35.14 Ofut "'";-;' ^1^»^' 550 550 li.3 35.U Observations made at different times of the year have proved that a considerable constancy in temperature and salinity prevails in these fiord deeps. Another set of fiords shall now come into consideration. Fiord Locality Date of observa- tion Soun- dings Depth measured m. Temp. CO SaUnity Malang 69033' N. 1800' E. =7i 1899 433 350 5.5 34.52 Lyi'gen 69054' 20027' % 1899 320 300 3.(i5 34.84 K~....'™:r; s'/j 1899 343 340 2.3 34.40 0. Nortlgaanl. Fiord Locality Date of observa- tion Sonn- ding m. Depth measured m. Temp. CO 'salinity 0, Porsanger . . . 700o8'.5 26025' 28/4 1899 282 250 2.75 34.78 Tana') 70047' 280.30' -V^ 1878 232 232 2.3 Varanger-) . . 69056'5 30O10' Aug.1875 424 424 ■ 3.1 jV special characteristic of the ijlaccs above meutioucd is that tlie temperature was below 6° C. and the salinity less than 35 pro mille. There is also reason for supposing that these two factors are more subject to change here than in the fiords mentioned in the former table. For instance, in the Malang Fiord on ^Vi 1899 tlie temperature was 4.1 and the salinity 34.67. There are also many smaller fiords, which show similar conditions. Instances of this are tabulated in the following list. Fiord Locality Date of observa- tion Soun- dings m. Depth measured Temp. CO Salinitv Skjerstad.... S. XII */4 1900 515 500 3.15 34.09 Skjomen S. II =/„ 1899 150 150 1.7 33.42 Kanstad K. III ",'3 'S99 94 90 1.. 33.48 Ogs 0, II ■"/s 1899 207 200 1.4 33.33 Kirk K. I ^, 18!I!) KIS 100 .h;j.48 The fiords above mentioned are certainly connected with those wliich have a bottom temperature of 6° — 7°, and a salinity of about 35 0/00, but submarine ridges prevent the warm bottom water from flowing in. Tiie heat which the Gulf Stream brings with it does ") The N.: ■-) Profess. th Atlantic E.xpeditiim, II- I- MOHN. not exert any influence worth considering on the deeper layers of water in these fiords, and the condition of things in the depths is determined by the local meteorological factors in a special degree. A few examples, showing the loss of heat caused -«'here a fiord is shut off by a submarine ridge, will be of interest. On March 10th 1899 at a depth of 200 meters in the Ogs Fiord the tem- perature was 1.7 and the salinity 33.40 0/00. On the same day at the same depth in the Vest Fiord outside the temperature 6.7 and the salinity 34.87; there thus being a difi'erence of 5° C. in tem- perature. On April 4th HiOU at a depth of 200 meters in the Skjerstad Fiord, the temperature was 3".25 C. and the salinity 33.99 7oo, while in the Salten Fiord the figures were respectively 6°.55 and 35.06; there thus being a diiference of 3°.3 in temperature. It is not to be wondered at that these ditt'erences evidence themselves in the distribution of fauna. As a result of the observations and particulars detailed in the preceding pages it would seem reasonable and natural to divide the northern fiords into two groups') as follows: — 1. Fiords in which the bottom temperature is a" — 7° C. witli a salinity of about 35 7oo in the water at the bottom. (Examples: The Salten, the Folden, the Tys, the Ofot and the Vest Fiord). 2. Fiords in which the bottom temperature is less than G" C. and the salinity at the same depth is less than 35 °/ou. (Examples: The Malang, Lyngen, Kvænang, Porsanger, Tana, Varanger, Skjerstad, Skjomen, Kanstad, Ogs and Kirk Fiords.) The Malang Fiord is a kind of connecting link between the two groups. It must also be mentioned that the Skjer.stad Fiord, for instance, belongs to the second group on account of its being shut off by a submarine ridge which prevents the inflow of the ocean water; while the Lyngen and Porsanger Fiords for in- stance, on the other hand, must clas.sify under the second group on account of their being situated so far north that -the ocean water has been considerably cooled and their salinity has been reduced by mixing with fresh water. Later on we shall show that the distribution of fauna and its character in the two groups are so ditt'erent. tiiat the above classi- fication of the fiords is justifiable also for that leason. 1) Cf. Nordgaard: Some Hydrographical Results. (Bergeus museum bog 1899, p. 23). II. PLANKTON. NOTES. In my plankton tables the marks have the following signification: r r = very scarce, r = scarce, + = somewhat numerous, c = common, cc = very common. A. T\w groater Forms of animal Plankton. a. Plankton Stations 1899—1900. Depth in metre Corresponding samples in the hydr I tables 1899 Helligvær, 10 miles NW of H Vestfjord I, between Helligvær and Væro Vestfjord II, nearer Væra Moskenstrommen Heine. 8 miles SE of E Stamsund. 8 miles SbE of S Henningsvær, 7 miles S of H Yttersiden. 23 miles NW of Gaukværø 4(1 miles NW of Gaukværø Senjeu. 12 miles NWbW of Maanesodden Tronisosundet K\ ænangeu I, between Lege and Brynilen Kvænangen II, between Spildern and Kvænangstinderne Lyngen I. off Slubotn Lyngen II. off Kaafjord Lyngen III, off Spokenes Malangen, between Lysbotn and Støunesbotn Folstad, Ostnesfjord Helle, Ostnesfjord Hola, Svolvær Henningsvær, 8 miles SbW of H Vestfjord, 8 miles SSE of H Skroven. 4 miles S og S.- Raftsundet, off the Troldfjord Eaftsund II. li.twrin Aaistenen and Ulvaag Skroven. 5 ijnh - i;si; ,,| S Trauodybet. Iiuiwr^n 'irmo .■ind Lødingen Ofoten I. betwcLii Ilaxncs and Ramsund Ofoten II, between Bogen and Ballangen Eombaken I. at the head of R Eombakeu II, off ytre Sildvik Eombaken III, inside Øijord Skjomen I, at Elvegaard Ofotenf jord, off Skarstad Skroven, r, miles SWbS of S Strømmen I, at Henningsvær Strønmien II, at Henningsvær Mouth of the Raftsund Øxsund, between Hammerø and Lundø Sagf jorden I. inside Furrunesvæggen Sagf jorden II, outside Fun-unesvæggen Henningsvær 1. 4 miles SSW of H Henningsvær IH, 16 miles SSW of H Evenstad I, 7 miles SE of Lofotodden Evenstad II, 10 miles SE of Lofotodden Moskenstrommen Kirkfjord I, inside Vorfjorden Reine I. 1 1 miles SE of R Ure I. 9' „ miles SSE of U Henningsvær I, 6 miles SWbW'/oW of H Raftsundet Risværflaket, outside the Øgsfjord Kanstadf jord III, inside the ridge Øgsfjord I, at the head of the fjord Øgsfjord II, at Halvarso Tranedybet, between Trano and Lødingen Tranodybet Hennintrsvær II. 6 miles SbE'/oE of H Væro, 7 miles SbW of Maahomet Rosthavet, 60 miles NW of Rost Rost I. outside E Rost II. outside R 0— .50, 0—250 0—50, 0—100, 0—180 0—50, 0—100, 0—200 0— .50, 0—100 0—150 0—50, 0—100 0—50. 0—180 0—50, 0—110 0—50, 0—100, 0—700 0—5. 0—50, 0-130 0—5 0—5. 0—50. 0—140 0—5, 0—50, 0—180 0—5, 0—50, 0—115 0—50, 0—100, 0—250 0—50, 0—200 0—100, 0—300 0—50, 0—135 0—50, 0—150 0—50, 0—150 0—50, 0—100 0—50. 0—200 0—300 0—50 0—10(1. n 21111, 0—260 300—350, 0- Inn. (i I'lin. o -300, 0—380 0— 50. n 1 1 II I. (I L'iKi, 0—630 0—100, 100 - 20U. 200 300. 300—3.50 0—100, 100—200, 200—2.50 0—40 0—100 0—100, 100—200, 200—300 0—40 500—550 0—50. 0—100, 0—200, 0—250 0—30 0—275 0—100. 0—150. 150—250, 250—350, 350—4.50. 450—5.50, 550—620 0— .50, 0—100. 0—200 0—300 0—85 0—100. 0—200' 0—250 0— .50. 0—1.50 0—100. 0-200 0—100 0—50, 0-1.50 0—100. 0—200 0—100, 0—140 0—45 0— .50, 0—150 0—90 0—90 0-200 0— .50. 0—100. 100—200, 200—300, 300—400, 400—500, 500—600 0—100, 0—280 0—100, 0—170 0—100. 0—900 0—120 0—100 28—40 41—52 53—63 66—70 73—80 81—86 89—90 91—97 10.5—121 126—1.33 134 13.5—144 145—1.54 1.5.5—162 163—173 174- IHI 1 Hi!- 194 214—223 224-234 196— 2(J6 235—240 241—245 246—250 251—2.58 282—292 293—301 .302—306 .307-311 312-321 322-;i24 339-349 363— .368 377—385 405—411 412-419 420—423 426-435 436—443 444—450 479—481 455—460 488 522 -.525 .526-531 532—542 544 579-589 596-603 6()4_filS 623—628 631—633 Nr. Date Xame Depth in metres Corresponding samples in the hydr. tables 63 1899 =% ? Vi 13 v* -V4 2!^ -''/4 V5 V, 1900 20/ ^U ^'4 3/^ "/i ■4 0—150 0—100. 0—700 0—100, 0—400 0—50, 0—100, 100—200, 200—300, 300—400, 400—500, 500-600, 600—700 0-3 0-3 0-3 0—3, 0—150 0-3, 0—150 0—3, 0-250 0—100, 0—380 0—3 0—80 0-3, 0— 50, .50-100, 100-200, 200-300, 300-380 0—50, 0—160 0-90 0—3, 0—50, 0—100 0—90 0-100, 100—200, 200—300 0—8 0—6 0-100, 0-300 0-3 0-10 0—75, 100-200 0—200 0—100 0-2.00 0-300 0-1.50 0—50, 0—140 0—50, 0—100, 0—400 0—50, 0-100, 0—200 0—60 0— .50, 0—100, 0—200 0-110 0-600 0-25 0-130 0-130 0—100 0-130 0-150 0-25 0-100, 0-180 0-330 0-420 0—490 0—50, 0—100, 0—500 0—25 0-20 0-50, 0-330 0-.530 0—100. 100-200, 200—300, ,300—400. 40(1— .50(1 0— .50, 0-315 64 651—663 65 66 Tysfjord 1 . . . 67 Lille Molla . 68 Følstad, Østnesfjorden 688-689 692-693 682—683 697 70'' 69 Helle, Østnesfjorden.... 70 Brettesnes II . 71 Skroven ... 73 Hola, at Svolvær Stene in Bo, Yestnraalen 703—709 74 Gaukværo II, Vesterarden 748 756 75 Malangen, off Stounesbotn 76 Stønnesbotn . . . ' Senjenhavet 77s) 78 Malangen 773 78'-' 79 Kvænanoen I, betw. Spilderen and Kvænanostinderne 783 789 80 Kvænangen II. off Noklen island .... 790 793 81 Jøkelfjord, at the head of the fjord 82 Jøkelfjord m, off the Tverfjord 7qc) gfjO 83 84 Kvænangen, between Spilderen and the northern mainland Hammerfest harbour 803—810 85 Troldfjord, in Eolfsø 86 Ingohavet 811 8'53 87 8.30—8.32 Repvaag harbour. Porsangerfjord 89 Porsangerfjord 833 840 90 Vardø 91 L-\Tigen I, off Skibotn . . 861 866 92 Lyngen II, off the Kaaf jord 867 874 93 Lyngen III, between Gamvik and Ulø 875 884 94 Hola, Svolvær 885 893 95 97 Henningsvær, 2^/4 miles off H 914 921 98 Stronnnen at Henningsvær 929 931 Bålstad I 101 102 Østnesfjord I, at the head 981 982 103 Østnesfjord II, between Vaterfjord aud Polstad 104 Østnesfjord III, off Helle . . . 989 994 UV) 106 107 Ørsnes Bålstad . . Reine 995-998 1004-1008 Vestfjord 110 111 Skjerstadfjord V Skjerstadf jord VU 113 Skjerstadfjord XII 114 115 Seivaagen, Salteufjord 116 Saltenf jord II 117 UK Foldenfjord 1 ii;i Vestfjord, iM^tw.-.-n Fl;id.. aii.l SkroMMi 1(17H— 1089 b Plankton tables. Depth in inetves Vestfjord I )— 50;0— 100 0— 180 0—50 0—100 0-200 Moskeii- strømmeii Stamsuiitl , Hciiiii 0—50 0—100 0—150 0— 50|0— 180 0—50 0—110 Fish eggs Pasiphæa tarda Xyctiphanes nonrgiea Boieophaiisia inei mis Thysnnoissa veglecta — longkawlata Boreomysis nniica Hemimysis ahyssicola Eggs and Lnrvæ of Schizopoilii . . Parathemisto ohlima Eiithcmisto compressa XaupUi and Cypris of Cinipedia Coiichoecia sp Calamts fiiimarJncus — hypa-horeus Fseudocal. elongahts Ckiriduis ariimtns — feiiuisphms Eudueta novveyica ScholccithriceUa mhwr Temora longicornis Mdridin hums — ''"'»" Phnromamnia rohuxta Heternrhnbdus norvegicus Candacia armata Acartia sp Oithona siiiulia — plumifca Microsetella atlantka Onaea conifcra Young and Larvæ of Copcpoda . Lhnadna haha Larvæ of (rastrnpoda — - Fdccfipoda Oikoplcura sp FnfiUaria sp CypJtOHanks Larvæ of Eddnodcrmata — - Polydur-fa Cliafognata Bolina sp Arddinactis albidn Cnpxdita sarni ]'h;isnphora borealis 0. Nordgaard. Date Station Depth in meters Fish eggs Pasiphæa tarda Nyctiphanes norvegica Borenphausia incrmis Thijsannesm ncglecta — loufficnudafa Boycomi/sis arctica Scmiim/sis ahysskola Eggs and Larvæ of Sckizopoda . Parathemisto oblivia Eidhemisto comjjresm Xmiplii and Cypris of Cirripedi Conchoecia sp Calartns finmarehicus — hyperboreus Pseiidocal elongatus Chiridius armatus — ■ teniiispiniis EiicJicefa noi-vegica Scokcifhricella minor Teiiiora lo7Ujicorms Metridia Inceiis — longa Plmromamma rolmsta Heterorliahdiis nnrvegicns Candacia armaia Acartia sp Oithona similis — - 2)lu)nifera Microsetella atlantica Ovcrea conifera Young and Larvæ of Copepoda . Limadna balca Larva? of Gastropoda — - Pfkcyjjoda Oikoplcura sp Fritillaria sp Oyphonaidcs Larvæ of EchiiKdermata — - Polycha'fa Cluslognata Boliwi sp AraclmacHs alhida Ciipulita sarsii Physojihora horcalis Troms osund Kvænangen II 0—50 0—100 0—700 0—5 0—50 0—130 0—5 0—50 0—100 0—140^ 0—5 0—50 0— 0—5 0—50 0—115 27 Lyngen II 0—50 0—100 0—250 + 1 + Lyngen HI 0-50 0-200 Malanijen 0—50 0—135 0—50 lO— 150 Henningsvær Vestfjord Skro- ven 0. Xordgaard. Depth in meters 0—100 0—200 0—300 0—380 0—50 0—100 0—200 0—630 100— 200— 300— 200 300 350 ,100— 200 200 250 ^l.i|.ll.r„ fi.rda uirlijjiancs nm-regica liinnphiiusia inerniis lu/sanoessa nrgleda — longicaudata hreoniysis arctica Temimysis abyssicola !ggs and Larvæ of ScMzopoda . ^arathemisio oblivia ^jvfhemistn cnmpressa .''ini Hi nnd Cypris of Cirripedia 'nil, liiu'iia sp 'alaiius finmarcliiais — hyperborens ''seudocal. elongaius Vdridius annatns — tenuisjnmiK Mehceta norvegka 'colecithrieella minor ^emora longir.ornis Tetridia liicens — longa 'leuromamma robusfa Teterorhabdus norvegkus 'andacia armatn cartm sp lithona similis — plumifcra licrosetella atlantica hicæa conifera oungs and Larvæ of Copepoda åmacina. balea arvæ of Gastropoda — - I'rJccypoda HIinplnra sp y'ii"'"-'<" -l' ',ll,hn,.:ntlrs arv;t- of Kchitiodermata — - I'oJgchrcta 'hætognat t 'olina sp raclinactis nlbida 'upulifa sarsii liysoplwra borealis + I + rr rr Rombnkeu in Skjom.] Otb- I t.Mlf.j. I I 0—50 0—100 II 0—30 II :,() (|_lfH)IO— 2(K + + I rr rr rr + + + c + + + + + ^ ^ rr 4- ,. P c c + c c rr 0. NordoaanL Depth in meters Fish eggs Pasiphæa tarda Nyctiphanes norvegica Bore.ophausia inermis Tlii/sanoessa negleda — longkaudata Boreomysis arctica Hemimysis ahjssicola Eggs and Larvæ of Scldzopoda . . Ptirathemisto ohliiia Ejithemisto enmpressa NaiqMi and Cypris of drripedia Conrkoeda sp Calamis finmarchieus — hyperboreus Pseiidocal. elongatus Chiridms armatus — temtispinus Euchæta norvegica Scolecithricella minor Temora longicornis Mctridia hicens — longa Plewomamma rolmsta Hehrorhabdus twrvegims Candacia ormata Oithona similis — plumifcra Microsetella aflaiitica Oncæa conifcra Young and Larvæ of Copepoda Liiiiaiina balea Larvæ of Gastropoda - Pdecypoda (likopleitrn sp FritiUaria sp Cyphonautes Larvii: of Echimidermata — - Polyrhadn ( lin'tdgnatn BoUtia sp Arachnactis nlhida Cupidita sarsii Pliysophora borealis Sagfj. II Hen- nings- I Henningsvær HI vær I 0—100 0—200 0—250 0—10010-200 Mo- sken- strøm Kirk f j I 0—50 0—160 Henningsvær 0—100 0—140 Raft- sund Trauødybet 0—50 0—150 0—90 0-50 0—100 100— 200— 300— 400— 500- 400 500 0—100 0—280 0—100 0—170 0—100 0—900 0—120 0. Noi-dgaai-d. Tysfjord Tysfjord II Tysfjord I Lille MoUa Føl- stad Bret- HeUe tesnes Depth in meters 0—100 0—700 0—100 0—400 0—60 0—100 100— 200— 300— 400— 200 300 400 500 Fish eg-gs PfimpliKa tarda Xi/cfiphanes novegica Boreopliausia inennis Tlii/sanoessa negleda — longicauåata Bnreomysis arclica Hrmimysis abyssicola Eggs and Larvæ of Schizopoda . . Parathemisto nblivia Euthemisto compressa Xanplii and Cypris of Cirripcdia Coiichoecia sp Cahmus finmarchims — hypiTbornis Pseudocal. elongatus Chiridius armatiis — tcnuispinus Euchæta norvcyka Scolecithricella minor Tcjiiora longicornis Miiridia lucens — longa Pkwomamma rohuKta Hdernihahdm norvegicus Candacui armata Acartia sp (lithnna similis — jilumifera Microsetella attantica Oncii-a conifcra Yniing and Larvæ of Copeixida . Limacina. bnlea hm-væ of Gastropoda — - Pdecypoda Oiliopkura sp FriliUari,, s], < 'ypIio>iautcs Larvæ of Echinodermnta — - Polychæta Cliætognata Bolina sp Arachnactis albida Cujmlita sarsii Pliysophoia borealis 0—3 0—250 0—11)010—380 Malnnjren 60— 100— 200— 100 200 300 KvaMiangen I 0_oO 0—160 Kvsen. II 0—3 0-50 0—100 O. Nordgaard. Jøkel- fjord III Ham- mer- fest Trold. f j ord Porsangerfj Lj'u- gen I Deptli in meters 0-100 100- ^00; 0—1000—300 Fisli eggs Pasiphcea tarda yi/ctiphanes norcegica Borcophausia inermis Thysanoessa neglecta — hngicaudafa Bo) fomysis arctica Ilemimysis abysncola Eggs and Larv;e of Schizopoila . . Farathemisto ohliria Euthemisto compi-essa Xauplii and Cypris of Cirripcdia Conchoecia sjj (-'alaniis finmarcldciis — hyperhoreus Psettdocal. elongatus Cliiridius armatus — tenuinpinuH Kucluvta norregira ScrAecitliricclla minor Ti'inora loiigicoriiis MeMdia lucmx — hnga Pleuromanima roJmsta Hctcrorhfihdus iwrrcyicus (atidacid ar innta Acartia sp Oitlioiia similis — plumifern Minosetdla atlaittlca Oncæa cnni/cra ^'oinig and Larvaj of Copepoda . Limacina balca I-iirv:i' of Gastropoda - Pelecypodn Oilwplnira sp FritUlaria sji Cgphdiiautes Larv:i' of Ediinodmiiafa — - Polgchæta Cliætngnata Bnlbia sp Araclinactis albida Cupidita sarsii Physophora borealis I»'/., 1900 "Vs -:, =«/.■, ■"'/■, ^■'•1 ■"'/;, ■-■ 1 Hala Skroven HeiinbigsviLi- Sivom- men Bålstad I Roiue JliUl». (lybet Østnesfjord I 11 III Ørs- Bul- lies 1 stad Reine Vesttj. Sk.JL-rstail a 0-n>i 0-140 0—50 0—100 0—400 0—50 0—100 [)— 200 0-BO O-oO 3—100 0—200 0—110 1 0— HOO 0—25 0-130 0—130 )— 100 0-13O 0-150 0—25 1 0— lOOiO— 180 r + + n- + + + IT r + v + + + + + 1- + IT + + + • -!- + + + + ' + + + r rr + + + -1- ,. ,. ,. -U r 1- + ir + + ,. c + <• + c + c + + + r v •■ + '■ ^- -f ^- -• <■ -r c + + >■ + r c + + + + + + c r + r .■ ■• 1 >• + + + >■ IT Skjer- stadfj IV Sel- vaag tenfj. Foldenfj. Depth in meters 0—50 0-100 0—500 0—25 0—50 0—330 100— 200— 300— 400— 200 300 400 500 0—50 0—315 Fish egfrs Fasiphæa tarda Ni/ctijihayies norvegica Boreophausia inermis Tlii/aannessa neglecta — longicaudata Boreomysis avdica Hemimysis abyssicola Eggs and Larvæ of Schizopoda Parathemisto oblivia Euthemisio compressa Å^miplii and Cypris of Cirripedi Conclwcda sp (Manus fivmarchiciis — hyperhoreus Pseudocal. elongatus Chiridivs armatus — tenuispinws Euchæfa nnrvegica Scolecithricella minor Tcmora longicornis Metridia lucens — longa Flem-nmamma rohusta Hrternrhahdtis norvegicus Cnndacia armata Acarfia sp Oithona similis — plumifera Microsetclla atlantica Onccea conifera Young and Larvæ of Cope])oda Limacina halea Ij;irv;e of Gastropoda — - Fclecypoda Oiknpleura sp Frililkiria sp ( 'gplionautes L:irv;i' of Ecliinodermatn — - Fniychæta Cha-toynatn Bolina sp Arachnact.is alhida Cnjndita xarsH r/u/soplinra horralis Remarks on some Plankton Forms. Pisces. Egg's and Larvae. hi Marrli ami A|iiil is'.iCi. lisli spawn was reg-ularly , found ill the plankton on tin- 1-ot'oton liaiiks. That the «rreater part of this hclon-vd to cod was. t considor. niKincstionablo. In 1897, fish spawn was also noticed from '' ■• to 'i 'l. In 1899, a con.siderable (piantity of tisli eggs was to be seen in the sea at Vest Lofoten, on Mai'ch 20tli and on April 1st a mass of fish eggs was seen on the East I^ofoten banks. Also in 1900. fish spawn was noticed in the latter half of the month of March. Tartienlarly in 1897 several samples containing- spawn were examined. Various sizes were found, right up to a diameter of •2..-> mm.; hut the diameter of the majority was about 1.3 mm., which means that most of it was cod spawn. We also got a few cod larva' in the tow net. as for instance on 'A 1B97 on the fishing- ground at Keine. The characteristic pigment bands left no room for doubt that we really had caught larvæ of cod — their length was about .3.5 mm. It was quite remarkable how seldom one came upon a sterile egg. One cannot, however, because of this fact con- clude that fertilization was carried out in a particularly effective way, indeed one can hardly exercise any control over this in the open sea. For cod spaAvn is doubtless subject to the same law as for instance, salmon spawn, which dies pretty quickly if it has not been fertilized. (Some cod eggs were put into a glass of sea -w^ater, and it was seen that the eggs fell to the bottom as soon as they died. In the open sea also, the dead eggs without doubt sink to the bottom, so that it is not possible to gain a correct idea of the effectiveness of fertilization by counting the eggs capable of devel- opment which are found in the water. Respecting the spawning of the skrei {Gaihis mllarias L.) reference should be made to Hjokt's book „Fiskeri og Hvalfangst" (Fishery and AMiale Catchini;). page 37 ei scq. Deeapoda. Pasiphæa tarda, Keoyer. By tow-nettiiiL:-. I have only obtained young individuals of this species, (^uite rarely, single specimens have been found. Thus 'A 1899. Ofoten I, 300—3.50 mm., 1 specimen, length 27 mm.=) ■■'/\i 1899. Tys Fiord I, 200—300 m., 1 specimen, length 26mm. 74 1900. Skjerstad Fiord V, 0—420 m., 1 specimen, length 33 mm. =-'^,',1 1902. The By Fiord, Bergen, 2.50—1.50 m., 1 specimen, length 12 mm. I made the following notes about the specimen from Ofoten: — Body, quite transparent, brown eyes and a reddish tail appendix. In „Bidi-ag til Kundskab om Christiania Fjordens Fauna" (Con- tribution to a Knowledge of the Fauna in The Kristiania Fiord) M. iSars describes the young of this species (p. 56 — 63, fig. 81 — 90). These were taken near Skroven in Lofoten by G. O. S.^rs and the smallest was 10 mm. in length. 1) Cf. NoBDGAARD, „Contril)uti<)ii to tlie Study of Hydrography and Biology on the Coast of Norway". Tables 2, 4 a. 4 b. ^ Measured from the point of the rostrum to tlie tip of the tail. As far as 1 can see, (1. O. Saks was the fir.st to observe the pelagic habits of this species. In ,,Crustacea II" from the Norw. North Atlantic Expedition (1876—78) he .says (page 11): „Mean- while, though the specimens in (luestion all came up in the trawl from very considerable depths, reaching 17()0 fathoms, yet the animal may, considering its obviously pelagic habits, have entered the trawl in some of the higher strata, during the upward passage of the apparatus.'" Tlic cxiicdition above mentioned also took its .speci- mens of I'asqilian with a trawl at the stations 33, 213 and 295. Of these stations 33 is in the southern part of the North Ocean, 213 about halfway between Jan Mayen and Norway and 295 (Lat. 71" 59' N., Long 11° 40' E.) is somewhat further north and east. It is easier now with the improved apparatus for pelagic fishing to catch the animal. It appeared in considerable numbers in the North Ocean'). With regard to the distribution of this species in the fiords of Norway, it may be mentioned that it has been found from The Kiistiania Fiord up to Lofoten, but its distribution is now^ known to be extended over a larger area. In April 1899, I took specimens with a trawd in The Malang Fiord from a depth of 380 m. There is no doubt that it is rather common in certain other fiords. For in- stance, I have often seen it in the stomach of Macrurus rupestris, Spinax niger and Gadus rirens fi-om The Herlø Fiord near Bergen. The young individuals of this species mentioned as being taken in The Ofot, Tys and Skjer-stad Fiords were all caught in the months February — April. Althoug-h it is not stated, it is likely that G. O. Sars took the yomiL' staL'-es on which M. Sars has based his de- scription, also siiiihtiiii,' ihiiiiij the early spring months, for G. 0. Sars was, in the \ rars nitiitiouiMl. making winter researches in Lofoten. One would be inclined to think that about the middle of the winter is the time of propagation for this species. It is, however, reasonable to suppose that the propagation stretches over a period of several months. In the stomach of Spinax niger from The Herlo Fiord, I found 'Vt 1897 a female with large eggs attached. Another Pasiphæa female with eggs was found in the stomach of a Gadm virens from The Herlø Fiord 'Ve 1902. Kroter based his original description on specimens from Green- land, and the species is also said to be found on the east coast of North America. Sehizopoda. Nyctiphanes rwrvegica, M. Sars. As is the case with Pasiphæa tarda, this is a plankton form, which it is difficult to catch in small tow-nets. A large number of my specimens have been taken in a trawl. Here is a list of the various places in Avhich they have been found. 1% 1897. Sunderø (Vesteraalen), several specimens in the stomach of Gadus rirens. "A 1899. Helle (Ostnes Fiord), 0—120 m. 1 jun. (tow-net). 'Vo — Raftsund 0-275 m. rr — "A — Følstad, (Ostnes Fd.), -135 m. rr — >) Cf. H.70KT, ,,Fiskeri valfangst" (Fishery and Whale Catching), p. 38 ""li 1899. In Sea N. W. of Røst, 0—500 m. i' (trawl). "/4 — Gaukværø II, 0— -250 m. rr — 21/4 — Kvænangen 0—3^0 m. rr — 2^4 — In Sea off Ingo, 0—300 m. rr — j I have specimens from tlie following places on the west coast | of Norway: — j ^74 1897. The Fiord outside liergen in the stomach of Gadus tirens. [ -7i 1899. Hei-l0 Fd., 0—400 m. jun. rr (tow-net), j 271 — On the coast off Herlo. 0—150 m. — ""' 1 -1/9 — TheNorw. Channel off the I j Kors Fiord. ) '75 — The Herlo Fioi-d, in the stomach of Gadus i-tims. \ 179 — The Hjelte Fiord about 100 m. rr (tow-net I. '7n — Henno in the ,,skjærgaard" beyond Bergen in the sto- mach of Gadus virens. On Nansen's .,Fram" expedition, a single specimen was taken on May •22nd 1894. M On the Norw. North Atl. Exp. (187(3—78) this species was noticed at most of the stations. G. 0. Saes writes'-): „The present beautiful species was obser- ved on the expedition in several localities, at a considerable distance from the coast, swimming about on the surface of the water, as a rule, however exclusively young indinduals. At one of the stations (St. 75) west of the Namsen Fiord, the animal occurred in such profusion that the sea in some localities had a peculiar brownish tint." Professor Saes also mentions the species from the Kristi- ania, the Hardanger and the Vest Fiords. AuEiviLLius^) has observed it in the surface layers of the Skagerack in August, and in the (Julmar Fiord towards the end of November. In the months of August and September, the spe- cimens he obtained were generally found rather deep down. The species is distributed from the Arctic Ocean to the coast of Portugal, and from Greenland to Massachusetts Bay. C. KoELBEL'*) states the length of the largest specimen caught at Jan Mayen to be 36 mm. My largest specimen, taken in the sea off Ingø in Finmai'k, has precisely the same length; the largest specimen from the Herlo Fiord, near Bergen, was 32 mm. Burcojiliaitsia Inermis, Krøyek. This species constitutes, as is well known, the pi'incipal food of the coal-fish and plankton eating whales. I \\i\\ therefore give a complete account of the observations I have been able to make respecting the distribution of this animal. '7^ 1897. Svolvær (Lofoten), in the stomach of Gadus caUarius + 'Vi — 0gs Fiord, 0—150 m. (tow-net) r — — Between Barø and Lødingen, — 200 m. (tow-net) r 7» — Svolvær in the stomach of Gadus callarias c Va — Ostnes Fd. at various places, — 120 m. (tow-net) + — — Raftsund, Ti-old Fd., Grund Fd. — r -"A — Reine, in the stomach of Gadus callarias -\- '7i 1899. Reine, (Lofoten), 0—150 m. (tow-not) rr 'Vi — 8 miles S. E. of Reine — rr -7i — Lyngen HI, 0— 200 m. — rr •■'7i 1899. Helle ( Ostnes Fd.), 0— 50 m. (tow-net). . V2 — Vest Fiord, 0— 50 m. 72 — Raftsund, 0—200 m. — V4 — Stene, (Lofoten) 100—200 m. — 174 — Malang Fiord, m. — "/4 — Stønnesbotn 0— 3 m. — -74 — Sea off Ingø, 0—300 m. (trawl) 73 1900. Henningsvær I, 0—140 m. (tow-netl jun. ^73 — Beier Fiord, 0—150 m. (trawl) The contents of the stomachs of coal-fish which were caught in the Porsanger Fiord') in the summer of 1898, were for the most part composed of this species. The presence of Boreophausia incnnis along the coast of Ber- gen is also satisfactorily ascertained, a large quantity having been found in the stomachs of young coal-fishes caught off Henno on '7ii 1902. But it is not certain if the species is to be met with animally on this coast. AuEiviLLius mentions the species in the Skagerack, and Nok- MAN-) gives Banff, Shetland, Moray Firth and Clyde district as places whei'e it is found. The species is observed from Spitzbergen to the Skagerack and England, as well as from Greenland along the east coast of North America to about 42° N. The largest specimens I have found (in the Malang Fiord) were 25 mm. long. Boreophausia raschi, M. Saes. This species is distinguished from the foregoing by a toothlike projection on the sides of the carapace. The dorsal tooth, however, in front of telson is missing in raschi. I have only found this species once, and that was at Hellc in the Ostnes Fiord, (Vs 1897, 0—120 m.). 1 It is known from the Kristiania Fiord (SI. and G. O. Saes). j The latter also mentions having ocasionally found the species on the west coast of Norway. It is also known from Greenland and Great Britain, a list of places where it has been found has been given by Noeman') and T. Scott.*) Thysanoessa negh'cta, Keøyek. There was no example of this species among the specimens taken in 1899—1900, but on '"1^ 1897 I found it in the Ostnes Fd., plankton 0—60 m. It was also found in the stomach of ocean- cod {sTirei) which was fished at Svolvær '73 1897. G. O. Saes mentions having taken the species in the N'aran- gci' Fioi'd. I luiv(! the following notes tVoni the west coast of Norway. •'7i 1900. The Hjelte Fiord, 0-220 m. tow-net rr '7io 1902. Manger, in the stomach of Clupea harengus r '7ii 1902. Hennø, in the stomach of Gadus virens jun. r The species is known from Greenland, (H. 1. Hansen) the Siberian coast (J5eandt), N. E. America. (S. I. Sjiith), besides Norman and T\ T. ScOtt have mentioned several places on the British coast where it has been found. 1) G. 0. Sabs, Crustacea, p. 13. Thr Norw. North Polar Expod. 189.-i— 1896. 2) Crustacea II. The Norw. North Atl. Exp. 187ti— 78, p. 12. ^) Die Plankton Fauna des Hkayeraks, p. 74. K-l. Svenska Vet. Akad. Handl. 30, N. 3. ••) Die Oesterri'ichische Pularstation ,Jan Mayen. Reobactnni)s-Kroebnisse, III B. p. 48. ') Sparre-Schneider have taken specimens at Kvænangen. '') Briti.sh Schizopoda of Families Laphogastrida' and Ephansiida'. Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., S. (1 Vol. IX, p. 4til. •') British Schizopoda, p. 462. ■•) On the Distribution of Pehi-ic Invertebrate Fauna of the Kirth of Forth and ils \icinit.v. I'nrI III. Sixtwntli Annual liujiort of tlie Fishery Board for ikton. 39 llii/fanocssa lomjicaudata, Kkhyei!. Witli tow-iiets, tliis species has only been eaui^lit at tlio follo- viim- places: — '•V) 18!)9. The Vest Fiord 1. (> loii ni. rr 7s — I'rc I, 0- 100 ni., (I •_' n. rr My specimens were it) li' mm. Uiiil;. On Naxskn's Frnm-expedition siiiijle spciimciis were taken at four difterent places in tiie Airtic Ocean; ami Sai.'s mentions the Varanger Fiord and tlie i7" N. ^(jrcoiiiyaid arctica. Ivuovkh. As far as 1 know, this is the tirst time this species has been inckideil in any account of plankton organisms. There can. however, hardly be any room for doubt that it has planktonic habits, as it has several times been taken by townetting'. As, for instance on '^4 1S99 in the Malani;- Fd.. 300 -3S0 m. rr From the western tiords of Norway 1 have noted the follo- wini;': — -77 1898. The Herlo Fiord, in the stomach of J\Jacruni!< rupestris -\- 'Vio — The Herlo Fd.. 0—400 m. tow-net rr 'V, 1901. The Herlo Fd., 0—400 m. — rr •-Vii 1902. Fiord off Bergen, 250—450 m. — rr This species, which was tirst described by Kkoyee as being found in Greenland, has by G. O. Saks been taken in the Kristi- ania. Hardanger and Vest Fiords. It has not yet been observed on the British Coasts. Hi'mimi/sis alnjssicola, G. O. SArs. This species also seems to be a bathy-planktonic organism, it was at any rate found in the tow-net on ^2 1^99 in the deep off Trano, — 630 m. ; both as adtilta and jnniores. In the western tiords it has never been seen in plankton but has been found in considerable quantity in the stomach of Macnirus iKjiestris from the Herlo Fiord, 'Vt 1898. Boreomysw arctica was also found in the same place. G. 0. Sars has taken this oi'ganism in the Kristiania and Hardanger Fiords and at Lofoten. It has not yet been included in the British fauna.") Nukman has caught it in the Trondhjem Fiord. Ei;t;s and Larv:e of Schiiopoila. As the Schuopoila i)Iay such a vei-y important part in the economy of the northern seas, I will mention some observations made in the northern tiords. '74, '74 1899. The Malang Fd., 0— 3 ra. + '-'74 — Ingo 0—300 m. r "/4 — The Porsanger Fd., 0— 75 m. r Vs — Vardø, 0—200 m. c 1) British Scliizopoda, p. 463. -I Th.' 8.-as..nal Distribution of Atlantic Plankton Or^'auisnis, p. 31, 32. ^J C£. NoRMA.\, On British Mysidæ, p. 146. Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. S. 6, vol. X. 1900. The Østnes Fd.. 130 m. + - 4 Tlie Skjei-stad Fd.. o 330 m. -|- The Feiden Fd.. 100 m. r The majority ef lliese |ii'(iliaiily beloni^cd tn the species Borro- liliaiisi(( 'uicrmif^. Cumacea. I'.-cudiiciiiiia l(iii(iic iiiiis. SI'. j'.A-n;. Uii '■"■'/: I'S97 1 not a specimen of this sjiecies in the liarbour at Hrettesnes in Lofoten, the animal was swimmiiiL;- ahunt on the surface. T. Scott'- has on the other hand, several times caught it by tow-netting in the T'lrth of Foith. SeAiuiE-ScHNEiDEU has observed this species at Ililleso in the Malaui; Fiord, which is the northein limit for it. With I'egard to its disti'ibutioii cf. Di'. ('.\ni, Zi.m.mku.-j Amphipoda. ['ardUti-misto ohllcia. Kriivek. This species is also, -w-ithout doubt, one of the important orga- nisms in the economy of the sea. 1 have specimens from a great many stations both in the northern tiords and on the west coast of NorAvay. Is is distributed from Greenland {Kr()Yek, Hansen) to 45" N. 50" W. (Cleve)') and from Arctic Ocean, where it was taken by Nansen at 12 different stations, to The British Isles. AuEiviLLius has found this species in the Skagerack, but it has not up to the present time been noticed in the fiords of Sweden and southern Norway. The most southerly place at which I have taken this species was off Stavanger (58° 59' N. 5" 21' W.l. where I found juiiiores in plankton on 7-' 1896. In the plankton which I had under examination from ..Heim- dals'' section between the Sogne Fiord and Iceland about the middle of May 1896, I constantly came across jnniores from the surface layers, both from the region of the Gulf Stream and in the arctic water. Likewise juniurea and sometimes adidta were observed in the Pudde Fiord (Bergen) from the middle of November 1890 to February 1897, 0—8 m. In the plankton material which the seal catcher Capt. H. Andresen collected for the biological station, a consider- able number of P. obliria were found, among them also a large number of jimiorcfi from the sea north of .Ian Mayen (.lune and July 1S97.7 I'aratliouisto is characterized by 11. H. Gkax'^) as an arctic- oceanic organism, and the same author mentions for instance: — „Iin Mai 1901 hatte z. B. P. oMiria von ihrem Verbreitungs- centrum im Eismeere bis zu Lofoten eine zusammenhiingende Ver- breitung an der Oberfiadie." In another i)lace (p. 95) numerous specimens of young Parathemisto are mentioneil in May as one of the tirst appearances of the tlouiishing spring plankton. Tn the North Ocean the months of May and June appear to be the most impoi-tant time for the devcloinnent of this species; although I have, on the other hand, obsei-ved young indi\'iduals in 1) The Distribution of Pelagic Invertebrate Fauna of Firth of Forth, p. 167. 2) Die arktischen Cumaceen (Fauna arctica), B. I, p. 428. 3) The Distribution of Atlantic Plankton Organisms, p. 33. *) Cf. KOHDGAARD, Contributions to the Hj'drography of the North Ocean. Berg. Mus. Aarb. 1901, No. 2, p. 29. 5) Das Plankton des norwegischen Nordmeeres. Report on Norwegian Fishery and Marine Investigations. Vol. IT, No. .5, 1902. p. 83. 40 (). Nordgaard . the months from November to May in the neighbourhood of Ijergen. In the Arctic sea, Parathemisto is of great impoi'tance as food foi' phinkton eaters. I have seen it in the stomach of Gadus vircns both from Bergen and from Vesteraalen; and in March 1897 I noticed it also in the stomach of Gadus callarias, caught near Svolvær in Lofoten. Euthenmtu compressa, Goes. G. O. Sabs') gives the following distribution for this species: — Davis Strait, East coast of Greenland, Jan Mayen, Hasvig (in West Finmark). Norman'-) states that near Redcar from 10th to 12th of February 1892 there was a vei'y rich Crustacean plankton, which was eagerly sought after by Bissa ttidaetijla. This plankton con- sisted chiefly of Euthemisto compressa which at tliat time was new to the British fauna, and there was also Nematoscelis megalops and Thysanoessa longicaudata. From the Firth of FortJi T. Scott^) refers to this animal as occuring in February and November 1892 and in November 1893. My observations are the following: — 7-2 1897. Sunderø (Vesteraalen), from stomach of Gadus rivens. ^Vi 1899. Kvænangen I, 0—140 m. tow-net. 1 9. 22/3 — The Rost sea, 0—700 m. — Euthemisto bispiiiosa, Boeck. V2 1897. Sunderø (Vesteraalen) from stomach of Gadus virens. G. O. Saks states the distribution of this species as follows: — Greenland, Spitzbergen (?) off Novia Scotia, Sørvær and Hasvig (in West Finmark). AmathiUa homati, Fabk. AiJuIta, but still more juniores were noticed on '% 1897 in the surface water at Sunderø in Vesteraalen. Also in the sea beyond the belt of skerries (Skjærgaard) off Bergen on -% 1900, — 5 m., young of this species were observed. Development would thus appear to take place in the winter and spilng. Cirrlpedia. Lepas dnatifera, Linn. A splendid bunch on a glass ball (from a tishing not) drifted aslioro in March 1899 on the outer side of Moskeneso in Lofoten. Nauplii and Cypris of Cirripedia. At certain times larvæ of Cirripedia may be found in large numbers in plankton. Amongst those I have myself noticed I will mention for instance those seen in April 1896 at Bålstad in Lofo- ten, and in April 1897 at Røst. At the latter place, I also on March 24th 1899 noticed a number of these larvæ (Røst I, 0—120 m.), and about the middle of April in the same year they were numerous just beyond Vesteraalen, in the Malang Fiord, at Kvæn- angen, the Trold Fioi-d, at Vardø and at Høla near Svolv;pr. Ostraeoda. While arranging the specimens which have been collected, I have not in every case classilied them according to species, but have grouped them as Conchoecia sp. Single specimens have been classified, some by Prof. G. O. Sars, and I have identified some others by reference to Professor G. W. Muller's article in ,,Nordisches Plankton". The following species have been found. Conchoecia elegaiis, G. O. Sars. This species is, comparatively speaking, common in the Vest and adjoining fiords, as for instance the Ofot Fiord and Ox Suiid, and is found rather deep down. In the Ofot Fiord on February 9th 1899, I took up a quantity of a species of Conchoecia in a closing net, a blueish light gleamed from the forepart of its body. Unfortunately, I was not, then and there, in a position to decide whether the flash of bluelight came from horealis m eleijnns or perhaps fr'om both. Conchoecia horealis, G. 0. Sars. j This species too has been observed in the Vest and adjoining Fiords, e. g. *J2 1899. Skroven I, 0— :300 m. 73 — Tranø dybet — i'\\eL:i'iis Nordwcst Kfisti' A pi il Mai; die Thicre kon- iK'11 walii'sclit'iiilich liici' iliic i^aii/.c K\\\\\ ckhniu- in einoni .laiirc vollciuU'11." (i KAN calls tliis ;i workiiii.'- hyiiothcsis. and as such it is very iiitiTi'stiiiL:-. and fntnrc rxaniinaticms nnisl p ■live hdw lai- facts bear out the liypothesi.s. Gran's remarks coneorninL:- the vertica uiovcuicnts ol' this spe- eies are of special iiiteiTst (p. (14 ). .,Die Thiere kiiiuien bechnitende vertikale Wanderunwn unterneiiincn, uamentlieh suehen sie im ypatherbst die Tiefe und koninien im Friihlini; wieder herauf; ira iSommer sind die .lunueu hauptsachlich in den obereu, erwarmteii Hchichten /.u findeu. wiiiirend die altcron oft in dei' Tiofe umher- schwimmen." I have also noticed the vertical ..wanderiuijs" and I believe that we hei-e have a very important factor to deal with. For it will probably be jiroved that the movements of herrings ai'e ati'ected by the vertical alterations in the places where C', fin- marchicm is to be found at dittei'ent times of the year. Tt will be seen in my plankton-tables too that this species in the winter shows itself in the upper layers of water, quite thinly spread in the surface layers, while the majority is in much deeper water. But some exceptions from this state of thing's have been noticed, and these deserve attention. For instance, on Janu- ary •24th 1899, there were quantities of these animals at Kvænan- gen no deeper than — 5 meters, and the same was seen to be the case on the 27th of the same month in the same year in the inner iialf of the Lyngen Fiord. To this striking biological phenomenon a parallel peculiarity is e\idenced in the physical conditions of the layers of water, these being altogether unvarjing both with regard to temperature and sahnity (ef. nrs. 145—154, 155—162). And in this fact there seems to lie an explanation for the appearance of herrings at times in the winter so far up near the surface in some of the northern tiords that they can be caught with nets. To give an idea of the distrilnition of this species deeper down in the winter, in those tiords into Avhich the ocean water Hows, the following list of observations made is useful. Dr. Petersen's closiuL'-net. with an aperture of about 0.09 sq. m. was used. Ciila)uis finman-liiCKs. 1K99. I^)mbaken III. Dcptli. Nnint)«i-. n lon 10 100—200 n2 'iOO— 300 «77 llnni .ilii ni V2 1S99. Oxsund. Depth. 111. Number. 0-100 424 0-150 520 150—250 260 250—350 148 350-450 41 450-550 32 .O.50-H20 18 Bottom 630 m. These figures speak for themselves. In February 1899 the numbei' of C', finmarehims reached the maximum at a depth of 200— .300 m. It will also be seen fiom these observations that in the Avinter a really considerable immbei' of this important plankton form may be found in the basins of the fiords, as that it may truth- fully be said that there is food there for eventual winter herring shoals. Again it will be noticed on reference to the table dealuig with Oxsund {'V2 1899), that C'. /?)M)««rc/iic!(s is only found very spar.sely distributed at the gi-eater depths of 400—600 m. Tliis is still further emphasized in the following figui'es. is'.cj. Oioti Depth, m. Xninber of specimens. 0-100 10.-. 100—200 474 200-300 930 ;i 10- -.xvi 77-J llottdni .'jrid in. Depth. 111. Nuinl),'.- nf specimens. 0-100 (it 100—200 10.il ■Jliii — -J'>il ]."i7."> Bottom 258 m. •73 1899. Tranodybet. Depth, m. Numher. 0—100 211 100-200 9 200-300 9 300-400 10 400 -.500 6 500— tJOO 2 Bottom 640 m. -Vs 1899. The Tys Fiord I. Depth. NiDiiber. 0- 50 55 0-100 110 100—200 15 200—300 2 300-400 1 400-500 1 500-600 1 «00—700 1 ■/o 1899. Ofoten II. Bottom 72.") 111. At the two iilaces last iiKMitioned. however, the maximum proved to be in the upper 100 meter.s, while their appearance in the lower layers was very seldom. These observations tend to show that even in winter there is no accumulation of C. fimnarchicioi in the greater depths in our fiords (400 mtrs. and more). One is tempted to ask whether the vertical movements previously mentioned are active or passive. It may be replied that the vertical currents, which are caused by the cooling- of the surface during- the winter, must necessarily influence the movements of the plankton and have a share in their down- ward course. If the movements of the animals arc active, these are ill this case assisted by the current in the water. — It is not so easy to determine the spawning time for those species in which the ovisack is wanting. But even here there are interesting things to be noticed which have some connection with spawning, as for instance the fastening of spermaphores to the genital segment. I have only a time or two observed females of C. finmurrlticus with .^pei'maphores aflixed. rrt. on ",•. 1809 Ofoten TI, •200—250 m. anil on ''/-j isii'.i Oxsund. o 15(i in. ('(tl(l)ins lll/l)r)lioiri(s. KuilVEH. I have found single s]»ei'im('iis of this organism in tlie depths of our fiords, and in the < )fot Fiord in tlie winter of 1K99 they were sufticicntly numerous to deserve to be (Minsidered of importance as food for plankton-eating fish. I will g-ive a series of observations made of the iminbers taken at different depths with Dr. Pktkkskxs closing-net. whicii iiad an openiuL:' whose surface measiire was about (i.u'.i m.-. 'h 1899. Ofoten I. l)«l,tlj. m. Number of females. Number of male.s. Total. 0-100 100-200 1 1 200-300 29 29 300—350 '-t S so Number of males. 0—100 1 100-200 200-250 ■5 1 !' JJottom 25.S 111. Oxsund. Depth. Nutnber of females. Number of males. Total. 0-150 1 1 1.50—250 3 3 250—350 24") 3.50-450 281) 450-550 17 4 21 ,-,.-,0-C,20 2 4 IJottoin (i;i(t 111. Vz 1899. Tranodvbet. De|,th Number of Nu mber of iiales. Total. 0-100 ; 100—200 20;j— 300 11 1 12 300-400 5 5 400—500 6 2 8 550-(i00 4 4 Bottom 040 111. 1899. The Tvs Fi( Depth, m. Number of females. Number of male.s. Ti.tMl. 0- 50 11 jwiiorcs 0—100 14 jutnore» 100—200 15 200-300 8 300-400 25 500— (iOO 8 liOO- 700 1 Bottom 72.5 m. 1.-! Tlu'sc tables sliow tile (listrihiitidii of this ctiin'iiod in tlic (Icptlis (if the iKirtlin-ii lionls. 'I'lic iiiiinlicr >.tiii,s to reach its iiiaxiiiiimi at a dcptli of .Jou 4i»ii met res, dci-roasiiii; botli at greater ami It'sscr (Icpllis. It is of special interest that jtiniores may be seen in tlu- layei's of water no ileepci' tlian 0- 50 m. (cf. =7,i 1899. Tile 'I'ys Fioril i i. In tills way the sujijily can he replenished in liasiiis which are siiut oil' hy coiiipaiatively hi-li suhmarine ridg'es. It is a matter of importance to he uhle to determine tlie propaga- tintr time for planlitoii organisms, so I will mention some of the observations wliicii I have made and whicii will serve as helps to determine this matter as far as C'. Iii/pcrliori'its is concerned. As the foregoing tables show, there are many moi'e females than males. Then ai:ain. at certain times of the year, not a single male is to he seen. It would seem that, exeeiit Just at spawning time, hardly any fully developed males are to be found; or at any rate, only as a very great raiity. In plankton samples from the sea in the neigbourhood of Jan Mayen (-76 1897) I have, for in- stance, found hnndreds of females, bnt not a single male. As 1 mentioned previously, the development of spermaphores may he considered as a proof that spawning time has come. Speiiiiaphorcs affixed to the first abdominal segments of females have thus been observed by me in specimens from the following places: — '■/o 1899. Tranodybet, 0— ti.Sd m. 72 1899. Ofoten II, -iOO— 2oO m. 1"'. 1899. Oxsund, i.50— 550 m. Ill one single instance I have observed that a spermaphore had almost left the spermaphore-duct through its opening on the left side of the first abdominal segment, the fifth leg on the left side being at the same time inclined towards the spermaphore so as to be able to seize it (74 1900. The 8kjerstad Fiord II, 0— 180 m.). In several cases I have observed eggs in the oviducts on their way towards the genital segment, and this too is a sure sign that spawning time has come. Dates for such observations are, among others, 'h 1899. Ofoten I; ^'/o 1899 Oxsund; -/i 1900. The Skjerstad Fiord IV. The eggs, Avhich lay in a row in the canal leading from the ovary, were of a yellowish colour and were placed like beads on a string. These yellow strings of beads could be seen with the naked eye. There is another thiuLi, wliich in all probability has some pur- pose to serve at spawning time. I have noticed at such time, and as far as I remember only then, two red spots on the ventral side of the swollen srenital segment in the females of ('. h//perhoreu>^. If these spots are not .seen at other times, one has every reason to think that they arc intended to serve some special purpose at that particular time, and it is natural to conclude that they are for the guidance of the males, possi])ly ti spermaphores should be deposited. >u\ the liords mentioned, so I «lietlier propagation con- conclude that they show them were the Jlllliorrs 1 '• .. 1S9'.). -7:i 1899. 7.5 1899. -"/:, 1900. -'-'/:, 1900. '''i lilOO. From the forevoiuL:- statements it \ time for ('. hi/inilur' ii.-< in the iKirlherii the months of Februniv. March and .\i lave been fre(|iiently ibserved. as. fo Oxsuml. ;?5n-45() m The TVS Fiord 1 50 m Hola, 0-150 111 ykroven. loo 111 Tranoilvbet. — coo 111 The F^ildeii Fidi'd. 1 ■■)00 -500 111 instance, on oiild -eeiii that propagation lioi'ds may be taken to be lil. 1 have no observations that 1 am unable 1,, >ay aiiyllilii'.' tiniies after .\prll. There Is no doubt thai this aiclle enpepdil iiropagatcs in our tiords. but as ynmiL' hive been found In the iipjier layers (0—50 m.) there .seems to lie notliliii.'- unlikely in presuming an inflow, also in those basins whieb are shut olV by submarine ridges. I'sr,nl„rnhutn.< rh,n,,(il„s. Uukck. .\ i^laiice at plankton taides will cnnvliiee us that this is one of the 111 tioi-ds. ipepoU ikton the northern It Is easier to determine the propagating time for this species than for the two i)reviously mentioned, as the females carry their eggs affixed to the genital segment. 1 have, however, only a few observations from the northern fiords, as for instance on '"J-i 1900 when I saw females with eggs in the Ostnes Fiord and again on 74 in the same year in the Skjerstad Floi'd. Hut tVora the skjær- gaard off lierg-en, I have observed such females from Februaiy to the bei;innlnt^' of May. It is jiossible that propagation continues after this time. ('Ill r id i us aiVHltus, IJoKCK. PL II, Fig. 14. Amoii!.'- the many samples of plankton from the northern fiords, I have only noted this .species as beiiiM found at tlie following places: — 7-. 1.S99. Skroven I, 0—380 m. ^'/2 1899. Oxsund, 450 — 550 ni. '74 1899. The Malang Fiord, 0-380 m. '74 1899. The Malang Fiord, 200—300 and 300-380 m. G. O. Saks') has found this species from the Kristiania Fiord up to the Vest Fiord, which was its noi'thern limit as fai- as was previously known. Now this limit can be extended to the Malang Fiord. (.'hiriiliKs li')it(isphius. III. O. Sars. PI. II. Fig. 13. Tills arctic copeimd has only once been tbuiul in Norway. I counted every copepod in the samples from Ofoten I (7-' 1899), 300—350 m. and found among them only one specimen of this spe- cies, a female 3.5 mm. in length. Eiirlincfit noniu/ii-a. I'.dkck. This .species is a giant one among copepoda. I have measured sevei-al specimens of females which have reached a length of 8.3 mm. lielow are some particulars which will give an idea of the distribution of 1-J. ii^niyira at various depths. ■/■■ 1H99. Ofoten 1. Deptli. m. Number of females. Number ..f males. Total. 0—100 100-200 3 2 5 200-300 9 300 - .'^.-lO n ') ('rusta<-.-;i of Norw: '"A 1899. Øxsund. Depth. Number of females. Number of males. Total. 0-150 1 1 150—250 5 2 7 250-350 3 3 6 350-450 1 2 3 450-550 ^ 3 550—620 Bottom "A 1899. (■.;30 m. Trauødybet Depth. Number of females. Number of males. Total. 0- 60 2 2 0-100 1 1 100—200 2 2 200—300 2 2 300-400 400—500 1 1 .500— «00 2 '> IJottum <;iii 111. In 1899 juniores were observed in the plankton from January to April inclusive, and during the .same time I have notes of many specimens of females Avith ovisacks. In some of them the bent ovarial tubes were seen to be full of the blueish eggs which shone through the body so that tlie blue ovarial tubes could be seen by the naked eye. In this species too, I noticed two red spots on the ventral side of the genital segment in females. I liave suggested the hypothesis that these are for tlie guidance of tlie males when they deposit spermaphores. It has been found on examination in the southern herds that tlie .spawning time for this species also takes place at other times than mentioned above, but I suppose that in the northern fiords the special time for spawning is during tlie first few months in the year, from January to April. This species is one of the few jjlankton organisms, which I have found in the stomach of Lofot cod. Sfolccitliricclla m'nior. I)Kaiiy. This species was very rai( ikt( tViini the northern liorr G. 0. Hars') mentions having come across it from the Kristi- jinia Fiord right up to r^ofoten. I have found it in Gxsund {'"A 1899, 0—100 m.) and in Kvænang ('-'A 1.S99, 0— KiO m.) Miiich must be taken as the most northernly place where this species has, up to the present, been observed. 1) Crustacea of Norwiiy. Vol. IV. p. 5(i. Cenfyojiai/cs hamahis, Lilljeborg. A single specimen of this species was found in a sample from Røst (Lofoten Islands) 'A 1S97, and this was a female. Tcmorn luinjicoiiils. 0. F. Muller. This species provides a considerable amount of food in our waters for plankton-eating fish. As, however, on the south west coast it is particularly prominent in the summer and autumn months, it was not to be expected that it would often be met with in samples from the northern fiords, which were taken in the months of January, February, March and April. 1 have only noted it from Moskenstream ('Vi 1899, 0— lOo m.). On the contrary it has frequently been referred to as being found in several of the northern fiords in the autumn of 1898 and 1S99 by Dr. Gran.') Professor P. T. Cleve'-') fixes the nortliern limit on the Norwegian coast at 70" N. for tliis species. MrtrUTiii lucens, PjOECk. Off tiie coast of Bergen this species is at times so plentiful that it becomes of importance as food for plankton eaters. I have for instance found large (luantities in the stomachs of young „sei" (coal-fish). By a look at the accompanying plankton tables it will be seen that this species is very generally distributed also in the northern fiords of Norway in the winter, but it is not seen in large numbers. The following table gives the result of examination in this respect of the samples from Oxsund: — '"A 1^<99. Oxsund. l)L-plll. Number of females. Number of Total. 0—100 1 1 0—1.50 9 9 150— i'50 2 2 2.50-3.50 4 4 350-450 450-550 5.i0— 620 The is Kvu'iia and so dt specle^ l)lncc at which 1 have found this species it ciiiits a blui'ish liglit during preservation, next to bo considered. This species is a typical deci» water form in the fiords. The following tables give an idea of the ([uaiitities in which it is found at the various depths. 45 'h 1899. Ofoten I. Dui.tl. in inetei-s Number of females Number of males Total 0—100 100-200 200-300 10 :<(iii :i-,(i 1.-. HiittcMU MW III. V2 1S99. Ofoten II. Depth iu meters Number of females Number of males Total 0—100 1 100—200 1 7 1 8 , ' .. liottoin -iSs 111. »72 1899 Oxsund. Depth in meters Number of females Nuiii1j,.|- of males Total 0-100 0—150 3 3 150-250 8 8 250—350 13 13 350-450 4 4 450—550 2 4 6 550—620 1 1 iottoiii (;.)() Ill PJcKromnmma rolmsta, Dahl. !>;. II, Fi.r. 1- ll^ In samples fi'om The Vest Fioi-d (Skroven I, "'2 1899. 0—300 m.) 1 found one sinirle female specimen of a Pleuromamraa, which I at first mistook for a P. (thcloinhiali.^. But on closei- examination, I found that the first pair of an- tennae were without the peculiar hooks which specially distinguish the latter species. Then I continued my examination on the lines laid down by Dr. Giesbhecht in his tables'), and came to the conclusion that my specimen was identical with the form described by F. Dahl found in the Atlantic, r/>. P. robiisfa. As there were no drawings nor detailed description of the latter, I decided that I Avould treat my .specimen very thoroughly and examine it still more closely, and then I prepared detailed drawings. 1) Copepn.la (in ,I)as Tierreidr). \,. lUit. Meanwiiile, G. 0. Sars's excellent drawings and desci'iption') Mere puhlisheil. .so that my work became superfluou.s. I have, nevei-- tlicless. hail my sketclies reproduced, as the place where my speci- men was found is cMiisidrnibly liirllirr north than there the ones lireviiuisly iiicntioiied have been louml. My sketches may then be used as proofs that it was really a P. ruhushi I secured at Skroven in The Vest Fiord. Its length was ;3.7 mm. According to G. O. Saks this species was taken by Dr. H.jout on the „ Michael Sars" expedition, somewhat north of The F;eroe Islands (stat. 9) and in The Stor Fiord in Sondmore (stat. 4). Hdcrorhnhihts norregicits, Boeck. I have sjH'cinieiis of thi.s .species from The Ostnes Fiord, The Vest i'^ioid I Skroven. Tranodybet), Oxsund, The Ofot Fiord, The Tys Fiord, The Folden Fiord and The Skjerstad Fiord. It was only found in small quantities at all these places. There were a few fully developed males in addition to the more plentiful females. With respect to propagating time, it may be mentioned that juniorcs were noticed '/■, 1899 1 Ofoten I, .300— .•5.50 m.). '",, 1899 (Oxsund, 350—450, 450 — 550 m.) and again "4 1900 (The Folden Fiord, 200-300, 300—400, 400—500 m.). Sars has found this species at various jilaees from The Kri- stiania Fiord right up to Lofoten. Candncia armata, Boeck-). In The Vest Fiord (V2 1899, Skroven I. o-.-jso m.) 1 took a single female specimen of this species, length -Ifi mm. This station at Skroven is the most northerly place where this species has, up to the present, been noticed. Acartia clansi, Giesbhecht. Under Acartia sp. in the tables, both daidi and lungiremis are included. The form which was seen about the middle of January 1899 (12th— 18th of .Tanuary! was principally chms'i. Acartia lonyin LiLLJEBOEG. This .species was found occasionally among the samples, but never in any (quantity worth mentioning. Oithona similis, Claus. Even if there should be no other jilauktou copepod to be found this species, however, is usually present, at any rate one may almost certainly find a few specimens, and, on account of its very general appearance, this species must be reckoned among the most unportant copepoda with regard to its ecological worth. I have noticed females cariying their eggs in every month of the year in the fiords in the neighbouihood of Bergen. Oithona plioiiifcra, P)A1kd. As the tables show, this species was found at many places, but never in any quantity. It was also found off Ingø (-■•/4 1899. Ingehavet, 0—300 m.), and this is its northernmost limit as far as is now known. The geographical position of this station is: 71° 10' N., 23" 10' E. ') Crustacea of Norway. Vol. I -) G. O. Sars. Crustacea of N. PI. 78, 79. . IV. pag. 135 O. Nordoaard. MicrosetMd ntlanticn. Bkady it Hub. A glance at the tables will suftice to convince one that this species is one of the most important plankton copepoda. Propagating at any rate I have .Inlv in the fiords time is extended over a great part of the year, noticed females with ovisacks from Februaiy t( in the neighbourhood of Bergen. Oncæa eonijera. Giesbrecht This easily recognized form was only rarely seen in the plankton. It was found in The Vest Fiord. The Jøkel Fiord and the Kvænang. Pteropoda. Limacina balea. ]\I()ller. This species, which may sometimes be found in lai'gc quantities the autunni, wcvc only rarely found in the plankton. Vide tables. Appendieularia. FritiJlaria horeaUs. LoiniAN. What was found of Oikopleam, I iiave not been able to identify, but, on the other hand, the specimens which in the tables are classitied under IrltiUuyia sp. are without doubt F. horenlis. Bryozoa. Ci/plionautcs. The larval form, which at times is tolerably general in the tiords in the neighbourhood of Bergen, can only with certainty be mentioned as having been found by me at one single place, viz. Raftsund. {",'2 1899. Raftsund II, 0—260 m.). Chætognatha. Sagitta hiimnctata, Quoy & Gaimard. Under tlie designation Chætognatha two species, (rlc. this and th(^ following) will bo found in my tables. Meanwhile, howevci', I have noticed sevoi'al places whei'e 5'. hqjunctata has been found, e. g. '7» 1899, Tranødyb, 0—50 m.; -"/a 1899. Henningsvær II, 0—100 m.; -V» 1899, Tysiioi'd I, — 100 m.; '7i 1899, 40 miles NNVV of Gaukværø, 0—100 m. As far as my experience goes, this species on our coast is only found hi the upper layers of water, but SpafMla hamata is almost without exception found in samijlos taken from docp watoi-. The species last mentioned has been found by me in ([uantities in the stomachs of Youni;' ,,sei" caught on the coast nil' liergeu. SjiiiilrUa liiimiila. M("iiiU's. I have found this si)0cic.s in large ((uantities in samples taken fi'om deep water. Among the many places where it has been found, 1 may mention The Vest Fiord, Øxsund, The Ofof Fioid, The Tys Fiord'. The Folden Fiord. The Skjei'stad Fioi'd. S:v. 1 have taken it both. Øxsund. with townet I counted the sjjecimens from '/2 1899. Oxsund. Depth Number oi m. specimens 0—100 2 0—150 2 150-250 1 250—350 3 350-450 2 450—550 1 550—620 2 Bottom 630 m. As before mentioned, this species as a I'ule is found at greater depths, but I can mention one exception. In the Skjerstad Fiord {% 1900, Skjerstad fj. VIII, m.) several large specimens were found swimming about in the surface water. This circumstance may perhaps be accounted for when the peculiar hydrographical character of The Skjerstad Fiord is remembered. The length of the fully developed specimens was 30—35 mm.; while those from Skjerstad Fiord were about 40 mm. In samples from The Vest Fiord ('Vs 1899, Tranødyb, 300—400, 500—600 m.) there were specimens with eggbags. The hindei'part of the side fin was bent downwards, thus forming a hollow in which the eggs lay tightly pressed together. In samples from the same place taken at a depth of 400—500 m. there were quantities oi juniores (2—3 mm. I of a chætognath, which most probably was S. hamata. Similar young individuals were also found, e. g. in The Tys Fiord (-73 1899, Tysfd. I) in samples taken at a depth af 3()()— 500 m. but they were especially numerous in samples taken from a depth of 500—600 and 600—700 m. Ctenophora. Lulnui 'lufuudthnJam, Fauk. Prof. Chux has identitied B. norvcglca M. Saks with this species. Chun writes'): — „Falls die von Mertens (1833) aus der Bering-Strasse beschriebcne B. septentrionalis mit unserer Art iden- tisch ware (was atis dei' Abbildung nicht ohne weiteres hervorgeht), so durfte audi /.'. nifundilndum eine circumpolarc Verbreitung auf- wiesen. " This lobate Cteuoi)liorc has been noticed by me in the Jokel Fiord (-"/4 18i)9) as well as in the sea at Hammerfest i-"-'/4 1899). Unfortunately I did not succeed in preserving any specimen. C. VoGT observed this beautiful form in 1861 in Lofoten. Anthozoa. Amchaadt^ allnda. M. Sahs. Sevei'al spcciiiu'iis of this species were found in the suifacc water of Moskeuslroniinen on March ist 1899. ') On the whole I have seen several of the hirger plankton turnis in (he triiwl, e. ii. Calanus hi/pcrboreus, Eiichæta norvegica, Parathemisto oblivia, etc. -) Die Bezielinngen zwisohen dem arktischen und antarktischen Plankton (Siutt;iarl, mn). V. 22. Siphonophora. DijiJll/rs iin-linl. ClirN. It is very iiitcivsIiiiL; to l>c alil<' In class this ai-ctic siplioniiiiiHir ainoiiu- tliu Norwf.i^'iau fauna, as it is IooUihI upon as l)i'iii^- a tvpical or leadiiitr ort-anism of tlie cold curroiits'i. C. Ciirx writes in tiiis connection: ..I)ii)lii/c)< (irrlien is{ c'uw liocinionlisciie i-'oiin. welciie in alien wannen Stromgebicten fehlt und i^fiade walnend der kiiltesten .ialn-es/.fit (von .laniiar bis Miliz) in der iiaftins-liai liiiutitr erscheint." A ei)n)i)iete list of the distribntion of this sjiecies as far as tiien known is dven by V\ !\(imi:u-'|. i5oth UiijiEU and Ciius liavc specially emphasized the fart that this species is not found on the Scandinavian coasts, lint this is no longer a fact; for in the winter of liMKi. 1 foiniil F.iiAoxia arctica at the followiiiL;- places: — ■. I'.MKi. The Skjerstad Fiord \'ll. o I'.iii m. " i — The Folden Fiord J, ;iO()— 400 m. 1 availed myself of Prof. Chin's excellent descriptions and drawings, in ..Die .Slphonophorcn der Plankton-Expedition" (Se Tab. I, Fig. (i), when identifying these specimens. Tlie bracts were of precisely the same shape, and there was the same arranii-ement of the canals, but there were no eggs in the gonophor. So L think that there can be no doubt that Diphyes areti-ii also belongs to the Norwegian fauna; this does not, how- ever, necessarily weaken Chun's opinion with regard to the zoo- gcograpliical character of this species. True the temperature at the l)lace where I found it in T'he Folden Fiord w^as Q°.(i C. and salinity about ;!.") pro mille, liut so many of the relict organisms from the glacial period liave adapted themselves to the physical conditions in which they tind themselves in a corresponding manner to the case here under considei'ation. Vtipulita sarsi. Haeckel. Agah)ioi)si>i ihijnns, M. Sars (pavt), Fauna littoralis Xurvegiae (1846). Part 1. p. 32, pi. V, figs. 1— (), pi. YI. CKpnlitn Kfirsi, Haeckel, Siphonophora (1888) Challenger Eeport, Vol. XXVIII, p. 2.34, .8(i7. — K. T. Browne. The Fauna anil Flora i>f Valencia Harbour. R. I. A. Proc. Sev. III. Vol. V, p. (178. Agalmripnis ckycnis, Nordgaaed, Some Hydrograpliieal Eesults. Berg. Mus. .\arbog 1899, no. VIU, pag. 25. .\s is well known Michael Sari»; in 1840 gave a detailed desciiption with drawings of Siphonophora collected at Floro (61" ;iO' N.I including Ai-inhvuims elegans. Concerning this Haeckel writes in isss- ). ..The genus Agalmopsh was de.scribed very accu- rately by Saus in 1S46, and illustrated by excellent figures. The North Atlantic Agalmidæ, however, which are represented in his pis. V and VI, belong to two (or even three?) dittcrcnt genera. The tirst foi'm, figured in pi. \'. has simple terminal tilaments of the tcntilla. and belongs therefore to the genus CujniJita. The second form, i-epresented in pi. \'I. has tricornuate tentilla, with an odd terminal vesicle and two jiaired lateral horns. This form may i-etain the original name Ai/idmops/s rhy/oix and lepresent the type of this genus.'' After a careful examination of the description and drawings given by Michael Sars of Agalmopsis elegans one will certainly egi-ee that Haeckel is right in dividing into two genera. P.ut, on ') Die Siphonophoren der Plankton-E.xpeditiou, p. 20. -) Die Siphonophoren (Fauna arctica, II B., p. 174). •') Challenirer Report. Vol. XXVIU. p. 2:!4. the other hand. I have come to a ditferent coiiclMsion with rcL'ard to SAii>'s li-iircs ,is applieil to the two genera. On Saks's pi. V the W'.'s. o and represent tentilla .,\vith a spiral cnidoband. enveloped by a cainpaniilate involu(Te'"), and these, as well as tig. 1 show that the tentilla have simple terminal fil- aments, con.secpiently they iilu.strate a .sjtecies of Cupulild. Hut pi. V, tig.s. 7 and H represent tentilla with a terminal anipnlia and two horns, .ind tlie.se are characteri.stic of tlie genus Agahnoiisi»: Neither can il be correct as Haeckkl mentions (1. c. p. 3(>7) that pi. VI hi Sai;s'> work, rejircsents Agnlvwiifi.s ilvgans. (In pi. VI fig. I the tentilla arc drawn partly with, and jiartly without terminal tilaments. FiL'. 10, on the .same pi. gives a detailed drawing of the laller kind. ,iiid this has given lise to the thoiiglil that Sars possibly had a lliird genus under examination when pre- paring his aeeount. Thei-e is. however, no Ioniser any rca.son for this supposition. In li^''. I llio tentilla without leiniinal filament are drawn smallei' than those which are furnished with the terminal fil- ament, and it is reasonable to conclude that the former represent them in course of development, if one compares pi. VI fig. 10 in Saks s work with pi. II fig. S in Fewkes'-) a .striking re.semblance will be noticed. Fkwkes describes his fig. as representing an ..em- bryonic tentacular kiud)" of Ciqmlitu ( Ximumia) cant, A. Aoassiz. It may surely be eoiisidored certain that Sars's fig. 10 repre- sents a corresponding condition in Ciijnilifu xtiitii. This must be a Ciipulifa and not an Agalniojinis, for the tentilla which are developed are furnished with a terminal filament. Thus il will be soon that Sai:s's docriptions and drawings almost exclusively are of I he organism which Haeckel das desig- nated Cupulita siirt jil. I. Saks pi. V fig. 1 and pi. VI fio-. 1). There is similarity with regard to the a|)i)earance of the adult tentilla ( F. pi. II ivj. '•• and S. pi. 5 fig. 5, 0) and the resemblance between the embryonic tentacular knobs (F. pi. II fig. 8. S. pi. 0, fig. 10) I have already mentioned. On the other hand, the tasters (hydrocystæ) ajipear to differ. Fewkes describes them (1. c. p. 218) as follows: — „They (the tasters) ari.se directly from the stem, and are destitute of a basal jjeduncle. The distal extremity is closed." PL II W'j:. 7 answers in every detail to this description. On com- paring with this S. pi. 5 fig. 2, .3, where the tasters are described •) Haeckel (loco citato p. 233). =) On certain Medusæ from New Kngland 1888. Bull. Comp. Zool. (Ha vard, Mass.), V.il. Xlll. 48 as „lange Elaschen" (distinguished by the letter e), it will be seen that they are furnished with a basal peduncle, and that the top of the taster is somewhat extended and pointed. In his description of the tasters, Fewkes says that ,,the most marked peculiarity in their anatomy is the existence of an ,,oil globule" near their base." 'i'his „oil globule" is drawn by the wiiter mentioned and will be found on pi. n tig. 7. Nothing corresponding to this is found in Saes's pi. o tigs. 2, .3. To discover if any such „oil globules" exist in Cupulita sarsi I examined the remains of a specimen from Tromsø sound. It was at once evident that while the majority of the various organs as usual fell to the bottom of the glass, there wei-e a few •small bits which remained on the surface of the preserving fluid (for- malin). On closer examination, it was found that the little pieces floating on the surface were tasters M-hich had risen to the top on account of their oil globules. Here too, there appears to be a ditte- rence between the two species under discussion. While the oil globules of C. rcira according to Fewkes are sessile, those of C. sarsi are provided with a short peduncle. It is possible that the reason, w liy the oil globules do not appear on Sars's pi. 5 flgs. 2, 8 is that they so easily burst on being touched. Saks has, however, given a drawing (pi. (5 fig. 11) of a taster with oil globule, which he considers to be „eine seltene Form der ovalen Blaschen", while the oil globule itself is described as „Kugeliger Anhang". These oil globules are most likely intended to act as a kind of hydrostatic apparatus. As will be seen from the foregoing, differences can clearly be pointed out between C. cara and C. sarsi, and it is probable that they represent two diiferent species which are, however, very similar. The fact of C. sarsi being found in large quantities in the winter in such fiords as Lyngen, Kvænang and .Jøkel would seem to indicate that it is an arctic form, but one cannot be sure of this until its distribution is more clearly defined. Plujsophora horcall-^. M. Saes. PI. IV, Figs. 1, 2. In The Mosken current (^loslcciisd'ommen) several specimens of a Physophora were found sw innniiiu iiliout near the surface, on March 1st 1899. On comparing ^[. .Sauss drawings and descrip- tions'), I was convinced that it was his species which I had found. It has been thought that horealis was identical to Physophora hydro- statica of the Mediterranean, but this is, however, not altogether so sure as to be beyond doubt. If this should be proved to be the case Sars's name; would have to give way foi' the older one. liyilro- statica, Forsk. M. Saks himself had an oi)portunity of comparing the Meditei'- ranean form with the one he describes (1. c. p. 33) and it seems tiiat he was acquainted with Claus's, Gegenbaur's and Kolucker's reseai'ciies and examination of the former species. And as lie still maintained that they wer'c dittei'ent, there is evci'v i-eason to be wary before one concludes that they are not so. M. Saks says, on page 40, „None of the urticary knobs ob- served by me shewed more than .'j spii-al coils; bul ("i.ais (1. c. p. 26, fig. 26)-) in P. hyilrustatica delineates '.) — 10 of them, and 1) Fauna littoralis Norvegiæ, li. ;i. p. 32, pi. V, VI figs. 1—8. -) TJeber Physophora hydrnstatka nebst Bemerkuiigen uebev aiulei-e Siplioiio- en. Sep. Abdruck aus Zeitsclir. l', wiss. Zoologie. 10 B. Gegenbaue remarks that the spiral in the most perfect urticary knobs becomes decomposed and lies twisted together in irregular coils, which is also apparent in some of the specimens brought home by me from the Mediterranean." In horealis too during the development of the tentacular knob, a dissolution of the spiral coils of the enidoband takes place, after which they are reformed into irregular coils. On PI. IV fig. 1 in the present work a tentacular knob with spiral twisted enidoband Mill be seen, while fig. 2, depicts a later stage, the spiral being unwound. I have observed intermediate stages between these two. A thoroughly developed tentillum is depicted on Saes's pi. VI, fig. 7. If it is a fact that the Coil unwinds itself in P. hydrostatica, then the figure given by Claus (pi. 26, fig. 26) cannot designate „ein vollkommen entwickelter Nesselknopf". But even if on this point there is a similarity, there would still remain the dissimilarity that during development the spiral twist in the tentacular knobs are more numerous in hyiho^inticit than in horealis. Craspedota. (Notes and identification aie due to Di-. Edward T. Browne, University College, London I. Aeqiiorea sp. V<; 1S99. Moskenstrommen o. m. This is probably a new species. Aijhmthd diyitnlis. Mvllee. --/a 1899. NW of Kost (Lofoten), 3 specimens. This is a northern species. Recorded from (jreenland, Norway, Faeroe Channel and in the North Atlantic by the „National" Plank- ton Expedition. There is no evidence that it has been taken south of al)out latitude .58". Aijlautha rosea, Foebes. "A 1900. The Skjerstad Fiord IV, 0—330 m., 1 siiccimen. — ., — ., V, 0—420 m., 1 specimen. This medusa got mixed up with A. digitalis until I found out (1898) that it Jiad eight sense organs. {A. digitalis has only four). Recorded tVoui The British Isles and Hehgoland. Ptychogastria polaris, Alman. 74 1900. Folden Fiord, 3 specimens. 74 1900. The Skjerstad Fiord IV. 0—330 m., 1 specimen. 74 1900. .. — „ VIL, 0—490 m., 2 specimens. This medusa was taken in Discovery Bay in Grinnel Land, up Smith Sound on tlu' west side of Greenland. (Pectyllis arctica from (ireeniand and off Jlalifax-CiinllonL'or Exped.). J-fomi)ociii-iiiit idatygoiwii, Maas. 74 1900. The Skjei'stad l-'iord V, — 420 m., 1 specimen. 74 1900. „ — ,, VII, 0—490 m., 2 specimens. H. platygonon was taken by the „Nationar' Plankton Expedition. The station is omitted in the Report. B. Protistplankton. By E. Jm-geuseu. a. Plankton tables. In tlic following- tables r siii'iiities rare, it very rare (only one or very few specimens seen), r-j- less rare, -|- frequent, +i" less fi-equent. +c rather common, c common, cc very common, ccc in large quantities. The method used for collection and examination only allows reliable conclusions as to the quality, not as to the quantity. From the signs used to indicate the more or less common occurrence it shoidd, however, be evident which species are common or go to make up a considerable part of the plankton. It is, however, always to be remembered that the signs are only based upon a sub- jective judgment, not upon exact counting. As a general characterization of the plankton — which for all stations, the sea off Vesteraalen (Yttersiden) perliaps excepted, is to be considered more or less unmixed coast plankton (neritic p.) — it may be stated that the Peridinæa in the winter season are predominant in (luantity, together with Halosphæra, while the Diatomaceæ and likewise the Tintinnodea are of less frequent occurrence. This state is at once changed in the spring (about 'A 1899, in 1900 "A), when a few species of Diatomaceæ suddenly appear in large quanti- ties, and remain for a considerable time at least more than one month, how long cannot be seen from the samples collected, as it was too early in the year, when the last samples were taken. During this time the other plankton is very much reduced in quantity, excepting Phæocystis, which species seems to have its optimum just in this period. The Peridinæa occur far less abundantly than earlier, not only in relation to the large masses of Diatomaceæ, but also absolutely. This phenomenon, that might truly be named the inflow of Diatomaceæ, is a well known phase also in the development of the more southern coast plankton (see L. (= Literature, at the end of this essay) 1). Ostenfeld and Gran (L. 2 and 3) have also men- tioned it, and try to explain the causes. It is an interesting fact that most of the leading species are identical, both in the northern and in the southern intioAV of Diatomaceæ, on the extensive coast of Norway. Yet there are some few species characteristic of the northern, that seem to be entu-ely wanting in the southern, especially Fragilaria oceanica, partly accompanied by F. cylindrus, and Chceto- ceros fureellatus (besides some other, less predominant species). As to quality the northern plankton is decidedly poorer than the southern, especially is this the case with the Tintinnodea. Jørgensen. Year 1899 Month .'^g I SO "/l Depth (meters) 0—100 0—150 Salinity (O/qo) 33.60- 34.67 88.39- 84.40 83.33- 33.39 33.33- 33.74 Temperature (Cels.) I. Bacillariales. (Diatomaceæ.) Ehizosolenia alata Brightw. forma curvirostr Biddulphia mohiliensis Bail Chætoceros borealis Bail C. 6. var. solitaria Cl C. convolufus Caste C. atlanticus Cl C. decipiens Cl C. diadema (Ehkb.) Gran C. curviseius Cl Act'mocyclus Ehrenbergii Ralfs Roperia tesnellata (Rop.) Gkun Coscinodiscus excentricus Ehrb C. I'meatus Ehrb C. curvatulus Grun C. stellaris Rop C. radiatus Ehbb C. subbidliens Jørg. ii. sp C. centralis Ehrb C. concinnus W. Sm C. nitidus Greg Jlyalodiscus stelliger Bail Asteromphalus hcptactis (Brkb.) Ralfs Thalassioth-ix longissima Cl. et Grun T. Frauen feldii Grun T. F. V. nitzschioides (Grun.) Jøro Pleurosigma ttnenmi Jørg. n. sp Euodia gibba Bail ('I'he following are doubtful aa plauktonfor fi.xed species or such from the ground). Paralia sulcata (Khrb.) Cl Actifiopti/chus undulatus (Bail. V) Ralks Stirirdla lata W. Sm Campylodi-scus Tliwcfi't Bréb //. Peridinialcs. (iJinofiagellata.) Prorocetitrum micans Ehrb Dinophysis acuta Ehrb.. Jøro D. norvegica Clap, et Lachm., Jøro. D, rnttmdafa Clap, et Lachm D. komuvculus Stkin i-+ r+ v+ r+ !•+ Protistplaiikfon. Year 1899. Month January bo » 8» a := 2 « a £ SO Date Depth (meters) Salinity (»/oo) Temperature (Cels.) Podolampas palmipes Stein Pt/roj)haciis horohgium Stein Protoceratium reticulatum (Clap, et Lachm.) BrTscm.i. Diplopsalis lentmda Bergh Perkliniwn depression Bail P. octanicum Vanhofp P. divergens Ehrb. (IP. leiificidare (Ehrb.) .Jorg.) P. cnnicum (Gban) Ostenf. et Schm P. paUidum Ostenf P. Steinii Jørg P. ovni'.m (PorcH.) Schutt Ceratitim h-i/)os(O.F. Mull.)Nitzsch. (a halticum Schutt.) C bturphalui» Cl C. macroceros Ehris C. intermedium (Jørg.) C. i. forma gracilis Pocch., Jorg C. longipes (Bail.) Cl C. furca (Ehrb.) Urj C Uneatnm (Ehrb.) Cl C. ftmts (Ehrb.) Duj ///. Pterosperinatacese. Pterosperma Miibii (Jørg.) Ostenf P. Vatihoffenii (Jørg.) Ostenf P. didyon (Jørg.) Ostenf IV. Halosphæraceæ. Hakif^phæra viridis Schmitz (incl. H. minor Ostenf.) . . V. Silicotiagellata. Disteplianus specidum (Eurb.) Støhr Diciyorha fibula Ehrb VI. Radiolaria. I. Spuinellaria. Hexncontium pachydermum Jørg Erhinomma trinacrium Hck E. leptodermum Jørg Drymynmma elcyans Jorg 33.39- 33.46 33.39— 33.46 33.39- 34.40 4.1- 4.7 4.2— 7.1 r+ +c r+ +c r+ r+ +c + +c +c r+ +c +c +c JørgensFii. Year 1899. Month January > .Sft* ■S 'i "^ ^-k ^% "/i Depth (meters) 0—100 0—150 Salinity ("/oo) 33.39— 35.11 33 60- 34.57 33.39— 33.40 33.39- 34.40 33.33- 33.39 33.33— 33.74 Temperature (Cels.) Chromyomma boreale (Cl ) Jørg. . . Bhizoplegma boreale (Cl.) Jørg. . . . Stylodidya tenuispina Jørg. n. sp. Spnvgodisms favns Ehhb LithelhiH minor JøKO Fhortichim iJyloniuni KCK.? Cl. . . . SorolarcKS cij-cmnle.rtns Jørg 2. Nassellaria. Plaguicantha arachnoides Clap, et Laohm. Plectacantha oikiskos Jørg. n. sp CampijlacanilM cladophora Joufi. n. s]). . . Phormacantha hystrix (Jørg.) Joro Peridhim longispinum Jøkg Profnxrrnvmi simplr.r (Cl.) Jørg Cfc(?o.sr,„;,f),/ l,ir,.li,him (HcK.?) Jørg.... Dictgiiiiliiiiiii.s (_'lrn-i Jørg Litliomelissa selnsa (Cl.) Jørg X. hystrix Jørg Acanthocorys umbellifera Hck Dictyoceras acanthicum Jøbo D. .riphrphnrvm Jørg ('lollii-iii i/rl,is 1 1 'isjiidota (Jørg.) Jørg. ... AmlracyiUis guniplidnycha (Jørg.) Jørg... .4. amblycephalis (Jørg.) Jørg Stkhocorys seriata Jørg. n. .sp Gonosphæra primordinlis Jorg. n. sp .7. Phæodaria (Tripylea). Cnmiosphæra lupta Jorg C. genmetrica Borg Protocystis xiphodon (Hck.) Borg J'. Harstoni (Murray) Borg P. tridens (Hck.) Borg Challengeron dwdon Hck. (C. Iietercicanthum Jørg.) . C. armaUim Borg Medusetta arcifera Jørg GazdkUa pe.ntapodium Jørg VII. Tintinnodea Tintinnus acuminatus Clap, et Lachm. T. a. var undata Jørg r+ Protistplankton. Year 1899. Month January Locality ! lill 1 1'^i , a ii -Ol II 00 fl l! Sas II 1'^ -^2 £ 2 «i 111 li I-S S'5 Date '\ "/. "/i *% "/i »/i "/i .T/j 17' "/, "/i »% '«A "/, "/. Deptli (meters) 0—50 0-250 0—50 0—180 0—50 0—100 0-150 0-50 0-100 0-50 0-180 0-50 0—110 0—50 0—700 Salinity (« oo) 33.39 33.39— 35.11 33.50 33.50- 34.57 33.39- 33.46 33.39- 33.46 33.39- 34.40 33.33— 33.39 33.33— 33.7* 33.39 33.50 34.38 34.38- 34.38 Temperature (Cels.) 4.3 — 4.4 4.3— 7.3 4.6— 4.9 4.0- 6.5 4.1— 4.S 4.1- 4.7 4.2 — 7.1 3.9- 4.3 3.9- 5.6 4.2 4.1- 4.7 5.9- 6.4 5.9— 3.6 Amphorella guadrilineafa (Clap, ct Laphm.) Joro A. Steensfrupii (Clap, et Lachm.) Dad rr r+ rr r r r r+ r+ + rr r r + 1-+ r + r r r rr + r+ + r r + r+ r •• + r+ r + r ir + r rr + r r rr Pti/cJioci/lis unuila (Clap, et Lachm.) Brandt a major Jorc. + P. «. V. digitalis Acriv. . ... T. n. V. si7mata (Brandt) T n. V oi'alis Jørg n var Codonella lagmula (Clap, et Lachm.) Estz. v. ovata Jørg. Cijttarocylis denticulafa (Ehrb.) Pol. a typica Jørg C. d. V. gigayitea (Brandt) Cl Dictiiocysta temnliim Hck. . r-|- Indella caudata (Ostenf ) Cl Year 1899. Month Depth (meters) 1 '^ ^ io§ §^ 2'/i ^/i 33.82 34.C Ti-raperature (Cels.) I. Bacillariales. (DiaLmaccce.) < Biddulphia aurita (Lyxgb.) Bréb ■ Chæioceros borealis Bail C', decipiens Cl Actinocydus JEhrenhergii Ralfs A. siMilis (Greg.) Kalps Roperia tessellata (Rop.) Grun Coseinodisciis exeentricus Ehrb V C. decipiens Grun • C. cut vatidus Grctn C. stellaris Rop C. radiatus Ehbb C', subbullienn Jørg. n. sp C. centralis Ehrb C', concinrms W. Sm C', nitidus Greg Euodia gihha Bail Hi/ahdiscits stelliger Bail If. subfilis Bail Asteromphalus heptactis (Bréb.) Ralfs Tli(dassiolhri.r Inngissima Cl. et Gkun T. Franoifddii Grun. v. mtzschioides (Gedn.) J»i Pleurosigma tenerum Jørg. n. sp 3.6— 3.9 r+ + Actinoptgchus imdulatus (Bail.?) Ralfs Vunipi/Iodiscits Jhuretii Bréb C. angidaris Greg Khabdonema arcuatum (Lyngb.) Kutz. . Pleurosigma naviculaceum Bréb //. Peridiniales. (DinofiageUatce.) Dinnjihysis aaita Ehrb., Jørg D. iwrvegica Clap, et Lachm., Jørg D. ncmninata Clap, et Laoiim., Jørg D. roiundata Clap, et Lachm Pi/yojilinrits horologium Stein Gonyaulax spinifera (Clap, et liACiiM.) Dies Diiplopsalis lenticula Bergh Peridinium depressum Bail P. oceaninan Vanhøk P. divergens Ehrb. (P. lenticulare (Ehkb.) Jørg.) +0 H-0 +c I c +c I'rotistplanktiin. Year 189». Montli Locality Juiiuary •I E' S C I B i ^ OF : = £ y Deptli (metei's) Salinitj' (« , Temperature (Cels.) Peridinium coiiiaim (Gran) Ostenp. et Schm P. palUibiin OsTENF P. S/eiHii JURO vP. ovatiini (Pouch.) Scbutt Ceralium tripos (0. F. Møll.) Nitzsch. (a haltkum Schutt.) C. buceplialum Cl C. maa-oceros Ehrb C. intenncdimn (Jørg.) C. longipes (Bail.) Cl C. furca (Ehrb.) Dim C. lineatwn (Ehrb.) Cl C. fusus (Ehrb.) Dctj ///. Pterospermataceæ. Pteiosperma Miihii (Jørq.) Ostexf. P. Vanhiiffeni (Jørg.) Ostexf P. dictyon (Jørg.) Ostesf IV. Halospbæraceæ. Halnsphæra ririiUs Schmitz. (incl. H. minnr Ostexf.) V. Silicoflagellata. Dislephanus Kpecidum (Ehrb.) Stohr DictyocJui fibula Ehrb VI. Radiolaria. I. i^ituiiiella Hexaconfium enthacanthm Jøkg. H. pachydenmtm Jørg Echinomma trinacriwn Hck E. leptodermum Jørg Brymyomma elegans Jørg Chromyomma boreale (Cl.) Jørg. Rliiznpleyma boreale (Ol.) Jørg.. Phorticium pylonium Hck.?, Cl.. Lithelius minor Jørg L. spiralis Hck +c r + r r + +c c c c c +c +c +c +c +c +c +c + +c +c +c r+ r +c + c -l-c +0 -f- Jorgen Year 1899. Month Deptli (meters) 0—180 Salinity C/oq) ,87 33.87 33.82- 34.08 Temperature (Cels.) 3.G— 3.9 2. Acantharia. Rodiosjjhæm anacanthica Jørg. n. sp. ... 3. Nassellaria. Playiacantha arachnoides Clap, et Lachm. Plcctaeantha oikiskos JØEO. n. sp CampylacantJia cladophora Jøeg. ii. sp. . . FIwrmacantlM kystrix (Jørg.) Jørg Peridmm longispinum Jørg P. muiutum Cl Chidosceuium trkolpmm (Hck. ?) Jøeg. ... lUcil/ophiiiins Clevei Jørg Litliomclissa setosa (Cl.) Jørg L. hystrix Jørq Acanthocorys umhellifera Hck Didyoceras acantldcum JsSrg D. xiphephorum Jøbo Clathrocydas craspedota (Jørg.) Jørg. . . . Sfichocorys seiiata (Jørg.) n. sp 4. Pbæodaria (Tripylea). Canvosphæra c/eometrica Bohg Protocystis tridens (Hck.) Borg P. xiphodon (Hck.) Borg Challengeron diodon Hck. (C. hcteracaiithum Jørg), McdiisMa ardfera Jørg GazellfUa penta podiitm Jørc; VIL Tintinnodea. Tirdimms aaiminatus Clap, et Laciim Ptychoeylis urnula (Clap, et Lachm.) Brandt (a nuijc Jørg.) P. u. v. minor Jørg /'. u. v. suharctica Jørg. n. var Tintinnopsis nitida Beandt T. n. v. ovalis Jørg. n. var Cyttarocylis denticulata (Eheb.) Fol. (a typica Jørij.) C', d. v. cylindrica Jørg C. d. v. giyantea (Brandt) Ci C. d. v. robusta JøE(; C. d. v. elongnta JøE(i Dktyocysta templum Hck D. t. v. disticha JøiKi r+ >•+ r+ Protistplanktc Yoiii- 18HS). Jlontli Dei)tli (meters) Salinity {"j^) Temperature (Gels.) /. Bacillariales. (Diatomaceæ). lihizosoletiia semisjiiiia Hens Biddulphia mobilieims Bail Chætoceros borealis Bail C. atlauticHS Cl C. (kcipieus Cl C. Schilttii Cl Actbwajdus Ehrenhergii Ralfs A. Ralfsii (W. Sm.) Ralps CoscinodiscHS excentiiais Eheb C. radiatus Ehrb C. centralis Ehrb Hi/alodisctts stelliyer Bail H. subtilis Bail ThnlassiothrLf longisshna Cl. et Ghun. . F. Fraucnfeldii Grun T. F. V. nifzschiolden (Gri-n.) Jync PlcHrosiyma teiierum Joeg. n. sp Surirella lata \\. Sm CampiiludisrHS Thwctii Breb C. angtdaris Greg Striatella MUimndnta (Lyngb.) Ac; Gh/pkodesiiiis WUIiaiiisnnii (\V. 8m.) Grun. II. Peridiniales. (DinofliigeUata). Diiwphysis acuta Ehrb., Jdrg D. norvegka Clap, et Lachm. .Jorg. . . . D. rofundata Clap, et Lachm I'l/rophanis horologmm Stein Diplopsalis lenticula Bergh Peridinium depression Bah i', oceanicum Vanhof P. dirrrgeiis Ehrb. (P. lenticidare. (Ehbb.) J()RG.) P. conk-um (Gran) Ostekk. et Schm. ... P. pallidum Ostenf P. Steinii Jørg P. ovatum (Pouch.) Schctt ) Ceratium tripos (O. F. Mull.) Nitzsch. (i halticum Schutt) J2.C0- 33.87 33.92- 34.62 33.26- 33.58 "A I 33.26—133.26—33.25— 34.69 1 33.37 34.59 0—150 0—100 5 s a s! 0-200 0—300 ^2 i Igss 0— 100]0-26O 33.87- 34.40 r+ >■+ r+ !■+ 1-+ +C Year 1899. Month Deptli (meters) 0—100 0— «60 Salinity ("/oo) 32.00- 33.87 32.60- 33.94 33.25- 34.62 33.25- 34.69 33.26- 33.37 33.42- 35.03 33.30- 33.42 33.37— 33.37— 34.40 34.70 Temperature (Cels.) 1.8- 3.4 2.7— I 9.7- 6.2 6.( C. hucephalum Cl C. macroceros EHRri. . . . C. intermedium Jøeg. . . C. longipes (Bail.) Cl... C. furca (Ehhb.) Duj. . . C. lineatmn (Ehrb.) Cl. C fiisus (Ehkb.) Ddj. . . III. Pterosperniataceæ. Pterosperma Miibii (Jørs.) Ostenp. . . P. Vanhoffenii (Jørg.) Ostenf I', dicli/on (Jøro.) Ostenf IV. Halosphæraceæ. Hulospliæra viridis Schjiitz (incl. H. minor Ostenf.) V. Silicotiagellata. Bistephanus speculum (Ehrb.) Støiir . Dictyocha fibula Ehrb VI. Radiolaria. I. SpumcIUiriit. Ecldnomma trinacrium Hck. . . . C', leptodermum Jøeg Drymyomma ele.gans Jøro Chromyomma boreale (Cl.) Jørg. Rhizoplegma boreale (Cl.) Jøbg. . Lifhelius minor Jørg Phortieium pylonium Hck. r, Cl. . Sorolarcus circumte.rfus Jøkg. . . . 2. Nassellaria. Playiacantha arachnoides Clap, et Ijac Campylacantha cladopihora Jørg. n. s Plectacantha oikiskos Jørg. n. sp.... Phnrmacantha hystrix (Jøro.) Jøro. Gonosphæra jmmnrdialis Jøro. n. s|i Ceratospyris hyperborea Jørg. n. sp. +c +c 1-+ +c +c Protistplankton. Ibiii). MouUi Depth (meters) Salinity ("/qo) Temperature (Cels.) I ll 33.a3- 34.62 33.25— 33.26- 34.69 33.37 2.1-1 2.1- 6.7 3 3 33.«- 34.50 February 0—200 0—300 33.42- 35.o; 33.30— 33.42 2.7— 6.2 ) 0— 260 33.37— 34.70 2.7 — 6.6 Peridium longispimtm Jøro Eusceniuin corpiephonim Jørg Cladosceiiium tricolpmm (Hck.?) Jøro.. Behtluihis histrkosn Jøro. n. s]) Duti/oplnmus Clevci .Jørg Lithomelissa sefosa (Ci,.) Jorg L. Iii/strix Jørg Acanthocorys umbellifera Hck Dktyoteras xiphephorum Jøkg CMhrocyclas crnspedota (Jørg.) Jørg. . . Aiidrocyclas gamphonycha (Jørg.) Jørg.. 3. Phæodaria (Tripjrlea). Caiuwspliæra geonietrica Borg Pi-ofocystis xiphodon (Hck.) Borg P. Harstoni (Mcrray) Borg P. tridens (Hck.) Borg Challengeron diodon Hck. (C. heteracan- thum JØRG Gazelktta pentapodium Jøeg VII. Tintinuodea. T'mtlnnus acumivatim Clap, et Lachji. . T. a. V. umdnta Jørg Amphm-ella ampla Joeg Ptychocylis wnula (Clap, et Laciim.J Brandt a major Jørg P. u. V. minor Jørg P. ti. V. subaretica Jørg. 11. var Tintinnopsis nitida Brandt Cyltarocylis denticulata (Ehrb ) Fol. . . . C. d. V. cylindrica Jørg C. d. V. gigantea (Brandt) Cl C. d. V. elongata Jøro C. d. V. snbiotundata Jørg Didyocysta templum Hck. c. disticha Jørg I'ltdelln cuudafa (Osteni'.) Ci >■+ r+ Year 18H9. Month Locality Date Depth (meters) Salinity (O'qo) Temperature (Cels.) I. BacillarialeS' (Diatomaceæ). Bhizfisoknia styliformis Bright w BithMpUa mirita (Lysob.) Beéb B. mobiliensis Bail Chætoceros bor talis Bail C', convoltchm Caste C. (lecipims Cl C. contortus SchCtt Ditylium Brighhvellii (West) Grdn Tlialassiosira grai'ida Cl Coscinosira polycliorda (Gran) CJran Adinocyclus Ehrmibergii Ralfs Coscinodiscus excentricus Ehrb C. decipiens Gkun C. Uneatiis Ehrb. var C', stellaris Eop C', radiatus lOimn C', centralis Ehrd C'. co)iciniius W. Sm C'. snhhiiUietis Jpro. n. sp Ili/alodiscus stdUyvr Bail Tlinlassiothrix longissima Cl. et Grux. . . r. Frauenfeldi Grun r. 2''. V. vitzschioides (Grun.) J øko T. F. V. »i. forma airvata (Castr.) Jprg. Asterionella Bkakdeyi W. Sm j4!«'tc«to compilexa (Greg) De T Plcuroslgma feiicniiii. .lnKfi. n. sp Paralia sulcata (lOiiui;.) Cj. Aclinoptyckus nndulatus (Bah,.?) Halfs.. Surirella lata W. Sm Campylodiscus Thurelii Bréb C', angxilaris Greg lilKihdoncma arcuatmii (Lvxgb.) Kutz.... //. Pcrulininles. Il)m„lhiii,-Unta). Dinophiiais acuta Euiiii., .li)U(i I>. riorvcglca Clap, et liACiiM., Jøkg 1>. rotrmdafa Clap, et Lachm &= H' S ^ = 3 ^te I S' 300- .350 0—20010—630 33.50- 35.03 300- 350 200- 250 34.89- 34.96 0—100 0—100 33.18- 33.25 33.30- 34.01 200— 300 34.70— II33.37- 34.82 ,i 33.4: 500- 550 33.61- 33.56 33.01- 3o.of >■+ ProtiRtplankton. Year 1899. Month Locality Date Depili (metevs) Salinity (» ,„) Temperature (Cels.) Pip-nphacus horologium Stein Di/jlnpsalis Imfkida 13ekgh PeiiiUniitm dejremtm Bail P. oceanintm Vaxhøf P. diverges Khrb. (P. lai'iciihi (KiiKU.) Jonc; P. cnmawi (Gran) Osten f. et Scum P. paliidum Ostexf P. Steinii Jørg P. oratitm (Poich.) Schctt Ceratium tripos (0. F. MCli,.) Xitzsch. (a hnlt- aim ScHi'TT) C. bucejilialmi Ci C. maavceros Ehbb C. iiifermeditim (.)(>rg.) C. hnijipes (Bail.) Cl C. /inert (Khrb.) l)ij C. lineatum (Ehrb.) Cl C. fxisus (EuRB.) Dim ///. Pterosperiiiataceæ. Plerosperim Mlibii (Jøno.) Ostenf P. Vanhoffeni (Jørg.) Ostenf P. dictyon (Joro ) Ostenf IV. Halosphæraceæ. JTnlospliana viridin Schmitz (incl. H. miiw Ostenf.) V. SilicoHa^ielhitn. Distephamts spetnhim ( Khrb.) Stohk Diitijorha fibula Ehrb VI. liadiohiria. 1. Spuinellaria. Hrjaconliiim cnthmanthxim Jørg H. pachydermnm Jøkg Eddnomma triiincrium Hck E. lepiodermttm Jørg Drymijomma eleyans Jørg CItrnmyomma hmnk (Cl.) Jør<; 0— 2U0;0— 6au,|«— I OIJ I 33.60- (33.60— 1 33..10- 35.03 35.14 34.08 +c rh up— I 2.6— 2.6- 6.4 +c v+ >•+ m m lU" 'oxri U— 40 1)— |IJO«— irjoi III +c 34.81 1.5— ti II •o " 2 »/. 550 0-60 0-260 ■..-.,14 33.<.i- 33.M 33.ei- 35.08 U.S I U.a II 4.8 II ^•'' I •' II +c +0 1 '' ••+ + +c >■+ c c ' + +c +c + + + r+ H- +c r+ + c +1= c r + c c c + c + + +c r '•+ + cc cc cc + c + f+ + •• r >■ c c ^ +c +c -H E. Jørgensen. Year 1H99. Month 5S S ■SI'S Depth (meters) 300- 350 Salinity {%,(,) 33.30- 34.08 33.30- 34.21 34,89- 34.96 Temperature (Cels.) 2.5— 2.8 1500— 550 33.18- 33.26 33.25- 33.37 - 33.37 — 33.42 33.61— 35.08 Rliizoplegtna boreale (Cl.) Jøro Lithelkis minor Jørg Phorticium pyloniwn Hck.? Cl Sorolarcus circumtexfus Jørg 2. Nassellaria. Plagiacantha arachnoides Clap, et Lachm Camjnjlacantha cladophora Jørg. n. sp PlecfManffia oikiskos Jørg. n. sp Phormacantlia hystrix (Jørg.) Jørg Gonosphæra primordialis Jørg. n. sp Peridium longispinum Jørg Cladoscenium trimlpium (Hck.)? Jørg Hdotholus histrkosa Jørg. n. sp Dktyophimiis Clevei Jørg Lithomelissa setosa (Cl.) Jørg Dictyoceras onpliephormn Jørg Clathrocyrlas a-aspedofa (Jørg.) Jørg Androcyclas gamphonycha (Jørg.) Jørg A. amUycephalis (Jørg.) Jørg Stichocorys scriaia (Jørg.) Jørg 3. Phæodaria (Tripylea). Protoeysiis onphodon (Hck.) Borg P. Harstoni (Murray) Borg P. tridens (Hck.) Boro Challcngeron diodon Hck. (C. Jietcracmithum Jørg.) Medusetta arcifcra J org : VII. Tintinnodea. Tintinnus acuminatus Clap, et Jjachm Lcprotintinnus pellueulns (Cl.) Jørg Plychocylis xirnula (Clap, et Ijaciim.) Brandt a major Jørg P. u. V. minor Jørg P. u. V. digitalis Auriv P. u. V. siibarctica Jørg. n. var Tintinnopsis nitida Brandt Cyttarocylis denticulata (Ehrb.) Fol C. d. V. elongata Jørg C. d. V. subrotundata Jorg C d. V. siibedenfata Jørg. n. var TJndella caudata (Ostenp.) ('i +c +c >■+ +c +c I .. r+ r+ Protistplankton. Yenv 18S9. Month February - i ■* tm -'■hj Depth (meters) 0-80 8alinity C', 33.00- 33.74 0-275 0—100 33.56- 34.42 "/« 34.94- 35.0S 0-200 0—300 33.48- 34.10 ^% 33.48- 34.89 133.52 , I 34.02 I 34.06- 34.21 33.80— 34.97 33.10- 33.48 Temperature (Gels.) 2.8- 6.6 /. Bacillariales. ( D'tat.muceo?). B'uhhdphia aurita (Lyxgb.) Bréb B. nwbiliaisis Bail Chætoceros borealis Bail C. atlantiais Cl C. (lecij'iens Cl C. debilis Cl Thalassiosira grarida ('l Coscinosira pnhjchorda (Gran) Gran Actinocyclus Ehrenhcrgi Ealfs Roperia tessdlata (Rop.) Grix Coschwdisais e.rcnitricus Ehrb C. lineatuii Ehrh. v.-u- C. stellniis Eoi' C. radkdus Ehrb C. subbldticns Jprg. n. sp C. centralis Ehrb C', coiieiiinns W. Sm Hi/alodiscus stelliger Bail Tlialassiothrix longissima Cl. et Gritn T. Fratienfelnii Grun. v. vitzschioides (Grcn.) J0RG Plciirosigma kneritm Jorg. n. sp Acfiiwpfgchus undxdntus (Bail.?) Ealfs Ski irella lata W. Sm Campglodiscus Ihuretii Bréb C. angidaris Greg Grammatophora oceanicn Ehrb Rhabdonema arcKatum (Lyngb.) Kctz Auliscus sculptus (W. Sm.) Ralfs //. Peridiniales. (Dinofiagdlat(i). Dinophysis acuta Ehrb., Jørg D. norvegica Clap, et Lachm., Jørg D. rotundata Clap, et Lachm D. r. V. lævis (Clap, et Lachm.) Jørg Diplopsalis lenticida Bergh Peridinium depresswn Bail F. oceanicwn Va.nhof P. dire>-gens Ehrb. (P. kntindare (Ehrb.) Jørg.) r+ !•+ Year 18a9. Month F,d.ruary March Locality ^ ". X - ., p = i £ "H IIP ill IP |ll iii'ifji' ij Date -.. II ^^k '"/2 '"/s 1 ^Vo "A. 18/j, 18/^ '«/2 -/. i, -/. ^'3 1 ^/3 ,; ^,3 ^/3 1 "Vs Depth (meters) 0-80 i 0-30 11 1 0-275 „ 250-1550- "^^""l 3.50 1 620 0-50 0-200 0-3OO 0-85 p-250 'l 0-50 0-20010-100 0-50 0—150 Salinity ("/oo) 33,56 -J33.5.,— .33 74 1 33.42 . -53.23- .34,19 j 34.94- 35.08 35.08 1 33,48 — 34.10 33.48— 34,89 33.5.-I 34.02 33.52— 35.03 34.06- 34.21 33.80— 34.97 j 33.16-33.54— 33.48 j! 33.61 33.64— 34.70 Temperatm-e (Cels.) H7,-- 6.4 ' (15 2.7— 6.1 6.4 1 2.0- [ 2.6— 4.2 [^ 6.6 3,9-! 4.3 1 2.8- 6.6 1 2.0— ,1 2.1- 2.7 il 2.5 2.1— 6.7 Peridmium conicum (Gran) Ostenf. et Schm. . .. r + ,. +c + ,, ■■ ,. .. r + IT +1- r r ,. J. ^ + J. 1-+ J. i-f ,. Ceraiium tripos (O.P. Mull.) Nitzsch. (a halticum SCHTJTT.) +c c c . + r + c CO c c c c c C. bucephalum (Cl.) Cl c c c c + 1- + c c c c c c c C. maa-oceros (Ehrb.) Cl +c + r +c + + + + c c c + c + +1- c r +c -|- 4- c + c c c c c C. Imigipes (Bail,) Cl +c c v+ r + c c J. + + +c -j-c + + + + +0 ^ +0 +c C'. Unentum (Ehre,) Cl 1- J, + ^ +c c p J. ^ III. Pterospermataceæ. Pterospenyia MiMi (.Jørg.) Ostenf v+ r r r r r r 1^+ r+ r 1- P. Vanhnffeni (Jørg.) Ostenf >•+ '■+ r r r r r+ + r+ !•+ + 1'+ + + r+ r r r+ 1+ + c C c IV. Halosphæraceæ. Hahisphæra ririili'i Schmit/. (incl. If. iiiinnr + + + +c + V. Silicoffagellata. VI. RadioJaria. X. Spiimellaria. Ilcracontium enthmnnthum JøiiO r Kchinomma trinacrmm Hck .. rr V E. leptodermum Jørg v r r r r r Litheliits minor Jørg '■ r V Phortieium pylonium Hck.v, Cl r I- 1 .. r Protistplankton. Year 1899. Month Depth (meters) Salinity («/oo) Temperature (Cels.) 0—80 33.66- 33.42 s .?! i g 34.04- 35.08 33.48- 34.16 33.48- 34.8» 33.62- 34.02 i; .- J > -, J I 34.06- 34.21 0-200 0-100 33.80— 34.07 2.8— 6.6 33.16- 33.48 2i- 6.7 2. Acantharia, liadiospha-ra anacanthica Jwhg. n. sp 3. Nassellaria. riayiacantha avachnohks Clap, et Lachm Campylacantha claAophora Jørc n. sp Plcdacantha oikiskos Jwrg. u. sp Plwrmacnntha hyslrix (Jøro.) Jorc. GonosplKera priniordialis Jørg. u. sp Fn-idium longispi7ium Jørg Cladoscenium trkolpium (Hck. ?) Jørg Helofholus histricnsa Jørg. n. sp Didijophhnus Clevei Jørg J), histricosus Jørg. n. sp Lilliomelissa setosa (Cl.) Jøeg Dicfi/oceras acanthicum Jørg Clallirori/rlas cnnijicdoia (Jørg.) Jørg Andniei/rliis ijniiiplioin/cha (Jørg.) Jørg A. amhhjaphdis (.Ji)RG.) Jørg Sfkhocnrt/s serinfa (Jørg.) .Jorg 4. PhsL'odaria (Tripylea). Cnniwsplwm hpta Jorg Protncijstis xiihndnn (Hck.) Borg r. Harstoni (Mlrray) Borg P. tridexs (Hck.) Borg ChaUoiqeron diodonHcK.(C hetcyacaiitlinm Jøiii; ) VII. Tintinnodea. 7i:itinmis aaimbiahis Clap, et Lachm Ptijchocijlis urnula (Clap, et Lachm.) Brandt V. minor Jørg.) Tiiitimiopsis nitihi Brandt Codonella lagenxda (Clap, et Lachm.) Entz. v. (ivata Jørg Cijttarocylis deniiadnta (Ehrb.) Fol C d. a fi/pirn JpRG ('. d. V. ryUiidrica Jøhg C. d. V. elovgata Jørg C. d. V. sicbrofundata Jorg LHctyncysta femplum Hck. v. disfichn Johg. . . T^ndeUn candafn (Ostenf ) Cl Year 1899 Month PI ■ s-^ ^'/3 Depth (meters) 0—200 0—140 300— 200 0—170 0—100 Sahnity C/oq) 33.54- 34.53 33.21- 33.59 Temperature (Cels.) I. Bacillariales. (Diatomaeeæj. Chætocerus borcalls Bail C. denms (Cl.) Cl C. atlant uiis Cl C. decijiiens Cl C. contortus Schutt Dityliim Brighticellii (West.) Grun Act'mocyclus Ehrenbergii Ealfs Coscinodiscus excentricus Ehrb C curvatulus Ubun C', stellaris Rop C. radiatus Ehrb C. sitbhidliens Jørg C. cent) alts Ehrb Euodia gihha Bail Hyalodiscus stelliyer Bail Tlmlassiothrix Fiauevfeldii Grun. v. mtzschiokles (Grun.) Jørg Fleurnsiyma tnrcrum .Jorg. n. sp Faralin sulcata (Ehrb.) Cl Actinoptychus uiidtdatns (Bail. ?) Ealfs . Campylodiscus Tliuretu Buéb C. avgularis Gheo Rhabdonema minutum KiJTZ Striatella umpunctata (Lyngb.) Ag Anlisnis sndptus (W. 8m.) Ralfs II. Peridiniales. (D'moficujdlata). THnophysis acuta Khrb., Joro r>. iiiiyn'iiira (;lap. et Lachm., Jøkq II. roUitidala Clap, et Laohm I'y) ophacus horologiiim Stei.n Gonyaulax spinifera (Clap, et Lachm.) Dies JJiploi salis le.nticula Bbrgh Peridinium depressum Bail i', oceanicum Vanhof FeridhiiuiH divergens Ehrb. (P. lentkulare (Ehrb.) Jørg.) P. conicum (Gran) Ostenf. et Schm + 33.21- 33.35 32.95- 33.33 33.41- 33.84 + ••+ 67 Year 1899. Montli Date Depth (meters) Salinity Coo' Temperature (Cels.) P. pallidum Ostekp P. Steiyiii Jørg P. ovatum (Pouch.) Schott Ceratium tripos {O.F.JivLh.)'Snzscn. (a halticum Schutt.) C. bucephalnm Cl C', niacroceros Ehrb C. intermedium (Jørg.) C. longipes (Bail.) Cl C. arcticum (Ehrb.) Cl C. furca (Ehrb.) Dr.! C. liueatum (Eurb.) Ci t', fusus (Ehrb.) D[;j III. Pterospermataceæ. Ptcrosperma Miibii (Jørg.) Ostenf i'. Vanhii/fcni (Jørg.) Ostenf P. dictyon (Jørg.) Ostenf IV. Halosphæraceæ. Hnln.tjihæva vhidis Schmitz (iiicl. H. minor Ostenf.) . V. SilicoSagellata. Distephamis spcndum (Eurb.) Støhr Dictyocliti fibula Ehrb VI. Radiolaria. I. Spumellaria. Hexacontium entliacaiithum Jørg H. pachydermum Jørg Echinomma leptodermum Jørg Chromyomma boreale (Cl ) Jørg Rhizoplegma boreale (Cl.) Joro Stylodictya validispina Jørg. n. sp S. aculeafa Jørg. u. sp S. tenuispina Jørg. n. sp Spoiigodiscus famis Ehrb .*. . Lithelius minor Jørg Phorticium pylonium HcK. * Cl ^'/a 0—200 0—140 33.54- 34.53 33.21- 33.59 32.54- 33.10 0-50 33.41- 600— 500 0—280 0—170 C 2.1— 6.2 1.7— 6.66 3.2- 6.8 >■+ r+ +c +<: r+ +c +c r+ Jørgensen. Year 1899. Month Depth (meter.s) Salinity ("/qo) Temperature (Cels.) 0—200 0—140 33.21- 33.59 33.21- 33.35 32.54- 32.95- 33.10 33.33 33.41- 33.84 ^Va i '-Is '% 300— 200 35.00 - i34.io- 35.oe 35.00 35.00- 35.00 1.7— 6.65 3.2— 6.8 2. Nassellaria. Plagiacantha arachnoides Clap, et Lachm. CampylacantM dadopliora Jørg. n. .sp. . . Flectacantha oikiskos Jørg. n. sp Phonnacantha hystnx (Jørg.) Jørg llictyocii-cus dathrahis Jørg. n sp Feridium longispinum Jørg Euscenmm corynepkorum Jørg Cladoscenium tricolpium (IIck.?) Jørg. . . . Helotholiis histricosa Jørg. n. sp Dicfyophinms Clevei Jørg Lithomelissa setosn (Cl.) Jørg L. hystrix Jøeg Dktyoceras xipliepliomm Jørg Claflirocyclas craspcdota (Jørg.) Jørg. . . . Androcyrlas (ihkh Rhabdonenia minnium Kit/ Ætzschia spathulata Bum K. bilohata W. Sm. . . . X. Closterium W. Sm. Glyphodesmis Williamtojiu (\\ S- Cocconeis scutellum Ehrh C. costnia Greq Pleurosigma Xormanni JUips P. fasciola W. Sm. ... Schizonenia Gn villei Ai, Pinmdaria quadratarea \ '^c IIM II. Pcrulinialef. ( Dniofliiijdiatn) Dinophysis acuta Ehri! , Iprc, Diplopsalis lenticula BuK.ir Peridinium depressum li\ii P. oceaincum Vanhof. P. divergens Ehrb. (P lenhculmi (I iirh ) Ji)R( ) P. pallidum Ostenf. . P. Steinii JøRO P. omtwn (Pouch.) S( hltf Ceratium tripos (0. F, Mi 1 1 ) Nn/<-(n (a halticum *>tni tt) C', bucephalum (Cl.) Ci C. macroceros (Ehrb.) ( l C. intermedium (Jørg,) C. longipes (Bail.) Cl C. furca (Ehrh.) Duj. C. fusus (J]hrb.) Duj r+ +c +0 r+ +c Protistplankton. Yeai' IS»!). JlontI» it a n ''■tit Deptli (meters) 0—7000—100 34.<2- 34.00 33.68— .33.06— 35.11 I 34.51 38.72— 34.92 Temperature (Cels.) 1.55— 5.76 ///. Ptcrospermntiiceæ. Pttrosperma Mobii (Jøro.) Oste.sp P. Vanhiiffem (Jøro.) Ostesf P. dklipn (.lORO.) OsTEXi- IV. Halosphæraceæ. Halosphæra vhidis Sch.mitz (incl. H. mitinr Ostenf.) V. Flagellata. Plueocystis Pimrhefi (Hah.) Lagerh VI. Silicotiagellata. Dixtephaimn speculum (Eurb.) Støhr Gymnaster pentashrias (Khrb.) Schi'tt VII. Radiolaria. 1. Spumellaria. Hi'-racnntium entlincanthum Jørg H. pnchydermum Jørg Echinomma trinacrium Hck E. leptodermum Jørg Drymynmnm elegavs JORO Chromyomma boreale (Cl.) .Jørg Eliizoplegma boreale (Cl.) Jørg Litlielius minor Jørg Phorticium pylomum Hck. ?, Ci, Snrolarciis circwntextus Jørg 2. Nassfllaria. Plagktrnniha arachnoides Clap, et Lachm Campylacanfha cladoplwra Jørg. n. sp Pledacantha oikiskns Jørg. n. sp Phormacantha hystrix (Jørg ) Jørg Gonosphæra primnrdialis Jørg. n. .sp Perulium longispinum Jørg Ensceninm corynephnrum Jørg Cladoscenium tricolpium (Hck.?) Jørg r+ +c E. Jørgensen. Year 1899. Month Locality Date Depth (meters) Salinity ("'(„) Temperature (Cels.) Helotholvs histricosa Jørg. n. sp Lifharachnmm tentorium Hck Didyopliimiis Clevci Jørg Lithomelissa setosa (Cl.) Jørg L. hystrix Jørg Didyoceras acanthicum Jø rg D. xipliepliorum Jørg Ciuthrocyclas craspedota (Jørg.) Jørg Androcydas gamphonydia (Jørg.) Jørg A. amblycephaUs (Jørg.) Jørg Stidiocorys senata (Jøro.) Jøbg J. Phæodaria (Tripylea). Cunnosphæra lepta Jørg Protocysds xiphodon (Hck.) Borg I'. Harstoni (Murray) Borg P. tridens (Hck.) Borg Challengero^i diodon Hck. (C- hetcracantlmm Jørg.) VIII. Tintinnodea. Ptydtocylis wnula (Cl.\p. et Lachm.) Brandt .... Cyttarocylis denticulata (Ehrb ) Fol C. d. v. elongata Jørg C. d. v. subrotundata Jørg '''. d. v. subedentata Jørg Undella caudata Ostenf ^V3 0—100 0—400 300- 200 33.63 33.68- 34.54 33.68- 3.5.11 33.65— |3.B.65 34.54 35.1 33.72- 34.92 0.75- 6.3 1.56— 1.55- 5.76 6.3 Pnifistplanktdi). Yerti- IHMH. Month Deptli (iiieteis) SHlinity C/oo) Temperal ure (Gels.) /. BiiciUariales (Dintomaccæ). Bacteiosdra fmgilis (Gran) (Iran Corethron hystri.r Hens lihiznsnleiiia nlata Brigiitw R. ShrubsoU Cl 7i*. setigera Brightw Bidditlphin nurita (Lyngh.) Bréb Chn'toceros liorealis Bail C. (lensus (Cl.) Cl ('. cottrnhitun Castr C. atlanticiis ('l C. decipiena Cr ('. teres Cl ('. conlorhis Schutt r. similin Cl (\ lacimosim SchCtt a WiUei Gran ('. lUndemn (Eiirr.) Gran ('. debilin Cl C. socitdis Laid C'. furceUutMs Bail Difi/lium Bnyhlwellii (West) Grcn Srcletnnema cosfafum (Grev.) Cl Thtda.ssiosira Xm detiskjiildii Cl r. qreiridn Cl T. lii/alina (Ghln ) Gran T. ijclntinom Hens Coscinosira polydwrda (Gran) Gran Pmosira glacmlis (Grun.) Actinocychis Khrenhergii Ralps CoscinodiscHs ejccenfyicus Ehub C. cuirrifulus Grin C. radiatiis Khrb C. suhbullims Jørb. n. sp C. centralis Ehrb r', conciiimm W. Sm C. bioeiUntus Grcn Hi/alodixcus sfiiliger Kail Xifzuchifi iv) iafn Cl N. di'UinfisniiiKt Cl J\' loiigissim^i (Bréb ) Ralks 34.17- 34.86 2å$ 0-250 0—100 '% 1.6-^ 2.15 33.08- U.67 +c +f +c (34.67) (4.1) +<: må 5l|3 +c 34.21- 34.29 0.86- 1.0 34.86- 34.86 0.80— 1.4 E. Joriieiisen. Locality Date Depth (meters) Salinity (O/æ) Temperature (Gels.) Thalassiothrix Fraiienfeldii Grdn T. F. V. vitzschioides (Gron.) Jørg. f. currata (Gastr.) Jørg. Fragilaria oceanica Ql F. cylindrits Grdn Achnanthes tosniala Grun Navicida septentrioi alts (Oestr.) Cl N. Vanhbffmi Gean N. pelayica Cl N. kariana Grun N. direda W. Sm Actinojitijchus undulafus (Bail.?) Ealps Mtzschia Closterium W. Sm Ch-ammatopliora oceanica Ehrb Rhahdnnema arcuatmn (Lvnob.) Kutz Pleurosiqma fasciola W. Sm //. Peridiniales. (Dinofiagellata). Dinnphi/sis acuta Eiirb., Jørg Gonijdidii.r siiiiiifrni (Clai'. et Lachm.) Dies Peridhiiiiiii fl,'j,i . ,-Mo» Bail P. divciqiiifi Euiiii. (P. leniiailare (Eurb.) Jørg.) P. pallidum OsTENF P. (jlohulns Stein P. omtnm (Pouch.) Schutt P. Steinii JØRG Ceratium tripos (0. F. Mull.) Nitzsch. (a halticum Schott) . C. bucejihal'um (Cl.) Cl C. maa-oceros Ehrb. (Cl.) C', longipes (Bail.) Cl C', fm ca (Ehrb.) Duj C'. fusuK (Eurb.) Du.i ///. Pterospermataceæ. Plernnperma Miibii (Jøro.) Ostenf P. Vanhrijfeni (Jørq.) Ostenf P. dicti/on (Jørg.) Ostenf IV. Halosphæraceæ. Halonphæra viridis Schmitz (incl. H. minor Ostenf.) ^s-a^: "/4 ."/4 '^U 0—3 0—250 0—100 "/4 2% 200— 300 34.17 - 34 se 33.96— 34.67 34.21- 34.29 34.36- 34.36 34.60— 34.49 1.05— 1.2 1.96— 2.2 +c v+ +c r+ !•+ r+ Year 1899. Mon I li Depth (meters) Salinity (0/^) Temperature (Cels.) April »/4 0—250 0—100 34.17- 34.86 33.90- 34.67 "/« 34.60- 34.97 (34.67) (4.1) 34 21- 34.29 34.29- 34.85 34 86— 34.60— 34.36 34.*9 1.05— 1.95— 1.2 2.2 V. Flagellatii. riiæoci/stis Pottchiti (Har.) Lagekh VI. SilicoBagellHta. Disfephamis speaihtiu (Khrb.) Stphr Dktyocha fibula Eubb VII. Radiolaria. 1. Spumellaria. Echinomma leptodcnimni .Torg 2. Aassellaria. Campijlacantha clnilophora Jokg. n. sp Fhormacantha hystrix (Jøhg.) Jøro Peridium kmgispinum Jøkg Lifhnmelissa setom (Cl.) Jørg VIII. Tintinnodea. TiiifituiHs anoHinatus C'L.iP. et Lachm TinlinnnpsiK nUiilii Braxdt Ci/ttiniii-i/lis ili'iiliii Ifita (Ehrb.) Fol. v. xHlicdcvfata .Ior Year 1899. Mouth May I >^ s Depth (meters) 200— 100 0—200 0—100 Salinity ("/oo) Temperature (Cels.) 34.86- 35.18 34.86- 3.5. 34.60— 34.67 34.48- 34.60 34.72- 34.66 34.17- 34.3( 34.17— 34.47 134.17- 34.84 33.73— 34.84 3.2— 3.46 1 .OS- LO 0.20- 0.95 6.15 /. Bacillariales. (Diutomacece). Baderosira fragilis (Gean) Gran Rhizosolenin alata Beightw R. obtusa Hens B. semispina Hens Bidihilphia aurita (Lyngb.) Bréb Eucnmpia groenlandica Cl Chætoieros boreaUs Bail C. crinphUuti Castr C. convohitus Castr C. atlanticus Cl C. decipiens Cl C', teres Cl C cnnfortus SchStt C', mriatridus Gran C. Indninsus Schutt C. diadema (Eheb.) Gran C. scolopendra Cl C. debilis Cl C. sociahs IjAud C. furcellatiis Bail niii/!hiii, r,rhihf>rdr,i (west.) grun S; ladiiitus Eiirb C. centralis Ehrb C cnndnnus W. Sm C. bioadatus Geun Nitzsdda seriata Cl N. delicatissima Cl N. friyida Grun jV. lonyissima (Bréb.) Ralfs Thalassiothrix longissima Cl. et Grun T. FraxieftfeMii Geun Fragilaria oceanica Ct F. cylindrus Grdn r+ +c v+ +c +c +c -fc cc + +c r+ Piotistplankton. Date Depth (meters) Salinity («/qo) Temperature (Cels.) Achna)ifhes Iwniata GRfx Pleurasigma tninitm Jøro. n. sp Naricula septenfrioiinlis Oestr N. Vanhbfftni Grax K. pelagka Cl X kartana Gkux ActiiiopUjchus nndulatus (Bail. ?) Ralfs Pletirosigma fasciola W. Sm. (incl. P. tetmirostris Grun.) Bhoicomgnia artticu))! Cl II. Peridiniales. (DinoflageUata). Diiiojiligsis acuta I^urb., JOrg D. ttorcegica Clap, et Lachm., Jorg D. rotundata Clap, et Lachm Pa^idhnum depressum Bail P. diingens Ehrb. {P. ienticulare (Ehkb.) Jdrg.) P. pallidum OsTENF P. ovatum (Pouch.) Schctt P. Steinii Jørg Ceratiutn Inicephahim (Cl.) Cl C. tripos (0. F. MiJLL.) Nitzsch. (a hnltuum Schdtt.) .. C. macroceros (Ehrb.) Cl C. lonyipes (Bail.) Cl C. furca (Ehrb.) Duj C. fusus (Ehrb.) Dij ///. Pterosperinataceæ. Pterospenita Vanhii/fhii (Jørg.) Ostexk P. dictyon (Jørg.) Ostenf IV. Halosphæraceæ. Salosphæra viridis Schmitz (incl. H. itibinr Ostenf.) . . . . V. Flagellata. Phæocystis Foucheti (Har.) Lagerh April 200— 100 0—200 10— 100 0—260 34.60- 34.67 34.48- 34.60 34.72— 34.gs 34.17- 34.30 34.17— 134.17- 34.47 34.84 1.06 — 1.0 0.20- 0.96 2.0- 2.26 1.7- 2.3 1-+ E. Jorgenspn. Year 1899. Month April May Locality 1 ti 1 1 1" 1 ll II 1" > 1 K ? Date "-% ^A ^V4 2% ^V4 ^«/4 -A ■2~/^ Vs % ^/s 'U % Depth (meters) 0—8 0—6 0—100 0-300 0-3 0—10 0—75 200- 100 0-200 0-100 0-250 0—300 0—150 Salinity {'>'^) 34.86- 35.18 34.86- 35 24 34.64 34.60- 34.67 34.48— 34.60 34.72- 34.65 34..- 34.30 34.17- 34.47 3417- 34.84 33.73- 34.84 Temperature (Cels.) 3.2- 3.8 3.2— 3.46 1.7 1.06— 1.0 0.20- 0.95 2.0— 2.25 1.7— 2.3 1.1- 2.85 1.35- 3.6 2.65- 6.15 VI. Silicofiagellata. r r '• .. r r !•+ ^- • VII. Tintinnodea. Ptychoci/lis urnula (Clap, et Lachm.) Brandt v. minor Jøer P. u. V. digitalis ådriv r v + C. dentiadata (Ehrb.) F.il rrotistplankton. April C 03 V QQ t 2 ll 5S "Va DepDi (meters) 0— 400 k»— 200 0—110 0-600 0—130 0—130 0—150 lini'.v Coo) 3-t.02- 34.14 34.oa- 34.65 34.14- 34 21 34.11- 34.21 34.11- 35.18 34.09- 34.52 34.16- 34.83 Temperature (Cels.) 2.75- 2.85 2.66- 6.3 /. Bacillariales (Dhdomaceæ). Bacternsiru frai/ilis ((Jran) Gran Corefhron hystrir Hens Bhizosoleiiia nlata Brigdtw B. Shnibsnlii Cl Biddulphia auiita (Ltngb.) Bkéb Chætoceros borealis Bail C. densiis Ol C. densus v. rudis Cl C. daniais Cl C. convolutus Castr C. atlanticus Cl C. decipieiis Cl C. contortus Schutt a similis Cl C. laciiiiosits Schutt C. TT i«ei Gran C. diadema (Ehrb.) Gran C. currisetiis Cl C. debilis Cl C. socialis Laid C', furcellatus Bail Bitylium Brightwellii (West) Grun. . . . Sceletonema cosfatum (Gre\'.) Cl Tlialassinsiin Xordeiiskjoldii Cl T. gi avida Cl T. hi/alina (Grun.) Gran T. gelatinosa Hens Coscinnsira polychorda (Gran) Gran . . . Porosira glacialis (Grun.) Actinocychts Elircubergi Ealps Coscinodiscus excentricus Ehrb C. stellaris Rop C. radiatus Ehrb C. subbullims Jørg. n. sp C. centralis Ehbb C. condnnus W. Ssi C. biocidatus Grun Euodia gibba Bail Hyalodiscus stelliger Bail Hitzschia senata Cl N. delicatissima Ci ■•+ >•+ +c +0 +c +c r+ +c +c E. Jørgensen. Year 1900. Month Depth (meters) 0-200 0—110 SaUnity (C/oo) 34.02- 34.14 34.U- 34.21 34.14- 34.91 34.11- 34.21 34.11- 3.5.18 34.09- 34.21 33 92- 33.95 34.09- 34 62 34.16— 34.83 Temperature (Cels.) S.85- 5.4 3.05- 6.6 2.96- 4.2 Nitzsclda recta Hantzsch N. hi/hridn Grun N. frigirhi Grun N. hngissima (Bréb.) Ralps Tlialassiothrix nitzschioides Geun Fragilaria oceanica Cl F. ci/lindrus Geun Achnnnthea tæniata Grun Pleurosigma Shucbcrgi Cl P. fasciola W. Sm. (inch P. tenuirostris Grun.) Naviada Vnvlioffmi Gran N. directa W. Sm X. kariana Grun Amph'iprora (Tropidtmeis) pnrallda Jørg. n. s]) Actinoptychus undulatus (Bail?) Ralfs Aulisc'is sculptus (W. Sm.) Ralfs Campi/lodisais Tliuretii Beee C. imgidaris Greg SwircUa lata W. Sm Glyphiidenmh Williamsoni (W. Sm.) Grun Rhabdonana arcuatum (Lyngb.) KiJTz Cocconeis scuteUum Ehrr Rlioieosigma arcticum ('l //. Peridiniales. (Dinoflagellata). DmiiphjiHh acuta Ehrb., Jørg D. nnrvtyica Clap, et Lachm,, Jørg D. rolwidaia Clap, et Lachm Podolaiiijian palmipi-s Stein Pnitnirrafium retictdaium (Clap, et Lachm.) Butsciii Gmiyaulax spinifera (Clap, et Lachm.) Dies Diplopsalis knticula Bergu Peridm'mm depressum Bail P. divcrgi-im Ehrb. (P. lenticulare (Ehrh.) Jørg.) . . . P. ccmicum ((Iran) Ostenp. et Schm P. pallidum OsTENF P. Steinii Jørg P. ovatum (Pouch.) Schutt Ceratiuin tripos (0. F. Mull.) Nit/.sch. (a haltkum Schutt) G. bucephalum (Cl ) Cl C. b. V. heterocampta Jørg r+ +>= ■•+ + += Protisljjlankton. Year ISJOO. Month April Locality Date Depth (meters) Salinity ("/qo) Temperature (Cels.) Ceratmm macrocei-os (Ehrb.) Cl C. ititermedium (Jørg ) C. hngipes (Bail.) Cl C. furca (Ehrb.) Duj C. Uneatum (Ehrb.) Cl C. fitsuH (Ebrb.) Ddj ///. Pterosperinataceæ Pterosperma Miibii (Jørg.) Ostenf P. Vanhoffetii (Jørg.) Ostenf P. dkii/on (Jørg.) Osteni- IV. Halospbæraceæ. Halospliaera nridis Schmitz (incl. H. minor Ostenf.). V. Flagellata. Phaocystis Poitrheti (Har.) Laoerh VI. Silicoflagellata. Distephanus speeuhmi (Ehrb.) Stohr .... Dictyocha fibula Ehrb VII. Radiolaria. I. Sputnellaria. Hexacontiwn enfhatanfhum Jorg H. pachydermum Jørg Eckinomma leptodermimi Jørg Chromyomma boreale (Cl.) Jørg Rhizoplegma boreale (Cl.) Jørg Lithelius minor Jøro Phorticium pylonium Hck. ?, Cl 2. Acantharia. Radiosphæra anacanthica Jørg. n. sp I ft o S s iir^ ii^i I ii I; I n 2 » Si I « 'C CO Is I'S 0—400 0—200 0—200 0— 110 0—600 34.02— 34.14 34.02— 34.65 34.14- 34.21 34.14- 34.91 34.11- 34.21 34.09- 34.21 34.09— 35.10 34.09- 34.82 34.16- 34.83 2.86- 6.0 +c +c +c +c .. I +c +c +c +c +c Year 1900. Month Locality Depth (meters) 0—400 0—200 0-200 0-110 —130 0—160 Salinity ("/oo) 34.14- 34.21 34.14- 35.15 34.14- 34.91 34.11- 34.21 34.09- 34.21 34.09- 35.10 34.09- 34.62 34.1 33.73- 33.99 Temperature (Cels.) 2.76— 2.85 3.06— 2.9 3.05— 6.6 2.35- 4.4 2.55— 6.3 5. Nassellaria. rachnoides Clap, et Lachm Campylacanth dadophm-a Jøkg. n. sp J'kctacantha oikiskos Jøeg. n. sp Phormacavtha hystrix (Jørg.) Jøeg Gonosphæra primordialis Jørg. n. sp Peridium longispmum Jøko Cladoscenium tricolpium (Hck.?) Jørg Lithomelissa setosa (Cl.) Jøeg Dictyoceras acanthieum Jøkg Clatkroeyclas crnspedota (Jørg.) Jørg Androcydan gamphonyeha (Jørg.) Jøeg A. amblycephalis (Jøeg.) Jøeg SHchncorys seriata (Jøeg.) Jørg 4. Phæodaria (Tripylea). Cannosphæra lepta Jørg Pi-otocysiis ociphodnn (Hck.) Borg P. Harstoni (Murray) Boeg P. tridens (Hck.) Boro ChallengeroH diodon Hck. (C. heter acanthum Jøeg.) Medusetta arnferci Jøeg VIII. Tintinnodea. Tiiitinnus acuminahis (Jlai». et Lachm Ptychocylis urnula (Clap, et Lachm.) Brandt v. minor Jørg Tintinnnpsis nitida Brandt T. campanula (Ehhb.) Dad Codovella la,genula (Clap, et Lachm.) Entz. v. ovata Jørg. C. ventricosa (Clap, et Lachm.) Fol Cyttarocylis denticulata (Ehrb.) Fol C', d. a typica Jøeo C', d. V. elongata Jørg C. d. V. subedentata Jøeo. n. \ar C. serrata (Mob.) Brandt Dictyocysta templum Hck. v. disticha Jørg. Undella caudnta (Osteni\) Cl +c +c +c += Protistplankton. VeHf 1»UU. MouUi IS I? Depth (meters) 0—330 0—530 0—100 500— 400 33.73- 33.85 34.11— 35.13 ,54.11- 34. St 34.94 34.1 Temperature (Cels.) 3.2— 3.16 3.8- 4.16 /. Bacillariales. (Diatomacece). Bacterosira fraqilis (Gran) Gran RMzosolenia alata Brightw Biddidphia awita (Ltngb.) Bréb B. niobilienm Bail " CJuetoceros borealis Bail ' C. densus Cl. v. rudis Cl C. danicris Cl V C. convolutus Castr ^ C. aflariHcus Cl ' C. decipiens Cl " C. teres Cl ■ C. contortus SchCtt • C. ladtiiosus Schutt C. h-evis ScHCTT C. Willci Gran ■ C. diadema (Ehrb.) Gran C. debilis Cl I C. socialis Lacd P. furcdlatus Bail Ditylium Brightwellii (West) Gkun. . . . Sceletonema eostatum (Grev.) Cl Thalassiosira Nordenskjoldii Cl T. gi avida Cl T. hyalina (Grun.) Gran T. gelatinosa Hens Coscinnsira polychorda (Gran) Gran . . . Porosira glaciolis (Grun.) Adinocyclus Eliretibergi Ralfs A. suboceUahis (Grun.) Rattr Coscinodiscun excentriciis Ehrb C. lineatus Ehrb C', curvatidus Grun C. stellaris Rop C. radiatus Ehrb C. subbtdliens Jørg. n. sp V C. centralis Ehrb C. concinnus W. Sm C. bioeidatus Gri-n Hyahdiscus stelliger Bail \Nitzschia seriata Cl >•+ r+ r+ +c r+ +c r+ +c +c r + r +c ^+ + f+ r r+ +c r+ Year 1900. Month Localitv Date Depth (meters) SaUnity ("/oo) Temperature» (Cels.) Xitzschia delicatissima Cl K frigida Grun K. hi/hrida Grux JV' recta Haktzsch X longissima (Breb.) Ralfs ■ Thnlassiothrix nitzschioides Grctn T. n. Grun. f. curvata (Castr.) Jørg >Fragilaria oceanica Cl F. ri/lind) us Grpn F. islandica (Jrun Aclinanthes keniata Grltn Plcwosigma Stuxbergi ('l P. fasciola W. Sm. (in.'l. P. trindrosh-is Grun.) Naviada Vaidioffi ni Gran A', pehigka Ph iV. directa W. Sm .V. lairiana Grcn AmpMprora (Tropulmins) parallela Jørg. n. sp Actinoptychns utululatun (KAir-O Ralfs Campylodiscus Thwetii Breb Surirelln lata W. Sm lihabdonema arcuatum (Lynob.) Kutz Bacillaria socinlis Grbg Pleurosigma angulatum W. Sm P. Nornianni Ralfs lilioiconigma, arcticimi Cl II. Peridiniales. (Dmofliifjellata). Dimiphysis acuta Ehrb., Jørg T). norvegica Clap, et Lachm., Jørg 1). aaiminata Clap, et Lachm., Jørg D. rotundata Clap, et Lachm Podolampas palmipis Stein Oxytn.ium diplnroiiun Stein Pyynphnnifi liiiriihui'nim Stein Pro/di'iiiiHiiiii rrlirrlahiw (Clap, et Lachm.) Butschli Govijnuhi.i siiiiiifir/i (Clap. et. Lachm.) Dies G. polyedra Stein Peridinium depressum Bail P. divergens Ehrb. (P. lenficulare (Ehrr.) .Iøro.) . . . . P. conicum (Gran) Ostenp. et Schm n I »A 0—330 0—420 0—480 0—330 0—530 0—100 300— 200 500— 400 33.86- 34.04 34.11- 35.13 34.11- 34.3! 34.94— 34.88 34.07— 34.19 2.3— 3.46 3.2 — 4.15 +0 ProtiRtplnnkton. Year 190U. M.mfh Depth (inett-rs) Salinity {O/^) Temperatuie (Gels.) April 11^. 11 I ll 2^ 330|W— 4a0| 0— 4hu|| U— 60 33.86- 34 04 1 33.73- 34.00 = c s 'hi 0—60 0-33010— 63O:|0— 100 34.1I-I 35 IS |34.ii— 34.sa 3.2- 4.16 500— 400 34.07— I 34.19 Peiidiiimni pentwjonnm Gkan 1' pallillum OSTENK P. onUum (Poi'CH.) SchCtt Ceratium tiipos (O. K. MCli,.) Nitzsch. (a baltiriini Sci C. hucephaliim (Cl ) Cl ('. 6. V. hefemcampta .løRo Ceratium maooci-ros Ehbb. (Cl.) C. intermedium (Jyuo ) ('. longipes (Bail.) Vi C', fwca (Ehrb.) Dim C'. ftlSUS (E.IRB.) DlJ III. Pteiospcrmatiiceæ. Plerospet-mn Miibii (Jøro.) Ostexf P. Vanhoffeni (Jørg.) Ostenf. . . . P. didi/oti (Jøro.) Osten f IV. Ilalo.sphæraceæ. ll'doxphceiti lii-idis Schmitz (incl. H. minor Ostexf.). V. Flagellata. PhæOCyStis /'..prh.li llI.AR.) liACiEKH VI. Silicofiagellata. DisteplKnms speculimi (Kurb.) St()hr Dictt/oclKt flhiihi Kiiiui VII. Radiolarh I. Spumellaria. Hrxacontium eutlidcanthum Jøro H. parhydermum Jøro Eehinomma leptodermwii Jøro Rhiznplrgma boreale (Cl.) Jøro Litlielius minnr Jøro 2. Aainthnria. Radidxpliæra anoriintliiin JøR in his late.' work, has examined into the same pheno- menon, more in detail. On the whole, he appears to agree with OsTEXFELD, at anv rate in so much as that the boundaries of cur- rents and also coast water are necessary for production in large quantities, but he goes a step further and suggests a case for the eftects observed. He applies the theory recently advanced by Brandt, and con- siders that the explanation is to be found, either in the fact that in the open sea „there is a constant state of famine, as the supply of nourishment principally comes from the coasts; or else that there is a more active decomposition of nitrogeneous elements in the warmer waters of the Atlantic". As to which of these causes is the more decisive, Gran does not give any definite opinion. But he seems most to incline to the famine hypothesis, for, from this starting point, he shows how the boundaries of the different currents must act in the same way as coast lines, by reason of the nourishing matter, which they biing with them, from the rivers of Siberia and the arctic coasts. In connection with the foregoing, I will give a brief account of the opinions I have formed after my examination of the coast plankton; I will at the outset meation that 1 have had little or no personal experience of ocean plankton. 1 also long since came to the conclusion that it is probable that the evolution of the large quantities of diatoms depends upon the mixing of the waters. On the whole, I am of the same opi- nion as Gran, as expressed in the quotation first given from his book. 1 must, however, make exception to the famine hypothesis, which appears to me to give altogether too hopeless a view re- specting pelagic animal life. When Gran, however, considers the resting spores (endocysts) left behind in the shallow coast water as the i-cal explanation of the phenomenon, my experience makes it impossible for me to agree with him; in spite of the great attractiveness which at first attaches to this hyiHithesis. As is so often the case, so here, the same conclusions ai'e often arrived at from widely differing hypotheses. After Gran's theory the neritic diatoms with resting spores (in contradiction to the oceanic, Avhich have none) leave behind these spores in the coast water after a short period of vegetation. When now the spores sprout, in the following spring they cause the production of the large masses of diatoms. What 1 most ob.ie<-t to is, tliat if tliis tjieory Ije correct there would be good reason to concluiie tiiat the .,inflow of diatoms" is a local pheiumienon, at any rate in the fiords. One ought then to be able to conclude tiiat the plankton which flourishes in one tioni would be considerai)ly different from wliat is to be seen in another and distant one. It would, moreover, be reasonable that the large evolution would occur in one fiord essentially earlier or later than in ad.jacent ones, according to the different local conditions, which might tend eitiici' to ha.sten or hinder the development of diatoms. But evciyoiie who has carefully examined the make-up of the plankton at the time mentioned will have particularly noticed that, taken as a whole, there is a remarkable uniformity in the plankton. Of course, thei'e are variations, but these appear to l>e caused more by differences in time than place. It .should, however, here be remembered, that the jdankton during „the inflow" is very rich also as to (juality, and contains — especially that of the northern inflow — so many forms difficult to determine (small and with thin walls imperfectly silicated) that it must still be considered too little known. In spite of the large number of species, and notwithstanding that there doubtless are sfill many unknown ones, it seems to me that there is such remarkably great uniformity that it is difficult to think of the phenomenon as a local one. As mentioned at the commencement, however, there is some ditt'erence between the southern and northern inflow; and this ditte- rence would seem to be constant in the ca.se of a few species. It is highly probable that there is a much greater ditt'erence in the quality than can now be seen; for, as before mentioned, the number is large of those species which it is difficult to determine. If, however, considerations be confined to the predominant species, it will be found that there are some which have hitherto only been found in the noiihern, and not in the southern plankton. For in- stance. Gran long since emphasized the fact that Cha-toceros furcelln- tiis ,,is entirely absent south of »Stadt, and (\ cincfiis takes its place." It is also remarkable that the phenomenon occurs simultane- ously at ditterent places. If the inflow is seen in one fiord, it will also as a rule be found everywhere in the district. It is indeed quite difficult to decide whether it has come from the south or the north, that is to say, whether the inflow is at the same time ob- servalile in places to the south, and not in places to the north, or vice versa. Here let me call attention to the rapidity with which the in- flow sets in — for thi.s 1 consider to be an especially noteworthy and important circumstance. There is no clearly defined time when the change takes place in the plankton and the inflow is prepared for, but it all happens, so to say, with a bound. The species which form the bulk of the inflow are. — as pre- viously stated by Ci-eve and Gkan — for the most part ([uite ditterent ones from those which arc generally found in the plankton, and most of them are arctic forms. This — in addition to several other circumstances — is the reason why Cleve has supposed that there is a current of arctic water along the coast of Norway, right awav down to Skageiak and Kattee-at. E. Joi-gensen. According to Gran's theory, the foreign arctic forms must be considered to come from the resting- spores which have been de- posited, and so must not be looked upon as foreign, but as species which now on our coasts have an unusually short period of vege- tation in the spring, remaining otherwise in rest at the bottom as spores. It will clearly be seen, from the tables of the species which have been found in the plankton here dealt with, that a large number of foreign species occur during the period of the inflow, par'tly being decidedly high arctic, at any rate as far as their di- stribution is now known. Of such species, I would particularly mention Th' I lassiosirahyalina, Fragilaria cylindriis, „NavicuIa" Van- hoffeni, Coscinodiscus hioculatus, Pleurosigma Stuxhergi, Nitzschia frigidu and Chætocerns fiircellatus. These two thmgs — the great uniformity and the foieign cha- racter — taken in connection with each other seem to me most natui-ally to give rise to the supposition that those species, which foi'm the bulk of the plankton at the time when the masses of diatoms appear, are brought in from the ocean by arctic water, and that they are — perhaps by mixing with the waters of the Atlantic — brought into better conditions of existence and there- fore multiply by division. This way of generation will of itself — that is to say when such division is not only the exception — easily lead to production e n m a s s e, as one has good opportunities of seeing during the development of diatoms, when artificially cultivated. What constitutes the improved conditions of existence, is another question, and there is no reason foi' me to deal with this matter here, as I have no observations to fall back upon, but there cannot be very many factors to take into consideration. Gean supposes that the rich supply of nourishment is its cause fcfr. the foregoing.) In this connection, I will only observe that froin his standpoint Gran explains that the reason why the development of the large masses stops of itself, and why the masses disappear, is that the nourishing matter has been quickly used up. According to my experience light plays an important part in the culture of diatoms, their development being greatly assisted by a certain degree of light, while a somewhat greater degree has precisely the opposite effect. One might, therefore, perhaps find a reason in this fact for the disappearance of the masses, in as much as long periods of sunshine might destroy the assimilating powers of the chromatophores. It is highly probable that the phenomenon is due to botli these causes. Tiiis disappearance of tiie masses of diatoms may, however, be local, and be caused by the rushing in of other water (cfr. the con- cluding remarks on the Baltic current.) I have called the phenomenon the inflow') of diatoms, partly because it conveys the immediate impression of an inflow from out- side, and partly because I really consider that it is caused by the lu'inging in of foreign forms. It is, however, only necessary to consider that the germs for the evolution of the masses of diatoms are thus brought in, whether it be light, temperature, nourishing matter, or most likely all three factors combined, which further their deve- lopment. As already mentioned, the southern inflow appears always to contain some species which arc not found in the northern, so it would seem likely that the western coast of Norway partly receives 1) It is useful in the remarlvs i natu this period. a sjjecial name to desig- water from anothei' (juarter than the northern coast. Gran appar- ently considers Stadt to be the bouudary lino for some of the cha- racteristic species. This, I think, makes it clear, that it is of some importance to tiy to discover whether there is really any variation or not year after year in the species found in the inflow of diatoms. On the whole, it seems to me that the great difference of, and changes in the interpretation of the plankton at least show that it has not yet been sufficiently studied to make any quite reliable basis for hydi'O- graphical conclusions. As is the case with the majoiity of biological phenomena, the development and changes in plankton are of such a complicated character that a knowledge of many factors which work together, and which as yet we are partly quite unacquainted with, is neces- sary, so that to get a clearer conception and better knowledge of the many remarkable phenomena, which are to be found in our coast plankton alone, will give enough work for many years. Before I leave this subject, I think I ought to better explain my position with regard to the hypothesis of resting spores, which at first sight, it must be confessed, seems to give an attractive explanation of many phenomena. When Gean considers the neritic species to be characteiized by resting spores, in contradiction to the oceanic species which have none, this distinction seems to me in a sense to follow of itself, but contains no proof of the „over summering", by resting spores on the bottom. I look upon these spores as a means by which the individual diatom attempts to escape from unfavourable surroundings, as the specific weight increases. So far, I agree with Gean. His supposition that they often sink to the bottom is doubtless also correct in very many cases, in fact I think this is finally most often their fate in the coast water. But I think it is just as certain, in the majority of cases, that the individual to begin with is only forced into underlying water of a greater specific weight. What its further fate will be, depends entirely upon cir- cumstances. If it thrives, it will live on, and possibly multiply. If, however, it does not tlnive, the tinai result will be that it reaches the bottom. Then, as a rule, it will be altogether played out, at the most, it niiglit be included in a preparation of bottom material. In an earlier paper (L. 92) I have suggested that the thick- ening of the horns in certain Chætoceræ (e. g. C. conroUihis, C. eon- turtus and many others) might be a biological phenomenon corre- sponding to the formation of resting spores, although the latter are undeniably more ett'ective. In his last work. Gran also mentions (L. 7(), p. 129—130) numerous dead cells and resting spores tVom a deep water sample (The Stor Fiord, Søndmøre, stat. 3, 200—530 m.), these consisting partly of species which had disappeared from the surface. How these could — even if they remained alive — again come up from such great depths, is really difficult to explain, unless too arbitrary suppositions be resorted to. Besides, the greater depth, imphes little light, but light is an absolute condition of vital importance for the diatoms. The fact that bottom samples from deeper than 50 m.s show a very poor diatom life, is very instructive in this connection; while a very rich diatom flora may be found at lesser depths. At depths of under 100 m.s the bottom flora of diatoms consist only of empty valves of pelagic species plus some other matter, also a few diatom valves, which has been washed down from the shore and here too resting spores are found in varying 89' ■re. diu' miulit in the sufceediiii;' ■^pofics which were mmiorou.s in (■(iiiilitions wliii'ii are subject w liicii do take place, occur as It at ieiiLith a point is reached (|uantitirs. Such lias at any latc hccn my cxiicriciice. On the otiicr iiMiid 1 have never seen any lai'L.'c iiundicr of rcstiiii;- spores in shallow walci'. If tliey survived the suuiuier I year to find (luantities of the same the pi'eeediuL;- one; and consequently a considerable uniformity year after year. But, accordiiii;- to my explanation, one would expect greater variation. The oceanic species live und to but little chanw. The chaii-c a rule slowly and ijradually. so t A\hen it is a question of whether or not. If, on the other hand, an oceanic species comes into coast water, or into a boundary district between two curi-ents a formation of resting spores might take place, if the species in question had the requisite power. But in such cases, Gran does not consider it to be an oceanic species (but a neritic one). In this way, one, of course, gets as clearly defined a distinction, between oceanic and neritic species, as can be wished for; but such a distinction is at any rate highly artificial and seems to me to be of little use, if Gbax's interpretation of the resting spores is not correct. Besides, I think that the most important question is, whether a given spe- cies can pi'opagate and thrive in the open sea, and this may be the case even if it is possessed of the power of forming resting spores. According to my opinion with regard to them, it might in some cases just be the coast water which is an hindrance, and the oceanic water which is furthering. At any rate, it ought first of all to be clearly proved that the resting spores are deposited in large quantities at the bottom of shallow water, and this should not be a very difficult matter. Deep water can scarcely be taken into account, nor yet those spores which have been washed further ■ down than about 50 m.s beneath the surface, to mention a figure which would seem to suit. There must, ! I take it, be great quantities of resting spores present to explain the sudden appearance of large masses of diatoms. My experience — as mentioned above — goes to prove that j it is just only in deep water that large quantities of resting spores j are found, and here, as explained above, one must expect to find j them. I have not, however, by direct experiments, become convin- ced that essential quantities of them do not occur at the bottom of siiallow w^ater, and I will, therefore, in this connection, mention that it is quite likely that the usual method of preparing bottom samples gives a negative result, even if they do contain such spoi'es. When I above threw out the suggestion, that the hea\4er spores serve to force the individual into deeper water, I do not wish to be understood to mean that their special or only purpose is to make the individual diatom heavier. It is also reasonable to suppose that the formation of resting spores may be a reaction to plasmolysis, caused by salter water. This thought, would, it seems to me, explain certain phenomena of the plankton, although I will not now at present venture to say that this reason is the more decisive. I have not yet sufficiently studied this subject (the for- mation of resting spores). As it is always unsatisfactory to attack a given hypothesis — especially one such as this of resting spores which seems to rejoice in numerous adherents — unless another be offered in its stead, I will now mention how I consider the inflow of diatoms occurs. If I have undei'stood hydrographers correctly, there is, on the surface during the winter months, a tongue of salt watei-, Aviiich flows northwards, fairly parallel to the coast of Norway from the passage between the Fa^'oe Islands and iShetland. This tongue seems to be comparatively nai'row, especially a little to the north 01- north east of the passage, and it expands northwards, until at its most northerly end — in the neighboui-hood of Bili-en Eiland — it divides into two or more arms. On the right of this tongue of ocean water, there is the coast water oft" the coast of Norway; on its left, there is the arctic water (nearest to the Faeroe Islands it is the East Icelandic Polar Current). This (easterly) tongue of ocean water is displaced and forced in different directions by the water from the arctic regions, now nearer to the coast of Norway, then in the contrai-y direction; and it varies in its distribution northwards (or is mixed in diffoi'ent pro- portions with the arctic water). In the spring months, there appears to be a rich diatom plank- ton just in the boundary line between this arctic water and that of the Atlantic. This phenomenon may partly be caused by a purely mechanical crow^diug where the velocity of the current is lowest; but it is also very likely that the .somewhat higher tempe- rature of the mixed water may promote the evolution of the diatoms. In Gran's last work (L. 70, p. 158, 160) one learns from the expedition of S/S Heimdal, in May 1901, that there w^as found in the southern section of the „Gulf Stream" (the previously mentioned tongue of ocean water from Faeroe— Shetland northwards) a rich diatom plankton on both sides of the stream, especially on the western towards the Icelandic polar current. Traces of a similar state of things were found in the second section, much more nor- therly, but it was here little noticeable (at that time of year). Gean himself mentions that |on the western boundaiy of the- Gulf Stream, a rich neritic plankton consisting of diatoms was found, and this he considers to have been brought hither by the current, probably from the Faeroe Islands. He also mentions that the same state of things has several times previously been noticed at about the same place and time. With regard to the northern section, he hints at an exceedingly long transport of the same neritic forms- northwards to the corresponding boundary line there. In this connection, it would be of importance to know whether such an evolution of masses of diatoms takes place in other places on the boundaries between the atlantic and arctic waters, (at a time which is favourable to the development of diatoms, probably ex- cluding the winter months of December, January and February, and perhaps partly also March) or if this production en masse is confined to those places where coast water is present. It is quite likely that the latter is the case, but one can hardly say that it has, as yet, been clearly proved. If such mass development should be found in the boundaries as a whole, one of the principal reasons would disappear for con- sidering as neritic such arctic diatoms as have been found repeatedly in large numbers in samples of plankton which have been taken far from the coasts. As the tongue of ocean water above mentioned is narrow and varies in its situation and expanse, it is reasonable to conclude that, occasionally during the spring months, the arctic waters wash over it, and become in this way transferred to the coast of Norw^ay, To judge from the occurence of the diatom inflow, this would seem to happen regularly at the end of March. (In 1598 parti- cularly early, namely in tlie middle of the month, or perhaps still earliei-. ) E. Jorgens By assistance of Mr. Noedgaaed I have been aware that such a washingover by the arctic waters across the Gulf Stream has really been observed by the Swedish hydrog-raphers (Petteeson, L. 119), and that just in the year 1898 the East Icelandic Polar Current by a broad zone went across the Gulf Stream towards the Norwegian coast. The Swedish hydrographers also suppose the arctic water to force its way beneath the surface all into the Skagerak and Kattegat, and Cleve thus explains the appearance there of arctic planktonforms. They appear here earlier in the year than at the Norwegian coast. When the arctic water reaches the coast, we find at once the masses of (hatoms, which have already been developed on the boundaries. As the preceding remarks will show, the southern inflow of diatoms, according to my opinion, is especially due to the East Ice- landic Polar Current, which under favourable circumstances advances in the direction of somewhere near the Sogne Fiord. (As previously mentioned, Gean makes Stadt the limit for some of the arctic diatoms, which in this connection are of special importance). It is possible that a similar washingovei- occurs regularly (by a very broad wave?) further north on the coast of Lofoten (to the south or north). Here, at certain times, a tongue of arctic water also seems to be pushing its way across the Gulf Stream. I think it very possible that the specific northern forms in the •northern diatom inflow may, in this way, be brought in with water from about the latitude of Jan Mayen. It is, however, also quite likely that it is the pre^^ously mentioned tongue of arctic water, trans- versing the Gulf Stream at its narrowest part, which alone gives rise to both the northern and southern inflow. If such ■ be the case, one might expect that the southern one would expand southwards, and the northern northwards. There would still be nothing to prevent the slight differences in their components, as the noi'thern part of the current could bring with it the specific northern forms, if from land, then from Jan Mayen or perhaps East Greenland. The abundant material for observation which Cleve has collected in his splendid work on the distribution of plankton organisms in the Atlantic, (L. 40). makes it possible for one to get a view of the distribution of the species. The specific northern forms may, in accordance with the information there given, be supposed to come from East Greenland or Jan Mayen. If tiie northern diatom inflow be due to the rushing in of a noitiiein tongue of arctic water at Lofoten or thereabout (probably in a wide expanse) one might expect the inflow from here to stretch southwards on the one side, and in a north easterly di- rection on the othei-. There was indeed, in the plankton examined, a I'cason for the suggestion that the diatom inflow extended in an easterly direction in the most northern part of Norway. Following close upon the inflow of diatoms, there is, on the south west coast of Norway in the neighbourhood of Bergen, a very sudden transition to much fresher water, containing a rich and peculiar plankton of pi;rulinæa, which quickly takes the place of the masses of diatoms. (Cf. E. Jøegensen L. 91) This is due, as far as I know, to the Baltic current which now rushes in and sweeps the masses of diatoms out from the coast and northwards. Therefore, it is reasonable that the characteristic northern species cannot penetrate so far as to the latitude of -Bergen. [n the above mentioned southern section of the Gulf Stream, during the expedition of S/S Heimdal in 1901, there were also masses of diatoms on the boundary towards the oceanic water in May, just at the time when the Baltic current has swept away the diatom masses from the coast near Bergen. There is a certain correspondence between the characteristic northern forms in the northern diatom inflow and the species which from Geunow's and Cleve's works are known from the Kara Sea and the north coast of Siberia. This might mean some kind of connection between these seas, and one might easily be tempted to conclude that water from the north coast of Siberia finds its way to the north coast of Norway. In Gean's last work, a plankton sample is mentioned as taken during the expedition of S/S Heimdal in 1900 in the Barents Sea, west of Waigatch, and which contained several of the peculiar forms found in the northern diatom inflow. Gean has kindly placed this sample at my disposition, and after a thorough examination of it, I can affirm, that it contains a large number of our northern plankton diatoms. On the other hand, there are also so many foreign elements that it is scarcely Likely that water from this district flows to our coast during the period of the diatom inflow. On the contrary, everything (also the date ^Vo) suggests that the masses of diatoms from the coast of Norway (or the same inflow which gives rise to the northern inflow with us) extend further eastwards (perhaps to the Kara Sea). The species found in plankton, and their distribution (prin- cipally in the nearest seas) and remarks on the new or critical forms. I. Bao±lla.nria,les. (Didtornaceæ). The suggestions which have hitherto been made as to a natm'al classification of diatomaceæ are all more or less unsatisfactory. In the following pages, I have principally availed myself of the system used in Van Heueck's „Traite des Diatomacées" (L. 89); but in the larger groups I have made some changes which I have found to be necessary. A more complete list of literatui'e will be found in my pre- vious paper (E. Jøegensen: Protophyten und Protozoen aus der norwegischen Westkuste) (L. 91). Here I have only more com- pletely cited the literature for the forms which ai-e not referred to there. a. feiitrifæ Schitt. Coscin odisceæ. Under the heading „ distribution'", 1 have used the ordinary expressions «oceanic", and „nei-itic" forms (= sea and coast forms). As long as one (for diatomaceæ) does not know anything definite about any rest period at the bottom, these expressions are far pre- ferable to „holo"- and „meroplanktonic". In accordance with my opinion as stated above respecting the inflow of diatoms in the spring I consider a large part of our plankton species to be brought in from outside. There ai'c others which occur all the year round on our coasts, although these of course also follow with the vai-ious currents. Protistplankton. 91 Such species are noted as native, or sonietinies as .,stationai'y", on our coasts. So as not to ditler more tiian necessary from tlie expressions commonly used, I iiavc called boreal those coast forms which are stationary on our northern coasts, as well as those which, according to my opinion, come to us from the northern, but not exactly the arctic, districts. (This expression — boi-cal — was first used by Cleve, and later by both Gkan and Ostenfeld with a similar meaning). Moreover, 1 have, as Gran has done, widened this expression to include certain oceanic forms, which are found in the northern Atlantic outside tiio arctic water proper. After my view, such forms will for the most part be those which thrive in the boundary lines between the ai'ctic water and that of the Atlantic, and which are well able to bear the latter (up to a certain degree of salinity and temperature). That it is often difficult to decide whether arctic and boreal (I would prefer to call the latter subarctic) forms are neritic or oceanic, is something which is a necessary result of my opinion that they thrive well and may give rise to evolution en masse in the boundaries between the arctic and Atlantic waters. It is this fact which has also been referred to by some authors when saying, that these boundaries to some extent play the same part as the coasts. Co^einodi><<>iiK Ehrb. It will be seen, from the various plankton tables which have been published, that this difficult genus has given rise to much confusion. The names which are used in many cases evidently mean quite diffei-ent species. As there, however, in our latitude, does not appear to be very many species in the plankton, it ought to be possible to arrive at comparative clearness concerning them. It is probable that in reality there are many more species than have up to the present been found : but there are only a few which occur frequently. I -nill here give a brief survey of the species which I have mentioned in the plankton tables. Key to the .■specie» of CoscnioiViscn^. Valve flat or nearly so (sometimes suddenly descending at a nar- row zone of the outmost margin). Marginal apiculi present (always distinct). The characteristic structure of C. curvatulus: valve by (somewhat curved) radii di\1ded into a con- siderable number of sectors; mar- kings (areoles) in each sector in rows parallel to the one limiting radius (or somewhat convergent to- wards the border) C. curvatulus. The characteristic structure of C', lineatus: markings arranged in more or less straight rows (in 5 or 6 directions) across the valve .... C. lineatus. (et var.) The characteristic structure of C. excentrieus : markings in 7 fasciculi, forming distinct secondary curves, concave towards the border C. excentrieus. Fine radiating structure with more or less distinct and numerous fasciculi C', hioculatus. No marginal apiculi. Structure of the valve rather coarse, more or less distinctly radi- ate (only near the border with more or less visible fasciculi, consisting of rows converging towards the border, sometimes apparently inordi- nate); markings near the border sud- denly much smaller C. radiatus. Valve decidedly convex (in C', decipiens witli liiL'h broad marginal zone, then flat). Valve without close markings all ovei' tlie surface, only with distant jiuncta. C', nitidus. Valve with close (more or less distinctly polygonal) markings. Fine structui'e (fasciculi) ; around the centre of the valve a con- spicuous star consisting of about 5 coarse marks C', stellaris. Structure similar to that of C'. excentrieus, but with more quickly diminishing markings and long mar- ginal apiculi C. decipiens. (= Thcdassiosira gelatinosa). Structure radiate, with more or less branched radii. No coarse marks ; marginal apiculi (when pre- sent) short and small. 2 comparatively large (short linear) asymmetrical and numerous small marginal api- culi (which are often very inconspicuous or apparently wanting). Fine struetui-e. Smooth central space or large central rosette of se- veral times larger are- oles. Valve thin C. eoneinnus. Coarser structure. At the centre a definite central rosette of doub- ly large areoles. More strongly siliceous C. centralis. No marginal apiculi. Valve veiT thick. Coarse structure; are- oles of very varying size on one and the same valve, from -/s of the radius some- what smaller. Com- paratively broad, co- arsely striated, border C', siibbxdliens. E. Ja -gens C. exceutriciis Ehkb. The form which occurs in the plankton fi'om the northern coasts of Norway, is the typical one which is figured in Schmidt's atlas, (L. 128), pi. 58, f. 49. Distribution: Appears to be a northern temperate oceanic form. On the west coast of Norway it is found all the year round, but only occasionally in somewhat greater number. The same seems to be true of the northern coasts, at any I'ate in the months February— May. Othenvise widely distributed along the coasts of the Atlantic, the North Sea and Skagerak right up to Greenland and Jan Mayen. Has, according to more or less reliable statements, a nmch wider distribution and is perhaps cosmopolitan. C. lineatus Ehrb. The easily recognizable form which is figured by Van Heueck (Synopsis, L. 88) t. 131, f. 3, I hardly think occurs on our coasts. But rarely one finds a form with fine structure and moi-e or less straight secondary curves, which I have entered in the plankton tables under the name of C. lineatus var. I am, however, partly inclined to think that the specimens I have observed may be forms .of (Joscinosira fokichorcla Gran. Cfr. remarks concerning this species. Distribution: The genuine C. lineatus Ehrb. is perhaps only found fossil and in the warmer seas. C, decipiens Grun. Vide Thulussiosira gcJatinosu. C. ciirvatiilus Grun. Rare on the coasts ot Noiway, occasionally more frequent in the northern coast plankton. Distribution : Occurs in many forms, which taken as a whole have a wide distribution. It seems to be frequent on the arctic coasts. (Greenland, Jan Mayen and Franz Joseph's Land). Is pciiiaps an arctic and boreal oceanic form. C. stellaris Hop. Rare on tlie northern coasts of Norway. Does not appear to belong to the diatom inflow, ami is mostly found singly in deep water samples. Distribution : Rare on the coasts of the Atlantic and the arms of the sea in connection with it. On the west coast of Norway most abundant in the winter. Also known from the Me- diterranean. The appearance of C. stellaris in the north, suggests tiiat this species is a tempei'ate Atlantic one (and probably oceanic.) Note. C. si/mbolophorus Guitn. (L. 83, p. 82, pi. 4, f. 3—6) is a very nearly related species with considerably coarser structure and difi'erent distribution. According to Rattray (L. 124, p. 493) transitional forms to C. stellaris occur. C. symbolophorus is an arctic and antarctic species (also known from several fossil deposits), which occurs on the west coast of Norway during the inflow of diatoms together with arctic species. In the northern plankton I have also seen it once: "A 1900, Foldouijord, — 100 m. C. biocitlatus Uuun. Gkfn. I.. 83, p. 55, pi. 3. f. 30. Cleve I.. 26, p. 10, t. 2, f. 13. Thalassiosira b'weulatu (Ghun.) Ostenfeld L. 116, p. 504, f. 120, 121 (?). This beautiful species, which does not seem to have been found before on the Scandinavian coasts, occurred in several of the samp- les, especially in 1900, sometimes rather numerous. It is only found during the inflow of diatoms in the spring months. It is probable that this is the same species which is mentioned by Ostenfeld from the Faeroe Islands (1. c), and which he has found in chains similar to those of Ihalassiosira, for which reason he refers the species to this genus as a new subgenus, Coscinolau- deria. I have not followed Ostenfeld's example, partly because the genus Thulussiosira is getting to be rather heterogeneous and unnatural on account of the newer elements which have been added to it, so that there will soon be nothing left as a reliable distinguishing feature except the mucilaginous thread; partly too because I have not met with any such chains in my material, in which the species, however, never occurred m any important quantity. Perhaps we may be speaking of two different species, although Ostenfeld's figure considerably resembles our species. (The only thing which seems foreign to it, as far as I can see, is the apiculi which are closer and smaller than in our form, and also the lower cells, as I have only seen high ones). Distribution: Arctic and boreal, according to Cleve (arctic) neritic species, known from the coast of North Siberia, ice near Novaja Zemlja, Greenland, the Faeroe Islands (April— May rare, Aug.— Sept. 1902 numerous, according to Ostenfeld, 1. c, who also mentions it from several places in the N. Atlantic). Note. Coscinodiscus polyacanthus Geun. (L 48, pi. 7. f. 127) is a little known and somewhat doubtful species, which occurs on the North Siberian coast and at Franz Joseph's Land. In a sample from Folstad, *U 1899, 0—3 m., I found very sparingly a species, which in every i-espect seems to agree with authentic specimens of C. iwlyacanthus from Jamal (Swedish expedition to Jenessey 1875, slides in possession of the Riksmusæum, Stockholm I. (Cfr. under Coscinosira polychorcla). C. polyacanthus Grun. var. intermedia Grun. (1. c. p. 81, pi. 3, f. 25) is probably another species, if it does not belong to C. curratulus (it has, like this species, interfascicular apiculi). Speci- mens quite answering tn the figure and description of Grunow were found sparingly in a sample from Skjerstadfjord XII, ""A 1900, — 500 m. Known from Cape \\'ankai'ema. C. radiatns Ehkb, Exceedingly variable. Theie are, however, certain distinctive marks by which all forms belonging to this species can be recog- nized. Gran (L. 70, p. 166) has already well characterized this form: — low („coinshaped") cells, flat valve, markings near the border suddenly voi y smnll. ■ The larger lonns have a distinct central rosette and often areoles, which increase in size nearly up to the border, and are then C. oculus iridis. Ehbb., as this very much disputed species has been described by Grunow and Rattray. From these forms (cfr. Schmidt's atlas, (L. 128) pi. 63, f. 6., which form, however, has larger marginal areoles than usual) there seems to be every transi- tion to the ordinaiy C. ruil'ialus witJiout the central I'osette and with markings which aic of about the same size nearly up to the bor- der. Grunow (L. 83, p. 25) also observes that C radiutus passes into C. oculus iridis, but it must be mentioned that he seems to give little or no weiglit to the convexity of the valve (when this is not particularly conspicuous), and therefore he classes together 93 forms wliic'li are alike in struetiii'o only, wliile they, in other le- spects, eaii lianliy he emisidered to belon;;- together. When thus (Jitrxow i'urther remarks tliat there is the most complete ti'ansition between C. K!liali(s antl ('. oniltis iridis anil further to C. iKdiatiix, antl wlien on tlie otiier hand lie h)oks upon t', irutralis as a vai'iety of C. itxti'i-oniitlKdns. lie has surely «.^onc too far. On the other haiul, there are thick walled, small, coarsely sti-uctured foi-ms, which have quite a dittcrent appearance to the ordinary C. rndidfun. and yet which must also be entered under this species. Such forms are C. dcriun A. Schm. (L. 128) pi. (io, f. 1—4 = C. radintus f. minor A. Schm. (L. 127, pi. 3, f. 34.) I have, stransre to say. never yet seen any really jrood drawing of this characteristic species. As it is, however, - ;» indeed is the case with all sjiecies of Cosc'moiViscm — very difficult to figure properly, I must at present give up the thought of giving any figure of it. Cleve's meaning with regard to C. niduttus is not quite clear to me, as he (L. 40, p. 321) refers to Schmidt's atlas pi. 60, f. 9, which does not appear to be at all a characteristic figure of C. nidiatu.-', as this species is looked upon by Grax and myself. Cleve re- fers too to Giuxuws remarks in Diatomeen from Franz Josefs Land (L. 83, cfr. above) and mentions in Phytopiankton {L. 27, p. 23) that C', radifttus is scarcely more than a little form of C. oculus iridis. Cleve's opinion of the latter species does not, however, coincide with Grunow's and Rattray's. For further particulars see C'. siililiiiHit'iis. Rather common. More abundant in deep water samples than on the surface. Distribution : Ratiier common all the year round on the coasts of Norway, both the western and northern. Also widely distributed on the European coasts of the Atlantic and its arms, right lip to the arctic coasts (GJreenland, Jan ^[ayen. Spitzbergen and Franz .losephs Laud.) C. centralis Eiiitu., Rattk. (PI. VI, tig-. 1). Rattk. L. 124. p. 555. This species is very easily recognized, but has been confused with C', onihci iridis and C. concinnus. It is sometimes not so easy to distinguish it from the latter species, and it is possible that one will not be able with certainty to keep them separate; but the ditt'erence from C. ocnlus iridis in {Grunow's meaning) as Avell as from C', radiatus is vci-y considerable. The characteristic marks of the species are tiie following: Valve considerably convex (pi. VI, f. 1). Structure radiate with j dichotomously branched radii and rather coarse structure (though finer than that of C', radiutus). The markings from a rather large central rosette of even size to "A radius, then gradually somewhat smaller (not suddenly small near the bordei'). Near the margin j numerous fine apiculi (in a single row) and with about 120°s space between them. F.esides two much larger, short linear, unsymmetrical, margmal ones. Varies considerably in delicacy of structure and so often clo- sely resembles C', conciimus, in common with whicli species it has the 2 characteristic unsymmetrical marginal and the numerous small «ubmarginal apiculi. These latter may be indistinct, and sometimes | (hut rarely) not t. at the border, smaller areoles, 1,5^2 ]).. At the border 5'/2— 6 stripes on 10 same number of areoles). The margin being nearly cubic-cylindrical). This species, which, judging from my experience, is well de- fined and easily recognisable, resembles the C. radiatus most nearly, and may, unless great care be taken, be confused \\ith it; tlio con- vex valve and the absence of the very small areoles neai- tlic mar- gin will, however, at once show the decided difference. Tills species is also Grax's C. ocuIus iridis after his inter- pretation of this species in Plankton des norwegischen Nordmeeres (L. 70, p. 168), as I have had an opportunity of being convinced of, on comparing some of his plankton samples. Cleve's C. oculus iridis appears to consist in a great measure of this species, judging from his plankton lists, but as he — as above mentioned — refers to Grunow's figure of C. asteromphcdiis var. hijhr'tdK, which is hardly specifically diff'crent from what Gkunow considers to be C. centralix Ehkb., it seems to me that Cleve's species must consist of forms which are specifically different from each other. Grunow's C. centralis, which he considers a variety of C. asterom- phalus, is not so well characterized as Rattray's C. centralis, but 4 on 10 1)., the Here and there largest much |). (coiresponding to the 3 'J. broad (the areoles must, I think, be reckoned as belonging to that species. Grunow's C. asteivmphalus also belongs to it, answering as it does quite well to the coarser forms of C. centralis (Rattr.) having, as a rule, in- distinct marginal apiculi. Grunow expressly mentions (L. 83, p. 27) the convexity, while C. sudbidliens has a gradually descending marginal zone and therefore is less noticeably convex towards the margin. Ostenfeld, again, considers C. ucidus iridis not to be specific- ally different from C. radiatus and therefore does not enter it se- parately from the Faeroe Islands (L. 116, p. 566). Other authors on plankton have, in their lists, given very various names from districts where, at any rate, partly the same species are hkely to occur, from which it will be seen that there is a considerable difference of opinion with regard to C. oculus iridis, C. aster omphalus, C. radiatus and C. concinnus (C. centralis is not generally mentioned). As the species here mentioned as C. subbulliens does not cor- respond well to C. oculus iridis, as one has reason to believe this species was originally looked upon — large, with large central rosette and thus differing from C. radiatus — and as there is such a great difference of opinion with regard to the correct meaning of this name, I have thought it best to determine the characteristics of the species, and to use a new name for this form, which is easily recognized. I have not been able, in spite of careful com- parisons, to identify it with certainty with any of the species hithei'to described. Of names which might be taken into consideration, I will particularly mention 6'. heteroporus and C obscurus. The latter, especially, has many points of similarity with my species, but it does not seem possible, however, from the figures which have been given, to consider them as being identical. On the other hand, there are certain forms which have been referred to C. radiatus, which surely belono- to my species. I will for instance, specially mention tab. 60, f. 14 in Schmidt's atlas (0. ohversus Rattr.) which fairly well answers to many forms which do not specifically differ from my C. subbulliens. As I, however, principally base the right of specific rank upon the peculiar con- vexity of the valve, (in side view), I cannot, for the sake of perfect clearness, very well use Rattray's name, which represents a spe- cies, which is but little known. It is not to be expected that there can be absolute agreement as to the use of Ehrenberg's names C. oculus iridis, C. centrali-^. C. radiatus and many other. But one might perhaps more easily agree as to the meaning of the original name, C', radiatus, which is already by most authors used as I do here, excepting that, to some extent, other species are also occasionally included thei'ein. If the name C. radiatus Ehrb. be retained, there can hardly be any reason for not attaching to it the meaning above mentioned. It is quite anothei" matter, that there are perhaps those who mean that there still are included in this species others, which in the future will have to be culled out. Further, there can hardly be different opinions with ivgard to Rattray's C. centralis, unless that some may consider the limits of his species to be too confined, while others may find those of mine to be too wide. At present, it appears by many — as above mentioned — to be looked upon as belonging to C', concinnus W. 8.M., and 1 have previously also been of this opinion. On the other hand. I think that C. oculus iriilis must be sacrificed (as a species), while ( '. subbuUivus, which is certainly PiKtistplanktuii. !»5 dirtcrent to liotli ( '. rniluiltis ami ('. cixtnilis may lu' rescued from cliaos. The two ijioiuineiit author.s Ckiniiw and Ivatthay, who liave given extensive and tlioi'oui;h monoirraphs on the difticnlt genus Co!>ci7todiiicug, have in their exceedingly exact dcscrii)tion of the differences in the structure of the valve omitted other iiniioitant distinctive features, especially the shape of the valve in sidi' view. Both of them, especially Rattray, indeed often particularly refer to the convexity, but not by any means in every instance, and they often include forms which correspond in structure, but differ cou- sidcralily in convexity, in the same species. This circumstance, unfortunately, makes Grunow's work, which in other respects is so exceedingly thorough, some^\■hat incomplete and \\aiiting in clearness. As far as my experience goes, the convexity of the valve is precisely a very certain distinctive feature, and comparatively easy to apply to living species in the plankton. It is even, as far as I can see, the only guiding thread which will sei-ve to lead us out of an otherwise hopeless and interminable maze. Only it must always be remembered that this — just as is the case with regard to structure — is only one distinctive feature, and may lead to the same unnatural piecemealing which the structure has caused; but that both distinctive features in conjunction can give good results. What I have, in one instance, in the tables called C. ocuhcs iridis, is the above mentioned coarser forms of C. centralis. DMiilndion: Appears to be an arctic and boreal oceanic species, which is rare with us. It is found scattered at several places on our northern coast, especially in deep water. Appears to extend along the northern, especially the arctic coasts of the Atlantic (Jan Mayen and Spitzbergen, in E. Jokgex- SEx L. 92 named C. or»/»s iridis) and in the districts where the arctic and Atlantic waters mix. t', nitidas Gkeg. Greg. L. 74, p. 499. pi. 10, f. 45. A. Schm. L. 127, p. 94, pi. .3, f. 32, L. 128, pi. 58, f. 18. Only found singly in two of the samples, from the \'est Fiord I. 0—50 m., '/'i 1899. and from Senjeu '-'/i, — 130 m. Probably only come in by chance and really a bottom form» as it is frequent in bottom samples. (Cfr. under that heading.) F.iioflia {Hcmidisciis Wallich. E. ^ihha Haii Haii.. in Pkit(!1. L. 123, p. 852. pi. 8, f. 22. Hemiiiscus aineiformis Wallich L. 137, p. 42, pi. 2, f. 3—4. Very rare with us, in deep water, probably come in with At- lantic water. Hitherto hardly found so far north. Distribution: Chiefly a subtropical and southern temperate Atlantic form, according to Cleve (L. 40, p. 330) rare north of 50" northern latitude. Known both from the European and American side of the At- lantic. Aotinocyrlii» Khbb. A. Khrenhergi Ralks. Fre(iuent in the plankton. Tiiis species is difticult to distinguish from those closely re- lated to it, and seems to vary 8onsideral)ly. Distrihidion : .Seems to occur all the year round on the west coast of Norway, and probably also on the north coast, here at any rate in the months January— May. Otherwise widely distri- liuted around the European coa.sts of the North Atlantic and its arms. Occurs exceptionally right up to Greenland, but is not an arctic form. iScems to have a much widei- distiibution, judt-'ing from the statements in De Toni. (L. 50). A. Ralfsi (W. S.M.^ Hai.1'8. This .species seems to be much rarer on our coasts, both on the west and north, than the preceding one. Reference should be made to the chapters on bottom samples, where it occurs somewhat more frequently. It is, however, cer- tainly a genuine plankton form, and not a bottom form. Distrihditn : .Seems to have a more southerly distribution than the foregoing species. Like the latter, it has also been found at Greenland. .1. siihtilis (Greg.) Ralks. Ralfs in Pritchard L. 123, p. 835. Van Heueck SjTiopsis (L. 88), p. 216, pi. 124, f. 7. Eupodisnts suhtilis Greg. L. 74, p. 501, pi. 11. f. 50. Very rare. Occuired very scarce in the plankton from Kva-n- angen -*/. 1899, 0— Ho m. Distrilndion : Known from the coasts of England, Spain, The Mediterranean, The Azores and The Pacilic Ocean. Note. A. sparsus (Greg.) Rattk. seems to occur in the plank- ton from the northern and western coasts of Norway; but as it is difticult to discern between this species and A. Ehrcnbeiyi, I have not included it in my tables. Besides, another form occurs, which certainly is specitically different from A. Ekrenbergi, and is perhaps the same as the genuine Eupodiscus crossus W. Sm. Earlier, I took it to be A. crassm VH. but have later become somewhat uncertain respecting this species, whose description (by De Toni and Rattray) does not agree well with Van Heurck's drawing. In spite of considerable labour, I have not yet been able to come to any de- tinite conclusion, so that I have not tabulated this form either. For further particulars, reference should be made to the chapter on bottom samples. A. subocclliitus (Gri-n.) Rattr. Rattr. L. 125. p. 145. Cosci)>odiscHs curvatulus var. siiboccl- lata Grcn. L. 83, p. 83, pi. 4, f. 15. Actinoeijchis ciirvatuhis Jan. in. A. Schmidt L. 128, pi. 57, f. 31. This beautiful diatom is verj^ like Ccscinodiscus citrratulus and is probably often mistaken for it. Possibly, therefore, it is not quite so rare as it seems to be. Hitherto only found in a few plankton samples of 1900 (The Skjerstad Fiord, V*, B', V and XII; The Salten Fiord "A). Distribution : Certainly not sufficiently known. Judging from the available accounts, only found fossil and at various places in the Ant-arctic regions. 2. Melosireæ. Tliala8sio!!iii-a Cl. T. Nordenskioldi ( l Occurs iu i;Teat quantities in April (fi-oni tlie end of Mai'ch ' into the month of May) during the inflow of diatoms, both along i the western and northern coasts. ' Distribution: Arctic and boreal species, occurs in the winter tolerably far south along the Eui'opean coasts of the Atlantic and its arms (at least as far as The English Channel). On the west coast of Norway and at the Færoes in quantities in the months of March — May, strangely enough in both localities in August with a less marked secondary maximum. T. gravida Cl. (PI. VI, tig. 4). Like the preceding species in almost every respect. Occurs of- ten together with it. Endocysts frequent in April. Distribution: On the whole the same as T. Nordenskioldi, but perhaps less decidedly arctic. T. hyalina (Grun.) Gran. (PI. VI, fl;^. 5). Gban L. 65, p. 4. 7. Clevei Gkan L. 64, p. 29, pi. 4, f. 60—62. C. hyalinus Grun. L. 48, p. 113, pi. 7, f. 128; L. 83, pi. 3, f. 28. Vix CoscinodiscHs knjophilus Grun. L. 83. pi. 3, f. 21. Gran remarks (L. 65 p. 4), that he had at first suspected his new species, T. Clevei, to be identical with Grunow's Coscinodiscus krijophlliis, but that he had not then seen the structure of the valve. Later, by the help of material from the Karajak Fiord (Greenland) he felt sure that the species were identical. As, however, Cleve (cfr. Gran) calls attention to the identity of C. hyuUnus Grun. in Arctic Diatoms (L. 48) with T. Clevei, Gran has altered the name. That T halassiosira Clevei Gran and Coscinodiscus hyalinus GiiuN. are identical, is quite certain. The only objection, which might be made to this, was, that in Grunow's figure of Coscino- discus hyalinus no asymmetrical marginal apiculus is to be seen. By the kind permission of the Riksmusæum in Stockholm 1 have been enabled to compare the slides (of mud from the Kara Sea) in which Grunow found C. hyalinus, and I can affirm that there is always a well marked asymmetrical marginal apiculus, larger than the others. That this is not to be seen in Grunow's figure is evidently (as is also the reason in the case of Porosira glacialis and others) because it may so easily be mistaken for a foreign body (dirt) which is only there as a matter of chance. (The preparations referred to were, in fact, rather dirty.) The specimens of C. hyalinus from the ivara Sea altogether plainly showed that this species is identical with tlu^ one which occurs on the northern coasts of Norway in the Spring. On the contrary, it seems to me to be open to considerable doubt as to whether C. hyalinus Grun. and C', kryophilus Grun. are identical. It is quite strange that Grunow, in an exceedingly careful and exact monograph on the family in question, should illu- strate and mention these species as different ones without hinting at any connection between them. Certainly he considered the asym- metrical apiculus to be characteristic of the one species only, C. kryophilus: but thei'e is, nevertheless, a great ditt'ereuce in the fi- gures, both with regard to structure and the marginal apiculi. These latter are particulai-ly small in C. kryophilus, while in C. hyalinus they are very plain and comparatively large. The struc- ture too of C. kryophilus is considerably coarser than that of C. hyalinus, even if one does not put too much weight on the fasci- culi, which in the figure of C. kryophilus are very clear and regu- lar, while in C. hyalinus they are indefinite. In material from Cape Wankarema (Vega Expedition) — ^hich material was also kindly lent to me by the Riksmusæum, Stock- holm — I really found a Coscinodiscus which seemed in every re- spect to correspond to C. kryophilus. It had just that characteristic form of the asymmetrical apiculus, which is figured by Grunow, and also the very small marginal apiculi, which are much less conspicuous in comparison to the asymmetrical apiculus than is the case in C. hyalinus. (PI. YI, f. 6, a, b.) Distribution: On the arctic coasts of Greenland, Fi'anz Jo- seph's Land and Jan Mayen. On the northern coasts of Norway, here only observed during the time of the inflow of diatoms, when the species occurs in large quantities. Towards the south, it has been found at Ona in Romsdal (in the Spring, not rare; cfr. Gean L. 70, p. 170). Seems not to occur with us in the months of June — February. If it does not then — as Gran supposes — „over-summer" at the bottom by the help of resting spores, it must — if it is actually found wanting in the other months of the year than just the Spring ones — every year be brought in from outside. T. decipiens Grun. (PI. VI, fig-. 3). Coscinodiscus decipiens Grun. in Van Heurck L. 88, pi. 91, f. 10 (from Lamlash Bay). A. Schmidt L. 126, pi. 3, f. 38. Thalassiosira gelatinosa Hensen L. 87, p. 87. Orthoslra angulata Greg. L. 74, p. 498, pi. 10, f. 43 and 43 b. As it seems to me beyond doubt that Grunow's Cose, decipiens is the same species a.s Hensen's Thalassiosira gelatinosa (as this species is understood by Cleve and others), I have found it neces- sary to alter the name, the more so as Hensen's description is very incomplete. I 'have not had any opportunity of making comparisons with Grunow's work (Algen und Diatoraaceen aus dem Kaspischen Meei'e in Dr. O. Schneider: — Naturwiss. Beitr. z. Kenntniss d. Kaukasus- lander, Dresden 1878); but as Grunow himself figures a specimen from Lamlash Bay in Van Heurck's Synopsis, I have thought that I could keep to this figure, which undoubtedly represents the same species which Cleve, and others after him, has called T. gelatinosa Hens. Grunow remarks that the species is identical with Orthoslra angulata Greg. Gregory's description (L. 74, p. 498) does very well too for our species, less the drawing. It is interesting that Gregory has found the species occurring in chains. His opinion, viz. that these chains are constructed similarly to those of Melosira (where the links touch each other), may no doubt be accounted for by the fact that the long marginal apiculi in a side view may so easily produce the same image as the cells. In the plankton from the northern coasts of Norway, this spe- cies appears to vary considerably. Two principal series of forms occur, the one with numerous marginal spines and a not very plain exeentric structure, but plain fasciculi; the other with fewer mar- I'lotistplankton. ijinal spines and plainer excentric secondai-y curves. Tlie figures referred to above belong- to the latter form. There appears, how- ever, to be so much variety, both in tlie nunibei' of tlie spines and tlicir distance from each othci-, and in the numbei- of the fasciculi, that it does not seem adviseablo to look upon the two series of forms as bcin<;- specifically different. As the species does not always appear to be riirlitiy under- stood, I iiavo added a few remarks on its structure. Around a central areole there are, as in t', cxcciitrinifi, 7 areoles forming, in conjunction with the central areole, an indistinct central rosette. From here the areoles decrease in size (|uickly and evenly right out to the margin. The secondary curves near the margin are nearly straight, often neai'ly to "A of the radius reckoned from the margin inwards, but further in, towards tlie centre, de- cidedly concave outwards, as in C. excentricus. The valve is de- cidedly convex on account of the high and abrupt marginal zone, and is thus easily discerned from C. excentrimis, which is nearly quite flat. Besides Thalassiosini decqAens always has the very long, bent marginal spines. An odd, asymmetrical, spine is always present. In side view the chains may very easily be taken for T. Nor- dennholdi, whose structure, however, is altogether different. Only observed during the inflow of diatoms, at which time it was abundant and frequently (especially in 1900) in large quantities. Distribution: Seems to be the same as that of Thcdassiosira JS^rdeiiskioldi and T. yravida, and is often met with in their com- pany. Yet, the secojidary maximum in August is wanting (on the west coast of Norway and the Faeroes), and the species is, on the whole, very rare except at the time of the Spring inflow. Co!!ieiiiowira Gean. C. polycborda. (Gran) Gran. As I have mentioned in an earlier paper, (L. 92, p. 24), this species may easily be confused with Coscinodiscus lineatm, as the characteristic transverse processus are often difficult to discover, and it seems possible that thy may be altogether wanting. The most frequent form with 6 fasciculi corresponding to 6 transverse pro- cessus •uill, thus, on the whole, have the same structure as Cose. Vineatus, only much finer. The specimens -which I have tabulated as Cose, linmtiis var. from a few places, are perhaps such forms of Coseinosira poJyehorda where the transverse processus are wanting. Marginal apiculi, granules and various other processus on the valves of diatoms seem to be rather inconstant, or at any rate very varying, which probably is owing to theu- being more or less in- completely silicated. Very rare, except at the time of the inflow of diatoms, when it is abundant. Distribution: On the whole, the same as 2 halassiosira Nor- denskioldi and T. grarula. It appears to occur all the year round on the west coast of Norway, where it has, at any rate, been found in most months; but it is common only during the inflow in the Spring. Poro»«ira n. gen. Structure of the valve is in the only known species very fine, in other respects as Podosira hormo'ldcs. Over tiie whole surface. thickest along the margin, scattered pores which probably are the perforations of more or less plain short, hollow spines. Such ai-e seen near tlie margin after destruction of the organic matter by burning. Inside tiie margin at one spot on the surface, a large, strong, odd (asymmetrical) spine. The connective zone is apparently for- med of numerous rings, which, owin-j- to their delicacy, arc rather indistinct. Forms chains, of two or a kw links, in which the latter are joined jtogether by a short, and very thick, central mucilaginous band, in wiiich one may with some difficulty discover fine threads. The band seems almost to be structureless and is as good a,s in- visible in water, but is easily seen on colouring with various dyes e. g. methylene blue and gentian violet. Chromatophores, on the whole, the same as in Coscinodiscus, polygonally roundish discs scattered along the valves and the con- nective zone. It seems to me to be somewhat unnatural, like Gkan, to refer the following species to the genus Lauderia. I think it would be best to limit that genus to those species only which form stiff chains of links which touch each other). On the other hand, the difference between this species and Thcdassiosira is so great that it should scarcely be considered as belonging to this genus either, notwithstanding that the chains, generally speaking, are similarly formed. There is too, according to my opinion, another important difference in the structure of these genera, wliicii 1 hope to be able to explain more fully on a later occasion. The genus Podosira forms stipitated chains (of 2 or a few in- dividuals). Perhaps it will, however, prove not to be possible to carry out a systematic classification based upon such principles, al- though it would seem to be an important considei'ation, in a natural system, whether a chain colony is swimming freely about (plantonic) or is fettered. On the other hand it may perhaps be found that several species of Coscinodiscus with scattered dots on the surface wiW find a more natural place in my proposed genus Porosira. P. glacialis (Grun.) (PI. VI, fio-. 7). Podosira hormoides var. glacialis Grux. L. 83, p. 56, pi. 5, f. 32. P. glaeialis (Geun.) Cl. L. 27, p. 24. Lauderia glacicdis (Geux.) Gran L. 68, p. 111. Out of tlie pores of the valve extend fine threads, which are only seen with difficulty, in a very thick, short mucilaginous cy- linder, which connects both valves. Probably similar threads ex- tend without this cylindei". There are also near the margin, long fine, mucilaginous threads which extend obliquely outwards and downwards, and probably serve as a floating apparatus. Precisely similar threads are found in Thalassiosira gravida, whose structure is remarkably like tliat of the above species. Very scarce except during the inflow of diatoms, but then very frequent and often in great quantities, especially in 1899. Distribution: Yet unsufficiently known, but probably, on the whole, the same as Thalassiosira Nordenskioldi. Also found in the Kara Sea. Numerous in the year 1900 during the inflow of dia- toms in the Spring on the west coast of Norway. 13 Kreletoiienia costatum (Greg.) Ci,. Distribidion : Very frequent on the west coast of Norway, often in lai-ge quantities. Occurs all the year round, but varies very much in quantity. On the north coast April— May ; here too there are very great variations in quantity. Also more or less frequent on the northei'n European coasts of the Atlantic and its arms. Known too from a few places on the tropical coasts (Ben- gal, Java, Hongkong, The West Indies) and from Japan. Paralia sulcata (Kbrb.) Cl. Hardly a true plankton form, at any rate not with us. Is vei-y frequent in bottom samples (cfr. the corresponding chapter) from Nordland and Finmarken. The few specimens which have been found in plankton samples, especially from deep water near the bottom, have probably come there quite by accident. The numer- ous valves which are found in bottom samples, cannot be considered to come from plankton, for then one would expect to find the species, at any rate occasionally, numerous in plankton samples, which is, however, as far as my experience goes, never the case, at least with us. Nothing is proved either by the presence of a few solitary individuals in samples taken far from the bottom, as such individuals may have been bi-ought there with algæ which have been torn away or — when they are found in diatom slides — may have been swallowed by Crustacea or similar small animals. Distrihut'wn : Frequent on the northern coasts of the Atlantic (on the American side from the coast of Central America) right up to Greenland and Franz Joseph's Land. Mentioned as occurring (February 1903) now and then in abundance in surface samples from the English Channel (L. 18). Il>alodlsoii!« Ehkb. H. scoticits (KiiTZ.) Grun. No true plankton foi'ni. Frequent in bottom samples (cfr. the coi'i-esponding cliapter). H. siihtilis liAti.. liAih. L. 8, p. 10. f. 12. In a plankton sample from Malangen '"A 1899, 0—300 m., a few single specimens were found which seemed to belong to this species. Hardly any true jjlunkton form. H. stuinger Baii,. Doubtful as a true plankton form. Neither is it frequent in bottom samples. Perhaps come in with algæ. Distribution: The northern European coasts of the Atlantic and its arms. On the west coast of Norway found all the year round in plankton, but always in small quantities. Mentioned from the English Channel in surface samples, occasionally numerous (especi- ally in February 1903), often together with Paralia sulcata. 3. Eupodisceæ. Roperia Ghun. in Van Heurck. (L. 88. pi. 118). R. tessellata (Rop.) Gruj -7. Eujiodiseus tcssellatus Rop. L. Adinocydus tessellatus Ralfs in Geun. 1. c. pi. 118, f. 6- 126, p. 19, pi. 3, f. 1 a, b. Peitch. (L. 123) p. 835. Peculiar structure (cfr. Van Heukck's Synopsis). It seems, however, that it may well be included, at any rate as a subgenus, in the genus Adinocydus. This beautiful species occurs only singly and rarely in the plankton, in deep water samples in 1899: — 'Vi The Vest Fiord I, 0—180 m.; "/i Senjen, 0—130 m.; ^'A Henningsvær, 0—250 m. Distribution: Occurs, according to Cleve, on the coasts of Scotland. Scarcely a literal, but certainly a true plankton form. Also known from the coasts of France and England. It has most Ukely been overlooked, and is probably more frequent than the few places mentioned would indicate. Also occurs on the west coast of Norway, but seldom (Feb. 1899). I have also seen it in oceanic plankton samples outside the noi'th west coast of Norway (S/S Michael Sars 1901). Judging from its occui'rence with us, it gives the impression of being a temperate, Atlantic, oceanic species. AuliHcniii Ehrb. L. .54, p. 270. A. sculptus (W. Sm.) Ei pi. 6, f. 3. Van Heueck zulptus W. Sm. L. 134, I, Ralfs in Peitch, (L. 123), p. 845, L. 88, pi. 117, f. 1 — 2. Eujwdiscus s, p. 25, pi. 4, f. 39. No true plankton form. Frequent in bottom samples, both from the northei'n and western coasts of Norway. (Cfr. the corres- ponding chapter.) 4. Asterolauipreæ. Artiiiopt.^'diiis iiiiiliilatiis (Bail. y) Rai.ks. I am not sure if this species really is a tiue plankton form. It occurs especially in deep water samples and always very scar- cely. It is not numerous in bottom samples either. Distribution : Has a wide distribution on the northern Euro- pean coasts of the Atlantic and its arms, and is found right up to Greenland. Is not considered by Cleve and Ostenfeld to be a genuine plankton form. Is mentioned (L. 18, IV) as occasionally frequent in surface samples from the English Channel (Feb. 1903). In the same samples, other doubtful plankton forms, such as Paralia sulcata and Byalofliscus sMUiicr, also occur more or less frequent. AKtoi'»lil|>liallis hvptactis (Bhéb.) Ralfs. Very rare: January 1899, especially in deep water samples. Distribution: With us a southern, oceanic species, which is Protistplanktc 99 very rare liotli on the west and north coast, and especially (only?) oexjurs in the winter months. According' to Cleve (L. 40, p. 284) widely distiibuted in the teinpci-ate part of the Atlantic. 5. Biddnlphieæ. Riddiilpliia (iitw. B. atirita (I .) liUÉU. Occurs vei-y larely in .lanuary and February, but much more frequently during the period of the diatom inflow, and then oc- casionally in larger quantities. Distribution : On the northei'n coasts of the Atlantic and its arms, right up to the arctic regions. (Greenland). Arctic and boreal species, on the west coast of Norway and otf the PaerOes only found in the months of Spring. B. mobiliensis Bail. Very rare and only singly. Distribution : Appears to be a southern form, which is not found all the year round on the coasts of Norway. On the west coast, it is most frequent in February and November. According to Cleve, in large quantities on the coast of the British Isles. February 1903 in abundance in the English Channel (L. 18, IV). Kncampia groenJaudica Cl. (PI. VI, tig. 8). Only found twice: Brettesnes, V4 1899, 0—3 m., Ingohavet ■*/4 1890, 0—300 m. Distribution: Arctic coa.st: Bafflns Bay, Da\is Strait, Green- land. Also found, single specimens, on the coasts of Bohuslan (Sweden) and Scotland. 6. Chætocereæ. Detoiinia conferracea (C'l.) Uran. Lauderia confer vacea Cl. L. ■2ti, p. 11, pi. II, f. 21. Detonula conferracea Gkan L. 68, p. 113. Specimens, which seemed to belong to this species, were seen singly in one of the samples: — Folstad V4 1899, in a surface sample (0—3 m.). Distribution: Baftin's Bay. A closely related species, D. ci/stifera Gran 1. c. p. 113, pi. 9, f. 15—20, has been found in the Lim Fiord in Denmark, in the Avinter. Bactei-osira Gran. L. 68, p. 114. B. fragilis (Gran) Gran 1. c. Laiuleria fragilis Gran L. 65, p. 115, pi. 1, f. 12 — 14. Occurs only during the inflow of diatoms in the spring months. Very frequent from the beginning of April, often in great quantities. Distribution: Does not occur on the west coast of Norway. Decidedly arctic species. Found earlier by Gran on the coast of Nordland and Finmark (April 1901.) Also known from Greenland, the sea west of Novaja Semlja (S/S Heimdal, May 1900, cfr. Gban L. 70, p. 170), several places on the north and west coasts of Iceland and Greenland (May and June 1898, cfr. Cleve L. 40, p. 331) and right up to Spitzbergen and the sea between Spitz- bergen and Iceland (May and July 1899; cfr. Cl. 1. c.) I>it.vliiini Ilriglitwclli (West.) Grin. Rare and scarce. Distribution: According to Cleve (L. 40, p. 325) very fre- quent in the English Channel, the North Sea and Skagerack, only scarce in the Atlantic. Can hardly be considered as native on the west coast of Norway, but is found here in small numbers in most months of the year. Numerous in February 1903 (scarce in May of the same year, L. 18, IV). Probably comes to us from the more southern coasts. Rhixofsoleniu Eiirb. R. alata Briohtw. Very rare and only scarce. Distribution: Widely distributed in the southern and northern temperate districts of the Atlantic. (Cf. Cleve L. 40, p. 337). In the English Channel occasionally frequent in February 1903 (L. 18, IV). Hardly to be considered native on the west coast of Norway, but found in small numbers m nearly all the months of the year. Comes to us as a southern oceanic form. Also known from Mediterranean, the Indian and the Pacific Ocean. R. stylitormis Briohtw. Only once found: — Skroven 72 1899, in a deep water sample, scarce. Distribution: Widely distributed from the wanner districts of the Atlantic right up to Greenland and Spitzbergen. On the west coast of Norway most frequent in the summer months. The same at the Faeroe Islands. Comes to us as a southern oceanic form. Also known from the Mediterranean, the Indian Ocean and the Pacific Ocean. R. ShrubsoU Cj 1899 Malangen Only found scarce in two samples: — 0—100 m., and -'/s 1900 Bålstad, 0—50 m. Distribution: Distributed over the temperate European coasts of the Atlantic. Occurs on the west coast of Norway and at the Faeroe Islands all the year round, most frequent in the summer months. According to Gran (L. 70, p. 173) at Ona (Romsdalen), occasionally, from May to October. It would thus appear to be stationary on the west coast of Norway, but not on the north coast. Quite exceptionally found northwards right up to Greenland. Also known from the Mediterranean, the Indian Ocean and Japan (cf. Cleve L. 40, p. 348). R. semispina Hens. Very rare and only singly. Distribution: Occurs as an oceanic form in large numbers in the arctic waters and in the boundaries of the arctic and Atlantic waters. Not frequent on the coast of the Faeroe Isles, nor on the west coast of Norway, where it is, nevertheless, found in most months, most frequent in November (1898). According to Cleve, also known from Hudson's Bay. R. setigera Brightw. Only once found: — '■'A 1899 Malangen, in a deep water sample. Distribution : Neritic species, scarcely to be considered native to the Norwegian coasts. Known from the coasts of France, Eng- land and Scotland, as well as from the Skagerack and the west coast of Norway. Gives the impression of being brought to the latter from the southern coasts in the autumn, but also occurs in the winter and spring months, but always in small numbers. Has therefore probably also a (smaller) northern area of distribution. (Is reckoned by Cleve to be a southern and northern ueritic species). C'oi'l'tliroii liystrix Hens. Very rare and only scarce. Distrihution : Comes to us as a southern oceanic form. On the west coast of Norway also very rare (1898). Rare too near the Faeroe Isles. Distributed in the Northern temperate Atlantic up to Iceland and East Greenland. C'liwtoeei'os Ehrb. C. horealis Bail. Occurs in numerous samples, but always in small numbers. Didrihut'ion: Arctic and northern temperate, oceanic form, wliich often occurs in very large numbers in arctic waters and in the boundaries between these and the Atlantic. On the west coast of Norway, 1898, more or less frequent in most months, especially in May — July. A similar state of things was found at the Faeroe Isles. C. deijsus Cl. Does not seem to he fi'e([uent. Is, however, perhaps often mistaken for othei- forms. Distrihution: Appeal's to be a southern form. C. dcnsus rudis ('l The form entered in the tables for 1900 under this name is uKcc^rtain. Although in side view as well as by its unu.sually coarse and coarsely dentate awns recalling the illustration of Chaetoæros hoycidis var. rudis in Cleve's Phytoplankton (L. 27) pi. 1, f. .5, it diti'ers in some other points; neither do I know the shape of the terminal awns nor their direction in Ceeve's species. It is, at any rate, very improbable that my species is the same as C. coarctatus Laud., which Cleve (L. 4(i, p. .306) mentions as being the right name for the foini which he previously called C. horealis var. rudis. C. danivits (Jl. Very rare and only scarce. Only found in a few samples: *li 1899, Helle, 0—3 m., -7:) 1900, HOla, 0—50 m. and the Sal- ten Fiord, V4 1900. Distrihution: The noilhern European coasts of the Atlantic and its arms as far as the Baltic. On the west coast of Norway it is found most montlis, but most fi-equeutly in the summer. C, criophilus Castr. Cfr. E. Jørgensen L. 92. Only once found: '-■'A 1899, in the sea off IngO. Distribution : Appears to be a decidedly arctic species, wliich often occurs in very large quantities in the arctic waters and in their boundary towaids the Atlantic. Its distribution is, howevei-, not sufficiently known, as it has been confused with the following species. C. coiirolutus Castr. Cfr. E. Jørgensen L. 92. Frequent during the inflow of diatoms in spring, often rather numerous. Otherwise scarce. Distrihution: Appears to be an arctic and boreal species, which often occurs in large quantities in the arctic waters and then- boundary towards the Atlantic (Jan Mayen 1897). On the west coast of Norway found all the yeai- round, but always in small numbers. It may be possible that this species is neritic rather than oceanic. Frequent in May 1903 in the English Channel (L. IS, IV). C. atlanticus Cl. Frequent, but only as an exception somewhat numerous, gener- ally only scarce. Distribution: Ai'ctic and boreal oceanic form, often occurring in vei'y large quantities in the arctic waters and their boundary towards the Atlantic. (Cfr. E. Jørgensen L. 92). On the west coast of Norway found in most months, but, as a rule, scarce. Common off the Faei'iies in spring. C. dcciph-ns: Cl. Frequent during the diatom inflow in spring, otlierwise rare and scarce. Decidedly more frequent in the samples of 1900 than in those of 1899. Distribution: Arctic and boreal oceanic form which seems to bear the change from the arctic to the Atlantic watci-s particularly well. Often occurs in abundance in the boundary waters. On the west coast of Norway, rather connnon, reaching its maximum in Api'il (1898). This also the case at the Faeroe Islands. Also very abundant on the west coast of Norway in the montlis July — September (1898). C. teres ('l. Frequent in the samples, but always in small numbers. Distribution: Arctic (oceanic?) and boreal form, . which only as an exception appears to be found more numerous. On the west coast of Norway very scarce, though found in most months. Near the Faeroe Islands frequent in the months March — .liuic, at other times rare. At Ona (cfr. Gran L. 70, p. 178) fi'oni March to July, most frequent hi April. My opinion is that this is an oceanic species I'ather than a neritic one, and is hardly native on our coasts. (Has been repeat- edly found with endocysts, therefore, according to Guan, neritic, hut a hinii which may often drift far out into the open sea). ProtiHtpliinktii ( . CDtitortiis Sem IT. Generally speakiiiL;- rare ami seaire. only oceasiunally imuierous (luiini; the diatom intiow in the sprin? of 18'.)5). DiatrihKt'wn: More or less frequent on the noi'tliern Hnrojtean coasts of the Atlantie and its arms. On the west coast of Norway frequent, often numerous; most likely here native. \'ery scarce (iu thiec samples) and only singly. lUiitrUmtion : On the west coast of Norway somewhat fre- quent, especially at the beginnin.<;' of the diatom inflow (March 1898). Does not occur iu all the inonths of the year here neither. Off the Facroe Islands not vnw in the months of Auo-. — September 1902. otherwise only once in March 1901 (cfr. Ostenfeld L. 116, p. 573). According to Gkan L. 70, p. 179 on the north east coast of Iceland, scarce. Otherwise found more or less scarce on the coasts of the Noi'th (Sea and Skageraek. AccordiuiT to Gran, this species is neritic (endocysts being found). My opinion is that it is probably neritic. but not likely to prove native with us. r. constrictus (Iran. Very rare and scarce, only found twice: -■'A 1899, in the sea off IngO, 0—300 m.; Vo 1899, VardO, 0—200 m. Distribution : Occurs on the northern coasts of the Atlantic on the American side, off Iceland, the Faeroe Islands, Great Bri- tain and the coasts of the North tSea. On the west coast of Nor- way found in 1898 nearly all the year through, most numerous in April and November. Does not appear to be native on the nor- thern coasts of Norway. C. laciniosus Schl-tt. On the whole rather rare and scarce, although occasionally more frequent in the month of May 1899. Distribution: Northern temperate coast form. On the west coast of Norway frequent; occurs during most months, but seldom numerous. Rare round the Faeroe Islands. At Ona in Romsdalen March— October, reaching its maximum in May. iCfr. Gean L. 70, p. 178). C. brevis Schitt. Cfr. E. .JoRGEXSEX L. 91. p. 12 and Ostenfeld L. 114, p. 295. Very rare and scarce, only found in two samples: V* 1899, Helle, 0—8 m.; 7* 1900, the Folden Fiord I, — 100 m. Distribution : Not sufticiently known, as this species has been confused with the foregoing one. Rare on the west coast of Norway, and generally found singly; noticed in the months of August, No- vember and December. In the English Channel in May 1903, scarce. Does not appear to be native on the northern coasts of Norway. C. Scliiittii Ci.. Very rare and scarce, only found in two samples: Lyngen, ■Vi 1899, 0—50 m.; Malangen =7i 1899, 0—300 m. Distribution: Southern form, distributed along the coasts of the North Sea. Rather rare on the west coast of Norway, (1898: j Augu.;— September, November— December). Often found iu the [ open sea. Hound the Facmc Islands, both in an ea.sternly and wcst- ernly direction, at considerable distance out. in quantities in .May 19n:{ (!,. is. |\'). [^cems to come to us as a .southern oceanic form. C. WilUi GriA.N, Raie and .scarce, only found in a few samples. Most likely the same form which is mentioned by Ostexfei-u from the Faeroe Islands (L. IKi, p. 573) as an intermediate form between C. Schtlttii and C. WiUci. Distribution: Freiiuent on the west coast of Noruay and probably native here. Distributed along the coa.sts of the North Sea, and extends farther northwards than the foregoing species. Does not. however, appear to be native to the northern coa.sts of Norway. C. diadema (Eiihu ) (;ra.s. Conmion and in 'jn-at (juantities during the diatom intiow in spring; at other times rare and singly. < )ften found with end- ocysts. It is possible that there aix'. in this species, still included spe- cifically different forms. Distribution: Arctic and boreal coast form. Rare round the Faeroe Islands. Found in most months of the year, but as a rule not numerous, on the west coast of Norway. Very frequent at Ona. in Romsdalen, in March— April, less so in June— July. (Grax L. 70, p. 179). C. furcillHtiis li.Mi.. In large quantities during the diatom intiow in the spring of 1899, less abundant in the samples of 1900. May easily be con- fused with other species, when its characteristic endocysts are wanting. In 1900 they were mostly absent. Distribution: Arctic coast form, widely distributed from the coasts of Iceland right up to the arctic regions, both on the Ameri- can and European side. Wanting on the west coast of Norway and round the Facroe Islands. Frci|uent in March — April at Ona (Gran L. 70. p. Iso). Very rare and scarce, only found in two of the samples, Hel- ligvær, '-/il899, 0—50 m., and Bålstad, ='/3 190n, 0—50 m. Distribution: Southern coast form from the temperate, Euro- pean coasts of the Atlantic, northwaids to Skagerack. the North Sea and the west coast of Noi'way. On the latter coast, frequent in nearly every month of 1S9S, most numerous during the .summer. Ona: March. July— August, occasionally (Ghan L. 70, p. 179). Very seldom noticed as far north as Spilzbergon. Not men- tioned from the Faeroe Islands. C. dehilis Cl. Frequent during the diatom intiow in spring, often in large quantities; at other times very scarce. Distribution : Distributed along the northern European coasts of the Atlantic, the North Sea and Skagerack. On the west coast of Nonvay and round the Faeroe Islands very frequent, with maxi- mum twice a year, in the spring months and in August. Also found near Greenland. E. Jørgensen. C. socialis Lai u. In large quantities dm-ing the diatom intiow in spring. Endo- cysts very frequent. Distribution: Arctic coast form. Occurs in quantities also on the west coast of Norway during the diatom inflow in spring. Only occasionally round the Faeroe Islands. I b. Peniiatæ. 7. Synedreæ- Tlialassiothrix Cl. et Grin. T. lonøssinia ('l. et Grun. In 1899 rare and scarce, in 1900 not observed. DistrUmtion : Oceanic species, distributed over the northei'n part of the Atlantic from the American to the European side, right up to Spitzbergen. On the west coast of Norway in 1898 found during most months of the year, but always scarce. Very rare round the Faeroe Islands. T. nitzscbioides Grun. (PI. VI, tig-. 11). Gkun. in VH. Syn. (L. 88), pi. 43, f. 7—10. (In the tables T. Frauenfeldii and T. Fr. var. nitzschioides). This species is certainly the same as the one wliich, in nearly all plankton tables, is called T. Frauenfeldii. Strangely enough, Cleve refers (L. 40, p. 356 & 357) to VH. Synopsis pi. 37, f. 11— 12 and, for „the variety" javanica Grun., f. 13. The species which corresponds to figures 11 and 12, and which I know from the Indian Ocean, is, however, very different from the one which is so frequently seen in the coast plankton in our latitudes. The „variety" javanica Grun. does corre.spond better with regard to the closeness of the puncta, but, in other respects, differs so much that it can hardly be considered to be the same as our common plankton spe- cies. On the other hand, it is also in structure so different from what is taken to be the main species that it cannot be united with it unless, (as perhaps is the case, although I have never seen any mention of such) there are a number of intermediate forms. But our plankton species, as far as I can see, corresponds in every respect to 'Thalamothrix? nitzschioides Gnvs. It is true that this species does not answer well to the characteristics of the genus Thalassiothrix, but is yet so different in important points from the genus Synedra that I think it should better be referred as a sub- genus 7 haJassionema (Grun.) to Thulussiothri.r rather than be re- tained in the genus Synedra. 1 have earlier thought, from the description given by De 'Joni of the structure of these forms (L. 50, p. 672 — 673), that all three {T. Frauenfeldii, T. javanica and 7'. nitzschioides) should be con- sidered as one species (cfr. E. Jørgensen L. 91, p. 22), but have since not found, after my own experience, any definite reason for so doing. More or less frequent, especially during the diatom inflow in the spring of 1900, but never noticed in such large quantities as in more southerly samples. Distribution: This species is ceilainly neritic, but the genuine T. Frauenfeldii is probably oceanic. Is widely distributed along the coasts of the northern Atlantic and its arms, northwards as far as Greenland. On the west quantities in the spring. coast of Norway common, in large Fragilaria Lyngb. F. oceanica Cl. Cl. L. 22, p. 22, pi. -1, f. 25 a, b. Gran L. 65, p. 8, pi. 1, f. 6-9. In large quantities during the diatom inflow, at other times absent. Strange to say it appears all at once in large quantities. Distribution: Arctic coast form. According to Ciæve also found in Hudson's Bay. Is not found so far south as Bergen, on the west coast of Norway. At Ona frequent in March — April, according to Gran (L. 70, p. 180). JF. cylindrus Grdn. (Plate VI, fig. 9). Gbun. L. 83, p. 55, pi. 2, f. 13. Gran L. 65, p. 8, pi. 1, f. 4—5. Occurs together with the preceding species in large quantities in spring. Distribution: On the coast of North Siberia, Frantz Joseph's Land and Greenland; in quantities in May in Davis Strait (Cleve L. 26). Probably a neritic arctic species. Not mentioned before from Norway. In the Barents Sea, 71" 48' n. lat., 49" 38' e. long. 'Vs 1900, numerous together with the preceding species. F. islandica Grun. (PI. VI, fig. 10). Grunow in VH. L. 88, pi. 45, f. 37. In some few samples from 1900 during the diatom inflow in spring a species was observed, which I think is identical with the one above mentioned. It occurred sparingly, but in rather long chains. I have not, however, succeeded in seing it in valvar ^iew. Distribution: Jan Mayen (1. c.) By Cleve also once observed numerous in the North Sea (L. 27, p. 3), together with northern neritic species. 8. Plagiograinineæ. <•!> |ilio(l<'siiiis Williams (W. Sm.) Grun. Hardly a genuine plancton form. Here, as on the west coast of Norway, probably brought in by (or torn ott' from) species of fixed algæ (sea — weed). g. Tahellarieæ. €iraiiiiiiato|thora Ehrb. G. islandica Ehrb. and G. oceanica Ehrb. Not genuine plankton forms, only torn off from algae, or car- ried on with them. ItliailMloiit'iiiii KiTZ. R. miinitum Knz , K. iircimtuiii (I.VNOii.) Kit/, iin.l K. iiilriiiticiim KiTZ. Nut tri'uuiiie plankton I'onns. most likely by iiceidunt brought alonsr tVom tixeci al^ae. Striatflla unijniueUitn (Ly.nob.) Ao. Very rare and scarce. The Vest Fiord '/a 1H99, 0—200 m., the Ogs Fiord II, '^3 1899. (i— 200 m., and the Skjerstad Fiord V, 'A 1900, 0-420 in. Hardly a genuine plankton fonn, by chance brought in from fixed algae. D'lstr'iliui'niH : Widely distributed along the temperate coasts of the Atlantic. .\lso mentioned from Finmai'k, where it, however, to judge from the bottom samples, api)ears to be rare. JO. Nitzschieæ. Raeillariii sucialis Greg. Greg. L. 75, p. 8u, pi. 1, f. 45. VH. Synopsis (L. 88), pi. 61, f. 8. (Wrongly entered in the tables as B. paradoxa). Not a genuine plankton form. Only very sparsely and quite exceptionally noticed in the plankton. Frequent in the bottom samples. Diatribtition : The coasts of the Atlantic from Portugal to the arctic regions (Sea of Kara). Also mentioned from the Baltic and the Antilles. \it7,!iicliia Hass. N. seriata Cl. (includinj; A', frandulftita ('l.) Only found during the inflow of diatoms in spring, then almost always frequent, and often numerous. Distribution: Arctic and boreal species. It seems to be a neiitic species, which may perhaps be native to our west coast where it is found more or less abundantly during most months (of 1898), often in quantities, most numerous in May— June. Ofif the Faeroe Islands generally very sparsely, but numerous in June 1898. Also known from Greenland, Spitzbergen and the Barents Sea (S/S Heimdal 1900, -'A, 71" 48' n., 49" 38' east, sparsely). Cfr. Ci-EVE L. 40, p. 335, where he mentions the species as being specially distributed between Scotland, Iceland and Greenland. He also (1. c.) mentions that var. fraudulcnta is known from the Mediterranean. It is therefore probable that there are two species ; the one, N. fraudulentn Cl. having a southern distribution and being probably oceanic, while the other is neritic and arctic. A', delicatissima Oi,. Cl. L. 27, p. 24, pi. 2, f. 22. This species is so small, more particularly so narrow, that it must be supposed as a rule to go through the net. In the plank- ton material at my disposal it has certainly in the majority of cases been retained by the colonies of Phæocyctis. Like the preceding, only found during the inHow of diatoms in .spring, then fre(|uent, and in all probability much more so than would appear from the tables. Distrihutiou: Probably, like the preceding sjiecies, really an arctic, neritic species, which, however, seems to thrive in the water mixed with the warmer Atlantic .\lso, like the preceding species, found off the Faeroe Islands. Known too from Spitzl)ergen and Skagerack where it occurs in winter. At Ona (cfr. (Jhan I^. 70, p. 181) frequent in June— July 1900. N. hyhrida «bin. (PI. VI, Hk. 12). ('i,, and (iui N. L. is. p. 71i. pi. .■), f. '.t5. \'ll. Synopsis (L. 8H) pi. (iO, f. 4-5. I have included, undei- this heading, a number of forms which frequently occurred during the inflow of diatoms in the spring of 1899 and 1900, although generally only in small numbers. They are not in every instance entered in the tables, and are consider- ably more frequent than would appear from them. Seems to be a genuine plankton form. I have illustrated some of these forms (PI. VI, tig. 12). Figure 12 a represents those wliich are most fre- quent, but they are most often less distinctly constricted in the middle, often of an even breadth. Strise I have only seen on the one illustrated by flg. 12 e (about 27 on 10 iJ.) which differs considerably from the ordinary form, also in the number of puncta on its keel (13 on 10 |i). The closely allied species A', (lu/hrida var. ?) peUucida Grun. has the puncta on the keel somewhat closer (13-14 on 10 |i) but in otliPi- icspects it answers better to the forms which I have ob- served. Geunow mentions (1. c.) that there are a number of intermediate forms, which it is difficult to define, between .V. hilohnta and -V. hyhrida. All my forms have the keel puncta more widely separa- ted in the middle; they are often comparatively long and there is a decided trace of a central nodule. The keel appears to be very eccentric — 1 have, however, only in a couple of instances seen the species in valvar view, cfr. fig. 12 d — so that there seems to be a connection with the forms which are related to A'. duhia W. Sm. Seems to be a genuine plankton form. It is (with us I only slightly siliceous and often occurs in pairs, (juite rarely also in short chains of several links. Distribution: Aictic and boreal coast form. Known from Greenland, Spitzbergen, the Barents Sea, (S/S Heimdal 1900, ",;. 71" 48' n., 49" 38 east, in small numbers, the same form as with us) and the Kara Sea. Cfr. 1)k Toni (L. 50, p. 513) who men- tions it as occurring also on the coasts of Great Britain. N. hilohata W. Sm. W. S.M. L. 134, p. 42. pi. 15. f. 113. VH. Synopsis p. 175, pi. GO. f. 1. Occurs very seldom and only singly. Hardly a true plank- ton form. Distrihittion : Widely distributed on the temperate European coasts of the .\tlantic. iV. frigida Grit;. Cl. and Gkln. L. 48, p. 94, pi. 5, f. 101. Rather rare and always in small numbers, there is a form 104 which coi responds to the illustration mentioned whei-e there is ijixeu a front view of this species. Besides typical forms, others also occur which are hardly any broader in the middle. I have not seen this species in valvar view. It seems unlikely that my species should have the characteristic form of valve as illustrated by Oestrup, L. 1.38, pi. 8, f. 99 a— e. Distribution: Arctic, neritic form, known from Greenland, the Barents Sea and the Kara Sea. N. arctiea Cl. (PI. VI, fig. 1.5). Cl. L. 26, p. 21, pi. 1, f. 21. 22. Rather frequent, but always in small numbers, there occurs a species wliich it has been difficult to determine with certainty. It was noticed both in 1899 and 1900, but only during the inflow of diatoms, and is only entered in the tables for 1900, under the name of N. recta Hantzsch, which is, however, a wrong' one. I thought afterwards that it might perhaps be a straight form of the high arctic species N. lævissimu Grun., but finally held to the designation ^V. arctiea Cl. I have also here observed a number of forms which are more like each other- than the corresponding ones of N. hyhrida. The keel is very eccentric, the puncta very Uttle lengthened in width, 7V2— 10 on 10 |i, the two in the middle being more widely separated and there is a ti-ace of a central nodule. The valve is narrow lanceolate, acuminate. The cell in side view is long and narrow, linear, somewhat broader in the middle, with truncate ends. The connective zone longitudinally striated. Varies much in length, 60—100 ij., the cell is 7—12 \i. broad in side view, the valve 4—5 |j. broad. Strangely enough no striæ were to be seen. All the specimens I examined were, however, thin walled. Seems to be with us a true plankton foi'ui. Distribution: On the north east coast of Siberia (Cape Wan- karema) and Da\1s Strait. Probably an arctic coast form. N. angularis W. Sm. (PI. VI, fig. 14). \V. Sm. L. 134, pi. 13, f. 117. VH. L. 88, p. 177, pi. 62, f. 11-14. Not a true plankton form. Cfr. the chapter on bottom samples. Rare and scarce dui-ing the diatom inflow a little form occurred (PI. VI, flg. 14, a, b), which answci's well to A^. angularis var. karlana Grun. (L. 48, p. sy, pi. .5, f. 100). Length 36— 54 |i.. (Lille Molla, 'A 1899; Seivaagcn, Vj 1900). A'. spalhtilatH Breb. Lkki;. in W. Sm. L. 134, I, p. 40, pi. 31, f. 268. VH. Synopsis (L. 88), p. 177, pi. 62, f. 7 — 8. Very rare and only singly. Not a genuine plankton form. Occasionally found in bottom samples. fCfr. the cori'csponding chapter). N. lanceolata W. Sm. W. Sm. L. 134, I, p. 40, pi. 14, f. 118. VH. Synopsis (L. 88), pi. 68, f. 1—4. Like the pi-ecedinff species. PI. VI, fig. 13 represents a very small form, which answers very well to A'. lanceolata var. p/jgmaea Cl. L. 45, p. 481; L. 26, p. 22, pi. 1, f. 19, 20. Length 30 |j., breadth 4 [i.. The keel puncta are small and close together, about 14 on 10 |jl, the two middle ones more vndely separated, with a trace of a central nodule between them. Tills form which occurred '/* 1899 Lille Molla can, however, hardly belong to N. lanceolata on account of the keel puncta being so close together and also because of the distinct trace of a cen- tral nodule. Cleve mentions this form from Cape Wankarema and Davis Strait. N. longissima (Breb.) R.^lfs Rai-e and occurs only in small numbers. N. closterinm (Ehrb.) W. Sm. Of very rare occurrence in the samples. It does not seem possible always with certainty to distinguish between this species and X. longissima. Hardly a genuine plankton form. Distribution: Common temperate coast form, widely distributed on the coasts of Europe. N. Mitcbelliana Greexl. Greenleaf L. 73, p. 107. Only noticed a couple of times. Not a genuine plankton form. II. Siirirelleæ. ^inriri'lla Turp. S. tastiiosR Ehrb. and S. lata W. Sm. are not genuine plankton forms. Cfr. the chapter on bottom samples. CampylodiMciiK Ehrb. C. Thuretii Breb. and C angularis Greg. occur frequently in plankton samples and now and then not in small numbers, but they must, nevertheless, without doubt be looked upon as 'being accidentally brought in, as they are rather com- mon in bottom samples. C. Ealfsii W. Sm. is also rather often found in plankton samples. 12. Cocconeideæ. <'0). pi. 1, f. 10?, non (Juis. [.. 4S, p. 22, pi. 1, f. 5. In long, very compact chains, which strongly remind one of Fi-agUaria oceanica and also show a similar comparatively coarse striation in side view. I have only once succeeded in seeing the valve from above, and then it was very evident that the species must be another than (iRUNow's, the distinct striation being also a proof of this. A. tæniafa in the various publications on plankton seem to be ditferent species, and one of them is probably the same as the one I have found. As I have not clearly seen the otiicr valve, 1 will not venture to settle the species more definitely. The genuine Achnanthes tceiiiata Grun. is, however, ([uite another species. By the kindness of the Riksmuseum in Stock- holm. I have been enabled to examine the original preparations of bottom mud from the Kara Sea (cfr. Gruxow 1. c). I have also had an opportunity of finding the species in some of the mud collected, and in this way I have become convinced that the spe- cies really does — as mentioned by Clevk — form long, compact chains (PL VIII, fig. 27). Grunow's illustration, which is very correct, very considerably resembles Navicida Vanhoffeni Gran. There are, doubtless, here very closely related species, but they form probably two, perhaps even three, quite distinct series. In this case, as so often, a remarkably large quantity of species is found in the arctic diatom plankton. There are at least here four Achmoithes species wliich must be kept distinct. Fh'st we have Grunow's Achnanthes tceniatu, which is comparatively thick-walled and strongly siliceous, and can therefore, hardly be the same as that which Oestrup mentions and illustrates (L. 139, pi. 2, f. 15) his being exceedingly thin-walled. Then we have the closely allied species A. (tæniata var.?) hyperborea Grcn. L. 83, p. 50, pi. 1, f. 4, 5. As far as I can see, this is the same species as I have illustrated pi. VIII, f. 28, from 71" 48' n. lat., 49" 38' e. long. "'A 1900 (Barents Sea, S S Ilcimtlal, a sample kindly given me by Dr. Gran). To these must be added the form which I have found in our northern coast plankton and Oestrcp's from Greenland. Rather rare, but occurs in very long chains, only found durinir the inflow of diatoms in spring. JJistribution: A. tæniata is an arctic, neritic species (Green- land, Spitzbergen and Kara Sea), which also appears to occur occasionally in large numbers in the Baltic Sea. 14. Naviciileæ. >'avii'iila KoKY. A', directa K.m.ks. A. ScHM. L. 128, pi. 47, f. 1—."). Rather frequent durint;- tJie inflow of diatoms in spring; but seldom occurs in any (luantity. Is most likely a genuine plank- ton form. Distribution: Widely distributed in various forms on the coasts of tiie Atlantic, right up to the arctic region.s. Also on the west coa.st of Norway (spring, I'.iou). N. karianit (!hln. (IM. VII. tit'. '■i\). Ci-. and (iRiN. L. 4s. p. .{'J, pi. 2, f. 44. Under this name, a .species is entered in the tables which occurred fre([uently both in 1H99 and 1900, but only at the time of tiie inflow of diatoms, and seldom numerous. It is very thin walled, and most likely is a genuine plankton form. It has the usual two chromatophores, one on each side (jf the connective zone, .symmetrically situated. This form does not, however, answer well to the |trincipal species and the illustiation referred to, but very much better to N. frigida Grun. L. 83, p. 51, pi. 1, f. 25, which Cleve (L. 25) considers to be a variety of X. kaiiana. The form which I have observed is, at any rate, closely allied to N. kariana. The same form occurred in the sample before mentioned from Barents Sea, S/S Heimdal, 1900, (cfr. under follow- ing species) in which the more thick-walled forms answered very exactly to N. frigida. Such a form is illustrated in pi. \'ll, fig. 21. Distribution: N. kariana seems to be an arctic, and boreal neritic form, which also occurs in the North Atlantic. It is known fiom Greenland, Jan Mayen and the Kara Sea. The same form, which was found in the plankton from the northern coasts, also occurred in the spring 1900 on the west coast of Norway. I have a few times noticed delicate chains of a diatom which is probably a Navicula, and very likely the species .just mentioned (N. frigida). The chains were much twisted. (Fl. VII, fig. 21 f).. N. Vanhoffeni (iRA>. (IM. VII, ti'r. 22). N. septentrionalis Cl. L. 40, non Oestb. Frequent during the inflow of diatoms in spring, occasionally in large numbers. Otherwise absent. I should think it rather certain that this species is not a genuine Naiicula. As I cannot, however, at present find any better place for it, I have entered it under its usual name. In the tables, I tried at first to distinguish between N. feptentriounlis and N. Vanhoffeni, as these are ordinarily understood, but I had to give it up later, and this is the case in the tables for 1900. At any rate, there is only one species in the plankton under consideration. It is narrow boatsliapcd ; but as the connective zone is very slightly siliceous, it does not stand being treated with acids (but very well being ignited on cover-glass) and it is, there- fore, very difficult to get a valvar view of it. As Gran (1. c.) mentions two species and under A', septentrio- nalis remarks that it may easily be recognized in side view by the plain stauros, it seems to me that the central nodule here sug- gests the possibility of a stauros, which perhaps does not exist. Gkan does not illustrate any central nodule in side view in his figures of N. Vanhoffeni (f. 32 b). This nodule is, however, plainly to be seen on specimens in my material, which in every respect (when seen as chains) answer so remarkably well to N. Vanhoffeni that I have not the least doubt that they really belong to this species. With regard to the spaces between the links of the chains, tliey are, to be sure, most often seen in specimens, pro ■■ • 14 ion rgene3r±ca-±i3_±ales. I. Proroccntraceae Sikin. Proroceiitriiiii micnns Kiiun. Only once found, very scarce: Henningsvær, '"A 1899, 0— 180 m. On account of its small size it goes through the net. Distribution: Probably a coast form from the temperate European coasts of the Atlantic and its arms. Known from the North Sea, (from the English Channel, not rare. May 1903 L. 18, IV), Skagerack, the Baltic and the west coast of Norway, here rather scarce. Probablv brought to us from southern coasts. IkiiiopliyMis Ehrb. D. acuta Ehrb., .Jorg. .TuKG. L. 91. p. 28, pi. I, f. 2. Rather common in the samples, but always rather scarce. Distribution: Seems to be a northern, but not an arctic, form, which is frequent both in the open sea and on the coasts. Kno\\n from the watei-s between Norway, Scotland, Iceland and Greenland as well as from the North Sea, Skagerack and the Baltic. It appears to be stationary on the west coast of Norway and near the Faeroe Islands and Iceland, probably also on the northern coasts of Norway, where it has been found at several places by Gkan in the summer and autumn months. (Cfr. Gran L. 67). D. uorregica Clap, et Lachm., .Jorg. JuRG. L. 91, p. 29, pi. 1, f. 3—6. Occurs in many of the samples, but always in small lunnbers. Distribution: Not sufficiently known. The species, however, appears mostly to have the same distribution as D. acuta. Seems to be a northern form. Known fi'om the North Sea (from The English Channel, r May 1903), Skagei'ack and Cattegat, Scotland, Jan Mayen and the west coast of Norway, where it is found, but only sparsely, during nearly all the months of the year. D. acuminata Clap, et Lachm., .Jorg. J(')EG. L. 91, p. 30, pi. I. f. 7—9. D. Vauhoffhii Ostenf. Very rare and scarce. Distribution: Not sufficiently known. Seems to be a northern form, but scarcely native with us. Rather frequent on the west coast of Norway in the summer and autumn (of 1898), but gener- ally scarce. Also known from Greenland, Iceland, the Faeroe Is- lands (very rare) and the Baltic Sea (Levandee). Perhaps it comes to our west coast from Iceland. D. rotuitdata I'lap. et Lachm. D. Michaelis auct p. p. Rare and scarce. Found in small numbers by Gran (L. 67) at several places on the nortiiern coast of Norway in the mont lis of July— Octobex 1898—99. Distribution: Seems to be a northern, oceanic form. KnoA\n from the North Sea (southwards to the English Channel, r in I'c- bruary and May 1908), Skagerack and also mentioned from tiie Baltic. On the west coast of Norway in the months of April — De- cember 1898, always in small numbers. D. bomunculus Stein. Stein L. 13.'), pi. 21. f. 1—8. Only found in one of the sanii)ics (two indi\'iduals). Helligvær 1-/, 1899, 0—50 m. Distribution : Widely disti-ibuted in the warmer parts of tiie teiii|ieriite Atlantic, and only occasiunally and cMcptionallx carried as lar north as Lofoten. Docs not occnr on the west coast of Noi'wav. l*«Ml«tlaiii|»a>> ji:ilmii,cs Stkin. Very rare and only singly: The Vest Fiord I, '',i 1S99 0—50 m. and 0—180 m.), Tranodybet -/z 1900, 0— (i(iu m. and The Folden Fiord "/-i l^'OO, 0—530 m. With us a foi'ni which is only accidentally and exceptionally broui;ht in from the south. Disiribittioii : Oceanic form, widely distributed in the tropical and temperate parts of the Atlantic, northwards in the summer (cfr. Clevi: !,. lu, p. 27r,) right up to near Iceland. On the west coast ot Norway very rare and only singly. Seems to be cosmo- politan in all the warmer seas, as it is also mentioned from the Mediterranean, the Ked >Sea. the Indian Ocean and the Pacific Ocean. Oxvtoxi diplocoitns Stei.n Only one specimen found (therefore determination not fully reliable): The Skjerstad Fiord V, '74 1900, ti — 420 m. Like the foregoing, an accidental southern form. Distribution: Southern oceanic form, from the warmer parts of the temperate Atlantic. On the west coast of Norway also only once found in 1898. P.vi-opliarn.>< horologium Steix. Kare and scarce; found, however, in several samples. Seems to be entirely absent during the spiing diatom inflow; then it was only found in one deepwater sample from one of the flords: The Folden Fiord 7* 1900, 500—400 m. Distribution : Southern form, according to Cleve, properly a tropical oceanic foi-m. Probably has a wide distribution in the warmer temperate waters of the Atlantic. As it is easily over- looked, its distribution is hardly yet quite sufficiently known. Its comparative fi'equency on the coasts of Norway might sug- gest either that it is able to thrive well in the coast waters at our latitudes, or that thci-c are two diti'erent species of which the one is a tropical oceanic one not occui'iing with us. i'aliiini rttiviihiUim {Va.sv. .t Laciim.) Bltschi.i. Very rare and genei'ally in small nnmheis. As it is, however, so small that it is not retained by the net, it is probably found more frequently than appears. Was found in 1900 principally in deep water samples. Distribution: Not sufficiently known. Is considered by Cleve (L. 40, p. 277) to be a neritic northern or arctic form. It is found most frequently on the American side. On the west coast of Nor- way in 1898, generally A-ery scarce. i>i|>lo|>Nalis Icnticitla liKm.ii. Rather fre(iuent, especially in tolerably deep water, often i-ather numerous. Seems to be altogether absent during the spring diatom inflow. Gran (L. fi7) found it at several places on the northern coast of Norway in the months of .July— October 1898—99, but generally in very small numbers. Distribution: According to Cleve, a southei-n oceanic species, widely distributed in the warmer parts of tlie temperate Atlantic. Also known from the North Sea (from The Enghsh Channel, Feb. and May 1903) and the Cattegat. Rather frequent on the west coast of Norway (1898). Peridiiiiaiii Ehub. P. depressiun Bail. Very frequent, often in quantities. Much scarcer during the .spring diatom inflow. Grax found it at Bodti and in the Eids Fiord in the months of July— October 1898—99 frequently. Distribution : Seems to be an arctic and boreal neritic species, which is stationary both on the noith and west coast of Norway. Widely distributed in the colder pai't of the northern Atlantic, chiefly on the coasts, from the American side, to Greenland, Ice- land, (Faeroe Islands, the North Sea), NorAvay and right up to Spitz-bergen and Novaja Semlja. P. oceanicum Vami()f. Surely a good species. Was not so rare in 1899, but always in small numbers. Not noticed in 1900. Absent during the spring diatom inflow. Distribution: Southern oceanic species which, according to Cleve is widely distributed in the warmer part of the temperate Atlantic, and penetrates northwards right up to Greenland. Very rare and scarce round the Faeroe Islands and on the west coast of Norway. Also known from the Red Sea and the Indian Ocean. P. divergens Ehbh. P. knticitlare (Eiirb.) Jurg. L. 91, p. 37. As this .species is now in most works on plankton mentioned under the name of P. divergens Ehrb., I have, at any r^te pro- visionally, found that I ought to use this name instead of the more explicit one, P. hmticidar.'. I hope in a later Avork to be able to 110 give a more detailed description of tlie species of Pendimm which oc- cur on the coasts of Norway, but as this work is, as yet, only in its beginning, I have tried as far as possible to use the accepted names, even if I do not always agree with them. Common, often in quantities, except during the spring diatom inflow, when it is rather rare and scarce. Gban found it at several places on the northern coasts of Norway in the months of July- October 1898—99. Distrihution : According to Cleve, this is a southern, oceanic form, widely distributed in the warmer part of the temperate At- lantic, northwards to Iceland, Scotland, the North Sea, Skagerack, Cattegat, the west coast of Norway and (sometimes) I'ight up to Spitzbergen. It is stationary on the whole of the coast of Norway, and especially on the west coast frequent in the summer and autumn. P. conicum (Gran) Ostenf. et Schm. OsTENF. at ScHM. L. 117, p. 174. Gkan L. 70, p. 189, f. 14. P. divergens var. conica Gran L. 67, p. 47. P. lenticulare v. Michaelis (Eheb.) Joeg. L. 91, p. 37. Undoubtedly a good species. Occurs in rather a large number of the samples, but quite exceptionally in any quantity. Gban found it in the Eids Fiord (Nordland) in rather small numbers in the months of July — August and October 1898—99. Distribution : Gkan (L. 70, p. 190) considers it to be a tem- l)erate Atlantic oceanic form, which also seems to agree to my material. On the west coast of Norway it is found all the year round, but generally only in small numbers. Found in the English Channel (February and May 1903), off Scotland, in the North Sea, the Skagerack and Cattegat and the Baltic, as well off Beeren Eiland (very sparsely). P. pentagonuiu Gran. Gran L. 70, p. 191, f. 15. 1 know this form very well from the west coast of Norway, where it occasionally is abundant, but I have been in some doubt as to whether it should be looked upon as a young, undeveloped form or a special species. Occurs rarely and in small numbers, but is possibly overlooked. Distrihution: Not sufficiently known. Gran is probably right in considering it to be a northern form. In 1898, it was occasion- ally abundant on the west coast of Norway. P. pallidum Ostknf. Ostenf. L. Ill, p. «(i; L. IKi, p. 581, 582, f 130. 131. P. pelhicidum (Bergh) Jorg. L. 91, p. 38. Gran L. 70, p. 186. I agree with Ostenfeld in considering this species to be dif- ferent from the following one but not with respect to the use of the name P. pellurAdum (Bergh). As it is, however, excellently described by Ostenfeld (]. c), it will be most practicable for the present to use the names he does. Rather frequent, but generally in small nunibei's. Found by Gran at many places on the northern coast of Norway in the months of July— October 1898—99, but only in small numbers. Distrihution: Arctic and boreal (properly neritic?) species, known from the North Sea (from The English Channel, frequent in May 1903), Skagerack and Cattegat, the west coast of Norway, Scotland, the Faeroe Islands, Iceland, Greenland, Jan ^Mayen and Spitzbergen. Stationary on the west coast of Norway, especially numerous in the summer months. p. pelluciduiu Ostenp. OsTENF. L. 116, p. 58, f. 129. There are several species which are more or less allied, whicii may easily be confused with this form. Besides, on account of its minuteness, it easily, passes through the net, and is therefoi-e not specially tabulated. It was, however, only occasionally found in the samples. Distrihution: Seems to be an arctic and northern temperate (boreal) species, which is by Ostenfeld considered to be neritic. According to Cleve L. 40, p. 268, it has been found at many places on the American side up to Greenland and Spitzbergen. Occurs also on the west coast of Norway (in April and May 1901). P. pedimctilatum Schutt. (PI. VIII, Hg. 29). Shape: In dorsal view the upper half is broadly conical, with a rather long cylindrical apical tube. The lower half is broadly conical, the outlines showing a shallow sinus on each side and at the lowest part. In side view the upper half is still conical, the outlines of the lower being rounded, and then evenly narrowed, most clearly on the posterior side, towards a broad, rounded lower part. The dorsal half is larger and more prominent than the ven- tral. The excurrent basal spines are somewhat nearer the ven- tral side. Girdle: The girdle in side view is almost in right angle to the longitudinal axis. On the venti-al side the left end lies lower than the right, about as much as a piece equal to the height of the girdle. Definite radial rays (thickenings). Basal spines: The basal spines are directed somewhat for- wardly (towards the ventral side), especially the left one. Both broadly alated, the ventral wing being all at once broader towards the base, so that its contour turns almost at right angles to the direction of the spine (as is the case in Podolampas palmipes). In this way, in certain positions, the species appeai-s to have a short, broad winged „foot" between the two others. Contents of cell: The same in colour as in P. pidlidum. Dimensions: Width 47 ii, heiglit 51 [i.. liasal spines 17 |i. prominent. As yet, I have only seen few specimens of this species. Nei- ther am I sure that it is identical to Schutt's, so that I have given a description, which, howevci', should only be taken as a preliminary one. The peculiar suddenly broadened wings at the base of the ven- tral side of the basal spines are only seen with difficulty, but tlie one which belongs to the left spine is easily seen when the spe- cies lies on its ventral side with .the apical tube down (and the spines up). As far as I have been able to see this wing on the left spine is du-ected out towards the right, on the right one, on the contrary, but little to the left, almost forwardly (ventrally). The long apical tube has a vei'y characteristic form in Schutt's figure. '^Phis form is also found in my specimens, but is due to seams, not to the actual contour. It may be a question as to whctlicr my specimens belong to P. tristylum Stein, a species wlucli 1 do not know, but which, at Protistplankto 111 any rate, cannot l)o iilcntical to P. iiclhic'uliDii |',Kii(iii. as nicntio- irmI liy r.iTsciii.i (L. 111). /'. tnsli/hiiii r. tjnilu .Sciimiii. is lui- donljtodly another speeies. Very rare and very scarce; occmrrd tn-ctlicr with dccanic and sontlicrn forms in Traniklybct ■■/■., 1!)00, (iou ni. Tiio same form is very rare on the west coast of Norway: The Jiy Fiord of Ber- >ren '7i 1901, O-iOO m.; Tlie Oster Fiord, % 1901, 25—50 m., 1(1(1 •_'(!(• in. 1 liave also seen it IViim the Stor Fiord in Sond- moi-f (S y Miciiael Sars I'.Mio. st. ;!. KK) .'id uw. F. iwdiiucidatuni is, accordinij- to Ci.kvio, a sontliern tempc- lato, oceanic species, distributed in the Atlantic from rather far sDuth northwards to the neio-hhourhood of Iceland (rarely). P. Steittii Juno. .I.iuc. 1.. 91. p. .-JS. /'. Mirhaclis .Stein L. 135, p. 9, f. 9 — 11. non EnHii. Ci,. L. 40. p. ■2GS. Occurs in ([uite a larire number of the samples, but always sparsely. The species seems to be absent during- the spring diatom intiow. Accordini!' to Gran (L. G7) in small numbers in the Eids Fiord and Ofoten in the months July — August 1899. In the tables it is reckoned together with another smaller form, ■w liicli is probably speeitically ditferent from the genuine P. Ste'mii, and seems to have a more northern distribution. D'tstribxition : Southern oceanic form, which, according to Cleve, is widely distributed in the warmer (eastern) part of the tempei-ate Atlantic, northwards to Greenland, Iceland and towards iSpitzbergen. Very scarce round the Faeroe Islands. Also rare on the west coast of Noi'\\-ay. where there occurs (at least) two diffe- rent species. P. ovatiun (PorcH ) Scbi'tt. Fre{iuent, often numerous. Found by Gran on the northern coasts of Norway, rather numerous at sevei'al places in the months of . I uly— September 1898—99. Distribution: Seems to be an arctic and northern temperate (boieal), cliiefly neritic (?) species, which is known from the coasts of Western Europe, the North Sea, Skagerack, Cattegat, the Baltic, the west coast of Norway, the Faeroe Islands, Iceland, Greenland and Spitzbergen. Stationary on the coasts of Norway, being es- pecially common on the west coast in the months of April and ]\Iay. Ccratinni Schrank. As most of the easily recognized forms of C. tripos are now, by almost all plankton investigators, mentioned as distinct species, I have thought it best to do so too, as far as possible. I am, how- ever, inclhied to think that by so doing we get a basis which is ratiier uncertain. On tiie other liand, it seems that one really goes too far when one considers all ,, forms" of Ceratimn tripos (e. g. balticum and macroceros) as one species. As, however, the so-cal- led species are very difficult to characterize well (naturally), the result will be that there will be numerous species, and one gets into a hopeless chaos, as we have already seen in the case of one author. According to my opinion, therefore, the only practical so- lution will be to set up as few „species" as possible, but to clas- sily the divergent forms as „varieties". It will, I think, for the sake of clearness, also be necessary to arrange the varieties in groups, as more new forms are apjjcai'ing. C. trii)os (0. K. !VIi;i.i,.) Nrrzsin. ('. I. 'J. hidfinnn iSciiirr. Coinnion and generally in large quantities; durini.' the .spring diatom intiow, iiowever, very much scarcer than at other times. Found by Gran at several places on the north coast in the months of July— October 1898-99, dually numerous. />i.'. p. .-ii;, rr). C. fnsas (KuRii.) Ur.i. \"ery fri'ipient and often in ([uantities, only less numerous dur- ing the spriuii diatom iuHow. Found by Gkan frequently at several places on the north coast in the months of July— October 1898—99. Distribution : Temperate, oceanic form, widely distributed from the southern part of the temperate Atlantic to the North Sea, (rather fre(iueut in the English Channel in the months of Febru- ai-y and May 1903) Skag-erack, Cattet;at, the lialtic, the west coast of Norway, Scotland, the Faeroe Islands, Iceland and right up to Hiiren Eiland and Spitzbergeu (1900). Rather common round the Faeroe Islands. Numerous on the west coast of Norway, especially in late autumn. HI- iPtearros^jenrma-baceae. Pterospernisi Poi cb. These remai'kable organisms arc probably, as Clevk and others have suggested, resting stages. As far as I know, no one has up to the present found anything to indicate where they really belong. With us. there are others (occurring sparsely) besides the three mentioned below, but I have not entered them. P. Mobii (.JOKG.) OSTENI'. OsTKNF. L. 117, p. lot. Ptrrosjihivm MiJbii Ji'mon^sEV h. 91, p. 48. Rather frequent, but generally sparsely. Bit-tributioii: Not .sufficiently known. Seems to be a tempe- rate Atlantic form. Very rare round the Faeroe Islands. Also rare on the west coast of Norway. P. VanhiSffcnii (Jurc.) Ostenf. OsTEXF. L. 117, p. 1.51. Ptciosphæm V. .Ioegensex 1. c. Rather more fre(|uent than the foregoing, and often rathei- numerous. Distribulton : Like the foregoing. Seems to be an oceanic form. Very rare on the west coast of Norway 1898. P. dictyon (J org.) Ostenf. Ostene. 1. c. I'trrosphwra dictyon Jciiu;. 1. c. As a rule the most frequent form, though often occurring in smaller quantities than the forcijoinu- one. Dlslnlinln.i ■ritic form, id thi' Faen illi.ae3raQeae. llahtMpliJi'ra virjilis Sciimit/.. Inch //. uuiior OsTKNE. In his last work (Jk.vn (I^. To, p. 12-l(;j has subjected this species to a thorough, comprehensive treatment. I agree, on the whole, with his conclusions, as they — as far as I am able to judge — corre.spond very avcII to my own observations. I am also on account of his statements convinced that the large, inner body previously referred to by me (L. 91, p. If.) and which 1 with some doubt took to be the nucleus, is only an accidental formation, caused by imperfect preservation and treatment (plasmolysis). Unfortunately, I have not later had any opportunity of exami- ning the moving spores, as the large (piantitics of Hulosplwra which were met with near P.orgen in 189s have not since leappeared (as far as I know). Common, often in (pumtities, scarce dniing the spring diatom inflow, especially in 1899. Distribution: Temperate and tropical oceanic species, widely distributed in the warmer part of the Atlantic and especially (cfr. Gean 1. c.) in the eastern part of the Gulf Sti'cam from the Faeroe — Shetland channel to the far north of Xoi-way and I'idit up to Baren Eiland. According to Ceeve also west of .\meiica. in the .Mediterraneau and the Indian Ocean. iTlagella-ba. PliatMK'.ystis Pouvhvti (II.' Only noticed during the diatom inflow, then often in large quantities, although very variable with i-egard to frequency. Distribution: Arctic, oceanic (?) and boreal, neritic .species, which developes in masses in the mixing-belt between the arctic waters and those of the Atlantic. Known fi'om Greenland, Iceland, the Faeroe Islands (very fre- quent during a few months of the year), the North Sea, (numer- ous in the English Chaimel in May 1903), Skagerack and Cattegat. On the west coast of Noiway in large masses in the mouths of March—May 1898. "VI. S±l±co£lagellata- iof,vo«'lia fibula Ehkb. Cleve (L. 40, p. 154) considers it to be doubtful whether this genus belongs to the SilieofldycJIatd or to the Eadiolaria. Rare and scarce. Occurs mostly in deep water samples. Distribution: Temperate oceanic form. Occurs in the Atlan- tic, The English Channel, the North Sea, Skagerack, Cattegat, the llultic and the west coast of Norwav. evervwiiere in small numbei's. Spherical shells, with several (more than 6) main spines. 3 sphei'ical shells, with broad 3-edged main spines and similar or smaller simple by- spines on the outer shell . . Echinommn. 3 spherical shells, with nai-row branching byspines on the outei' shell Dri/mi/onnna clcgcnis. 4 spherical shells, with delicate outer shell, which is pierced by broad 3-edged main spines and similar or smaller byspi- nes from the next one Chromyechinxs boiralis. Spongy outer shell, which length- ens out along the main spines as interwoven pyramids. . . . Rhizoph'iima horrale. Circular discs, with porous plates above and below Stylodictya. Biconvex, spongy lens SiMngodiscus fxrus. Outer shell imperfectly closed, with con- centric belts and large openings; inside, a double inner shell Phortioium jn/Ionium. Outer shell with broad porous plates, which coil themselves into a double spiral round an inner shell; numerous, long, naiTow. subulate spines Larcospira minor. Shell of irregular construction with strong, long protruding radial main spines (about 12) Streblacdntliri circitmterta. 1. Ciibo!i«])liæri(la Hck. A'cry sparsely represented (unless one includes Blii^oplnium Jiorcdiri. "VII. IEia,.. The diameter of the inmost shell about 15 \>- (or a little more). About 15 main spines, about equally broad inside as outside of the outmost shell, not long. They seldom protrude farther than to a length equal to the distance between the two outer shells, often less, and vary in development. Between the two inner shells, the radial spines arc very narrow and in fact hardly widei- than the beams of the inmost shell. The byspines on the outside shell are in appearance like the main spines, but not radially lengthened inwards, with a wide base oil the outer shell (like the main spines) and very unevenly devel- oped in size, although generally protruding less than the main spines. Variable in number; although, as a rule, not many, far from being devcdoped in all the corners, only here and there. The number of the main spines is variable, often only about 10, though oftene.st about 15. They are .3-edged as in if r.x« (■•«/(/»;;/ purhijdfnii 11)11. The nearest relation to this .species is, without doubt, K. Irin- acri/nii Hck., which .species, however, to Judue from Hæckel's illu- stration and description ■ (L. 84, p. 441, pi. 24, f. 6-— 8) is well distinguished by the construction of the inside ball, as well as by several other, less important, characteristics (as the number of the pores and spines). As in HcxnconfuDii juirln/ilrniuiiH and //. ciillKinnillniui. tliei'e are forms without outer shells, but thi.'i'e is generally a trace of these in transverse processus on the main spines. These may, hoA\- evei', also be entirely absent. Such forms, of which one is illu- strated on pi. VIII f. .33 c, might equally well he i-eckoned as belonging to the genus Aclinommit (without bvsiiines on the third shell), respectively Haliommn (with only two shells), if their di- mensions and other characteristics were not completely correspond- ing to the above species. Cfr. Jobgensen 1. c. p. 58. This .species also varies a good deal. When the outside shell is thin-walled, the pores and intermediate walls are of a more uneven size. The by.spines are in such cases slightly developed or (as yet) wanting. It is likely that these divergences may be accounted for by a difterence in age. A moi'e important difference is the number of main spines, which seems to be able to vary from 10 to 16. Comparatively frequent, though, like all radiolaria with us, always present in small numbers. It occurs, however, decidedly more frequently and in larger numbers than the two Hcxacontiam species. DisirihiifKiii : The same as that of Hr.iuconlinm enthacanthum and H. parliyilciinau/. Frequent also on the west coast of Norway and in the Norwegian 8ea. E. trinacrium Hck. The forms which I have tabulated under this name are some- what uncertain. They are distinguished from the foregoing species by a strong, rather thick outer shell, more numerous and stronger byspines, as well as by a different construction of the inmost shell, which is in most respects like the middle one. There is nevertheless on the one side a considerable agreement with Chromyechinus horcnlis, only that the outside shell (the fourth) is wanting, on the other side a considerable resemblance to younger forms of Drymyomma elegans, where the characteristic branched byspines are still wanting or are branchless needles. To this must be added that different forms of E. leptodermum may also have rather strong outer shells and more numerous spines. As a rule, though, the forms of Cliromyccliinu.^ horealix may easily be recognized by the transverse processus on the radial spi- nes, which here, as in E. Icptodermum and Hexacontimn enthacanttnnn suggest the beginnings of the still undeveloped outer shell. The forms of Drymyomma elegans have characteristic long slendei- main spines and narrow byspines. Yet, I am not sure if there be not still another species, most nearly answering to E. trinacriuvi, but with long, narrow principal spines and byspines. the latter always being branchless. It is difficult to examine the imnost shell. I have not yet succeeded in ascertaining with certainty whether such a firmly con- structed inner shell with which E. trinacrium is depicted by Haeckel (L. 84, pi. 24, f. (>— 81 is also characteristic of Chro- myechinus horealis and Uryiiiijiiiiinia (d'ljmis. T have, howev'cr, seen such a .shell. As 1 have already suggested in a jircvions paper (.lnudioxsKN L. 91, p. 57) it is not impossible that what I have called E. tri- nacriuiii may be certain young forms of Chromyechinus horealis, whci-e the above mentioned transverse processus on the radial spines are wanting. On the other hand, it is just as likely that there may bo with us another species differing from both Drymy- omma elegans and Echinommn trinacrium, to which the supposed intermediate forms belong. This species would be coinparativcly frequent on the northern coasts of Norway. I'ntil this is made evident, it will be best to keeji to the spe- cies which arc always ea,sily recognized, viz. Echinommn leploili'r- mum, Chniiiiycchiiiiis horealis and Drymyomma elegans. Occin's in the plankton like the foi'egoing species. Protistplanklon. ir l>r.> ■■■> 4>iiiiii]i flt')i:tns Jintd. JoKtiEXSEX L. 91, p. 58. This species, wiicu fully (levcloped, is very easily reeot-nized by its liranched byspincs on the outside shell. The outside shell is strou.iiiy deYj?loped, thick' walled, diameter _:_ s.') |i. The poi-es are roundish with broad intermediate walls, unevenly developed, thoui^h not so nnich so as in Cliromi/echinu.i bi/r<:iilis. on an avera,> borealis (Cl.) tPI. VIII. f. 3.t: pi. IX. fig. 3()— 37). Actinomma boreale Cl. L. 30, p. 20, pi. 1, f. 5 c (vix a, b). Chromyomvm boreale (Cl.) .Turu. L. 91, p. 59. This remarkable species is ea.sily recognized by its four shells, of which the outside one is exceedingly delicate and very differently developed. This outside shell is very often wanting, but there are usually — as before mentioned — indications of it in tlie trans- verse processus on the radial spines. On the outside shell there are — but only i-arely in the ma- terial which I have examined — nai'row bysjiines, few in number, -which most often form more oi- less oblifiuely (not straii'Titly ra- dially) i)roti-uding extensions of the walls between the pores. They may also sometimes be seen as bristle-shaped branches extending obliquely out tVom the main spines. They arc^ thus not radial by- spines, althoui;h they have uii(l(iiii)tc(||y the same bioloL-ical value as these. On account of these spines, it will. I think, be most correct to enter the species as a Cliraniyrrlninis, es]iecially as, on the shell next to the outside one. thei'e are both main spines and byspincs (both having the same appearrancc) in the same sense as in Eclii- nomma trhiacrium. It is quite remarkable to what variations this species is sub- jected, even in the matter of dimensions. 1 have found the follow- ing dimensions on the three outer shells, for specimens: Outside shell 96 |x 114 100 118 121 116 Next to the outside one 77 83 83 83 89 86 Next til the inside mw . . 34 :;.> 37 .3(1 40 30 It will be seen that the dimensions of the shell next to the inmost one diller only a little from the corresponding ones in Hex- acontiuvi enthacanthum, H. pachydermum and Ech'inomma leptocUr- iiium (as well as in E. trinacrium and Drymyomma elcynns). The third shell too corresponds, on the whole, well to the third one in the species mentioned. This is a very interesting phenomenon, seeming to indicate a development of all these forms from a common, comparatively young, principal form, the balls being probably formed centrifugally, at any rate, after the second. It may, on the other hand, perhaps be the case that the less developed inmost shell is formed later, centripetally. I mean that I have seen traces which lead me to conclude that its connection with the second ball is not merely a prolongation of the radial spines. In this species, it seems to be possible to distinguish between two series of forms, which in their extreme forms are so different that one would not hesitate to class them as distinct species, if there were not so many variations within each series that as yet it does not seem able to fix any certain limit. It is not unlikely that really here exist several closely allied .species. The one series of forms (cfr. pi. VIII, f. 35) has shorter broader spines, not very different in development, on the whole very similar to those of Ech'momma trinacrium Hck. The outer shell is very delicate, closed. The othei- series has longer, moi'e slendei" spines, varyini;' con- siderably in size. The outer shell is of firmer construction, and always seems to be open on one side (not complete). Here the radial spines and the byspines arc particularly long, and this cir- cumstance together with the large hole in the outer shell causes a foreign appearance, something like in certain .species belonging to the Nassellaria and Phacodaria groups. On strongly developed forms of this second series, there are also sometimes seen „ false" byspincs, as described above, at any rate in the form of side branches on the largest radial spines on the open side of the outer shell. On those forms too where the outer ball is closed, there often seems, however, to be a comparatively .strong development of the spines on one side of the shell. lis The pores on the outside shell vaiy considerably in size and shape, both on one and the same individual and on different ones. They range from quite tiny, circular shaped, to large, longish holes. Also the width of the intermediate walls between the pores i> very variable; on the other hand, then- thickness is never great. The shell next to the outside one is always strong, thick-wal- led, with very uneven pores, roundish and oblong, most of them being 10 — 16 |j., although sometimes considerably smaller or larger. The ball next to the inside one answers in all important re- spects to the corresponding one in Echinomma leptodermitm. The inmost shell is difficult to see. Its diameter is abouth 16 \k I have not succeeded in getting it out uninjured when breaking the outer balls, so that I cannot give a good drawing of it. Cleve's Actinomma borealis is undoubtedly the same as this species. He seems, however, to go too far in his opinion of the variations in the radiolaria, as will be seen on reference to his illustrations fig.s a and b (1. c, pi. 1, f. .5 a and 5 b). He looks upon them as young forms of the same species which he illustrates in tig. 5 c. I think that f . 5 b = Echinomma lejitodermvm, f . 5 a is probably the same species (too few main spines depicted on the illustration?) without a developed outer shell. Rather frequent, both on the north , and west coast, though rai-ely at all somewhat numerous. As is the case with the other SpimieJIaria with us only found in deep water. Distrihiition: The same as that of Echhiovima leptodcniuou. Found by Cleve in deep water samples from the sea west and south of Spitzbergen (L. 30, p. 26). Also known from a few pla- ces in the North Ocean as well as (efr. Cleve L. 40, p. 136) a couple on the American side of the Atlantic, near the surface. Rhizoitleg'iiia boreale (Cl.) JOrg. (Pl. IX. f. 38, pl. X. f. 38 e— f.). Hcxadorua hvrealis Cl. L. 30, p. 30, pl. 2, f. i, a, b, c. Rhizoplegvia boreale (Cl.) Jorg. L. 91, p. 61. Easily recognized by the characteristic interwoven pyramids around the main spines (pi. IX, f. 38 b). Haeckel depicts similar pyramids for Rhizople(jina hjchiiospha-ra (L 86, pi. 11, f. 5). The inside shell is irregular, not quite round; sometimes re- sembling a cube in shape, sometimes it is more hke an octahedron. The pores ai'e uneven, irregular, polygonal, averaging about 10 [a. The intermediate walls between the pores are not broad, differ- ently developed, but never having the distinct broader corners which correspond to the rounded lumen of the pore. A few small, short, needle-shaped byspines are found hei-e and theic on the beams, but not regularly in the corners. The main spines are long and strong, often 8 in number (ac- cording to Haeckel's system answering to an inner cube), although also often only 6 (answering to an octahedron) or 7. A larger number may sometimes be found (cfr. pi. X, f. 38, c— f.) The main spines have 3 strongly developed edges wiiich luu■l■o^^• off too- wai'ds both ends. On these edges there are transverse branches diverging at right angles and these, together with the correspond- ing ones on the othei- edges of the same spine, form a very vari- able number of verticils of threes. The spongy, loose and very irregularly consti'ucted network, which forms the outer shell, arises from the lowest 2 — 3 verticils on the main spines, but has the appearance of being lengthened out a good way up along the radial spines, on account of the thin connecting beams, which unite the different verticils parallel to the direction of the spine (fig. 38, a, b). Also on the outside of the outer spongy .shell (network), there are some few scattered short and fine, needle-shaped byspines. The ocean forms seem generally to have 6 radial spines. There seems to be a slight difference between the regular foi'ms which have 6 radial spines, and those which are more frequently found in the coast water and which have about 8. The former seem to have a smaller inner shell with distinct byspines. I have, how- ever, not discovered any definite difference so as to make it necessary to divide them into two or more species. Young forms (cfr. pi. X, f. 38, e — f. and Cl. 1. c. pi. 2. f. 4 a) are rather unrecognizable, as both the interwoven pyramids and the spongy outer shell are absent. The construction of this species i-esembles greatly that of Mhizoplecpna radicatum Hck. and JR. lijclinosphæra Hck. The inner, fine, transverse branches on the radial spines in the space between the outer, spongy shell and the inner shell are, however, wanting. These transverse branches are by Haeckel the characteristic of the subgenus Rhizoplegmklium. According to Haeckel's system, it might perhaps be a ques- tion as to whether or not our species should be classed as belonging to the genus Lychnosphæra, because of the byspines on the inner shell. As these, however, are small and few in number, and per- haps not even always present, this would not be recommendable, and still more so as such a distinction between the genera seems to be unnatural. Haeckel's genus Hexadoyas has radial spines without side branches, for which reason I still mean that the above species finds a more natural place among the closely allied foi'ms of the genus Rhizoplecpna, notwithstanding that there undoubtedly often occur forms with 6 main spines. Belongs to the most common radiolaria with us and is not rare in deep water samples, although never numerous. Distribution: On the west coast of Norway rather fre(|uent, although rare in fully developed condition. Known from the sea west and south of Spitzbergen (Cl. L. 30, p. 30) and from a feu- places in the Norwegian Ocean. VII A. 3. Porodiscida Hck. St^'lodirtya Ehrh.. Hck. iSpecics of this genus seem only to occur (juite exceptionally with us. I have only seen a very few individuals, which appeal', however, to belong to species hitherto unknown. All have more or less distinct circular, inner rings, not spiral-shaped, and belong. therefore, to Haeckel's subgenus StyJodictyon. In deciding a species, it is of great importance to examine the shaj)e of the disc in side view. I have only included in my list those species in which 1 am acquainted with this shape. S. tenuispina Joro. n. sp. (PI. X, f. 39). Shape of the slnU in side view: ^\lmost linear, though some- what thicker in tlic middle and slightly narrowed towards the ends Protistplnnktoii. which arc rounded off. A small portion nf tin' central part of the shell is stronuiy convex, forming a pioliiHiiii- hail shaped cap on either side (pi. X, f. 3!)c). SijKtcm of Ehn/n: From an inner little spherical siiell 4 radial lods extend in the form of a cross tn the 1st rin^', which forms an irregular ipiadrani-ie with rounded corners. The radial rods pass throuijh the middle of the sides. Beyond this rinj? thci-e are, on the specimen illustrated, G — 7 rings, each joined to the one next outside by a continually increasing number of radial rods. It is likely that the number of the lings increases as time goes on. The iinier rings are still somewhat angular, the outer, however, more iei;ular. The outmost ones seem, however, again to show irregu- larity, which perhaps, disappears with age. Purf>:: The strougly convex central part, which corresponds fairly well to the 1st ring, has iiuiisually large, roundish, hexagonal pores, which are much broader than the separating walls. The I'est of the pores are exceptionally small and uneven in size, most of them being narrower than the intermediate spaces, or of the same width as these, very little lai'gcr outwai'ds, -2—3 on the space bet- ween two rings. L'adial sjiiucs: Around tlie disc (in the imperfectly developed individual, cfr. the illustration) a few very narrow, needle-shaped radial spines protrude, apparently in no detinite order. Numerous radial rods are to be found between the outer rings; some go through two or more, others again only connecting two rings. B/jsjiinrs: Very small, almost punctiform, short byspines, lar- gest and closest together on the convex cential part, the others being only scattered over the disc. Dimensions: Diametei' of 1st ring 30 \>., of 2nd 42, of 3rd 39. of 4th 78, of 5th 98, of 6th 120, of 7th 144, 8th ring irregular and as yet incomplete. The rings are thus somewhat broader ont- A\ards. The large pores on the central part 5 — 6 m the small ones only I V2— 3— 4 |i. The few piercing radial spines only protrude as far as a distance equal to the breadth of the rings. The disc is 37 [j. thick at the convex central part, outside this 30 11, only about half as thick at the margin. The specimen which is illustrated seems to me to suggest that the few piercing radial spines are in reality radial rods which penetrate several rings, similarly to those which are seen here and there farther in between the rings. In this case, it is hardly cor- icct to cousidei- them as the radial spines characteristic of the Lienus Sti/lodictija. The above species might just as well, for that matter, be classed as belonging to the genus Forodiscus (without marLiinal spines); but as one cannot be sure whether there may not be radial spines on the outside ring in the fully developed indivi- dual. I have retained the species under the genus Stylodicti/a, where it ^\ould at once be placed after a less critical examination. It is certainly also closely related to the following species. In structure it is very like Forodiscus orhiculatns Hck. (L. 80, p. 492, pi. 29, f. 1), which, hoAvever, wants the very charac- teristic, coarsely porous, central part. This has the appearance of a spherical shell with a diameter greater than the breadth of the disc, with a smaller sphere in the middle (this sphere is the inner- most shell) and with equatorial rings outside. Only twice noticed in 1899: In the sea otf (iaukværo, '7i, 0—700 m.; in the sea oft' Rost, --/;, — 900 m. This makes it very probable that it is an oceanic, deep watci- species, which only exceptionally comes to our coasts. S. validispina Jciito 11. «p. (PI. X, f. 40). The structure is, on the whole, the same as in the foregoing species. The strange, peculiar, strongly convex central part is, however, wanting (the disc is homogeneous) and the margin is fur- nished with numerous stiong sjiines which are almost i-egularly di- stributed. Shit pi' of III,- slirll ,11 siilf ricw: Hi'oadly linear (the di.sc is of almost even thickness) but little narrower at the margin than in the middle, with sharp or obtuse corners, not clearly rounded otf at the ends, but almost scjuai'e. There are short sitines scattered on the cen- tral pait. Thr si/slrn, of nniis: From the innermost little shell 4 radial rods extend in the shape of a cross to the fir.st ring, as in the preceding species. The ring itself is also here an irregular quadrangle with rounded corners. Outside this ring, there are three others, connected to each other by radial rods Avliose number increases outwards. In the prolongation of the 4 primaiT radial rods (from the inmost shell) may be seen, more or less clearly, some similar ones which arc rather crookedly placed, aud these conjoin to form 4, more or less definite, zigzag rods, which go through the whole system of rings. On the outside ring there are numerous (21) equatorial, narrowly conical, marginal .spines. Pores: The pores in the centre are very small, punctiform, very scattered ANith wide intermediate spaces, gradually larger out- wards, on the two outer rings about 2 on the space between the rings, uneven in size, up to 4 \>. or a little larger. Between the pores on the central part very small, punctiform byspines are .scat- tered, which may easily be overlooked. Radial spines: Numerous, narrowly conical (subulate), strong radial spines of ditterent lengths, the longest being little more than V2 of the radius of the disc. Some project out from the i-ing next to the outside one, several too from the one next to the inmost one, and yet a few from the innermost one. Byspines: A few scattered ones, very short and vei-y small, needle shaped, extend from the central part of the disc. Dimensions: The diameter of the inner shell 14 |i., of the first ring 34, of the second 60, of the third «4. of the fourth l(t2. In thickness 24 |).. The specimen illustrated appears to be almost fully developed. Probably only the small portion of the outer rinn which is not seen in the illustration, is all that is wanting. This species exhibits a certain amount of agreement with S. stellata Bail. (L. 9, p. 6, pi. 1, f. 20), which has, however, fewer and broader spines, and also diifers in other respects. Only once found: Sea off ROst, "A 1899, 0—900 m. (together with the preceding and the following species). S. aculeata JijRc;. n. sp. (PI. X, f. 41). This species corresponds well in structure to the foregoing one, but differs in a marked degree with regard to its radial spines, which are particularly numerous, and are more irregularly placed, not all lying at the same level, that of the disc, but pointing ob- hquely beyond and beneath it. Shnpe of tlie shell, in side riew: Broadly linear, with rounded corners and ends. From the centre to near the margin, there are small scattered punctiform byspines. 120 E. Jørgensen. System of ring!;: On the whole hkc the preceding-, only the ring-s are more irregular in shape and width. Outside the fourth ring- there seems to be traceable the be- dnning of a 5th which is as yet not formed. Poi-ps : On the whole like those of the preceding. Very large pores here and there on the edge of the disc, which would pro- bably have formed several smaller ones later on. The byspines are very scattered, fewer in number than in the preceding species, but distributed over a larger part of the disc. liadial spines: The rings are united similarly to those in the preceding species, but the number of radial spines around the disc is larger, more than 30. The spines are narrower and more irregularly developed, some being a little bent, turned outwards and obhquely upwards, not all at the same level, equatorial, but distributed over the broad, rounded margin of the disc. The length of the spines is about the same as in the preceding species. Byspines: Very similar to those of the preceding species, but more scattered and distributed over the whole of the disc nearly out to the margin. Dimensions: The diameter of the inmost shell 12 ij., of the hrst ring about 38, of the second 54, of the third 85, of the fourth 110. Pores uneven, most of them being 2—4 ij-. The spines protrude as much as to 30 [k The disc is 28 \>. in thickness. This form appears to ditfer considerably from the other spe- cies on account of the irregularly placed marginal spines. The specimen illustrated is probably not quite fully developed. Note. Sfyloiliefya aspera .TiiRH. (L. 91, p. (il) is a fourth species. VII A. 4. Spongodifscida Hck. Spongodison»'! favns Ehrb. Ehbb. L. 53, p. 301. Hck. L. 86, p. 577. A species, which on the whole corresponds fairly well to the description given by Haeckel of this species, was twice found to- gether with Stylodidya tenuispina (cfr. under this heading). No inner rings w&tq seen. The disc was shaped like a little thick, biconvex, lens. Towards tiie margin there were fine radial spines here and there, some of these were a little protruding ; but the disc did not appear here to be fully developed. The pores towai'ds tlic mai'gin much larger than in the middle. Diameter 180 |).. Distribution: According to Haeckel, the North Atlantic, Greenland, FaerOe Channel (Murray), surface. VII A. Irregular Spnmellaria. Tlie tliree foi-ms mentioned below of irregular Wpumellaria are difficult to trace and explain, and have given mc a great deal of work and taken a lot of time. Foi' each form I have briefly mentioned the results I at last -arrived at; but there is still a good deal of work left before a full light with regard to their structure can be claimed. VII A. 5. Pjioiiida Hck. I'liorticiniu pyloninm (Hck.?) Cl. (PI. X, f. 42, a-d: pi. XI, f. 4-2, e— f., f. 43—45). Cl. L. 30, p. 31, pi. 3, f. 2 a, b, c. Hck. L. SG, p. 709, pi. 49, f. 10? Tetrapylonium Clerei Joeg. L. 91, p. 64. This species was first classed as Phorticium pyloninm Hck. by Cleve, 1. c. Judging from his illustrations, the innermost shell was not noticed, which would allow of the species being classed as Phorticium pylonium, a form A\hich is probably little known. As I, however, found such an innermost shell, and apparently 3 systems of girdles, I concluded that I should refer the species to the genus Tetrapylonium, as T. Clevei Joeo. n. nomen. Cleve has, in a later work accepted this name and remarks that the spe- cies is not identical to Phorticium pylonium Hck., probably because he has also seen the innermost shell. After much fruitless labour, I at last succeeded — as far as I can see — in getting a glear idea, in all important points, of the struc- ture of this interesting species, and I have found it to be as described below. As will be seen, it is quite different from that of the genus Tetrapylonium and — as far as I can see — of all the others mentioned by Haeckel. This would necessitate a new genus, if there were not a possibility that the species is, after all, identical to Haeckel's Phorticium pylonium. The genus Phorticium is too vaguely described by Haeckel to be recognized, either after the desei'iption he gives or his illu- stration. As, however, Haeckel speaks of P. pylonium as a very frequent species of very varying appearance, there may be, as al- ready suggested, a possibility of my species, after all, being found to be the P. pylonium. The structure is principally as follows (cfr. pi. X, f. 42*): On the most perfectly developed specimens there is on the very outside a largest, lateral girdle, a broad oval or almost a rectangle in shape, with rounded corners. (Cf. Cl. 1. c. fig. 2 a). Generally, only the sides of this girdle, nearest to the transverse girdle, are present. This outmost lateral girdle is seen in profile in a dorsal view, looking perpendicularly towards its level (when the belt itself it seen from the narrow side). Cleve's fig. 2 a gives such a dor- sal view. Right in tlie middle of this girdle and placed perpendicularly on it, dividing it into two equal parts, we find a second girdle de- veloped where it must be shortest, namely, on a plane parallel to the shortest side of the rectangle. This is the transverse girdle (the designations correspond to Haeckel's). It is seen from the front in the dorsal figure (pi. X, f. 42, a, b) and from above in the apical one (pi. X, f. 42 c, d). In the lateral figui-e (pi. XI, f. 42, e, f) the sidepieces of the girdle are seen from the front; they coincide with the corresponding parts of the lateral girdle. Across this girdle a new one is similarly developed at the shortest distance, perpendicular to both the former ones. This is the sagittal girdle. It is seen in ])rolih' in the lateral figure (the sagittal section) and from above right against its wide side on the apical one (the transverse section). Again, perpendicular to this sagittal girdle and to the pre- ceding one, and also where the distance is least, yet another girdle is similarly developed, thus forming an inner lateral one parallel to the outermost one. which is (lie largest. Protistplnnkton. Ill this way tlio dnilcs continue inw.nils. until their arc :} iatt'ial. :! transverse and -i sairittal imes. In tiie ijorsal view ithe lateral section' there will, therefore, be seen 2 coiieentrie, some- what oval, inner shells eneircleil by a broail cross ginllc and a lateral airdle, which is still broader and more or less completely developed and is seen in profile (f. -12 a, b.) In the lateral view (on the sairittal section) will also be seen two inner shells, both iihloni^-rectaiiL'iiiar. Thi' iiiiieriiinst diie is coniiectrd with the next one. by a more or less clearly disceiiiihie i;inlle, the inner lateral jrirdle. Inside the innennost one, there are traces of yet another smaller one. Outside the outermost one, will be seen the more or less complete broad lateral girdle (f. 42, e. f.) In the apical view (the transverse section) may also be seen two inner shells, almost square with curved sides. The middle one is joined to the outer transverse girdle by another girdle which is not very broad — the sagittal girdle. Round the figure the transverse girdle is seen in profile (f. 4:2 e. d; the eiidiiieces of tiie lateral girdle are here undeveloped). It must not be understood that the ghdlcs are developed from the outside inwards, in the order in which I have described them. (.Ml the contrary, it is probable here too that the formation of the skeleton is centrifugal, the innermost portion, perhaps, excepted. The most important ditference between the structure of this species and that of Tetraiiifh}niim Hcic. is that in this latter genus (according to Hck.) 3 separate trizonal shells are developed one outside the other. In the form here described, on the other hand, it will be more or less arbitrary to distinguish between several shells on account of the connecting belts which in themselves constitute a clear structural plan. There is, too. a number of radial spines, which are especially detinite and strongly developed in two diagonal planes, and here form 8 protruding spines at the coniei's, as in Ociopijle ocfosti/le and several similar forms. There are, also others, apparently irregularly scattered, which support the outside lateral girdle. Finally, a rather large number of byspincs occur on the outer part of the shell, short, needle shaped and with a broader base. The pores are uneven, somewhat larger on the outer lateral girdle, roundish, oblong and polygonal ; with strong separating walls, \\lien they are fully developed. On the transverse girdle, the pores are smaller, roundish, very uneven, with wide separating walls. The girdles are all rather irregularly developed, not symmetri- ( il. Neither are the radial spines symmetrically placed. As already mentioned, it cannot be seen from Haeckel's de- Miiption, what is the actual structure of the genus Phm-ticium. I have, therefore, refrained from proposing any new name, until Haeckel's species Phortmitm pi/hinnm is more clearly defined. To the form here described belong also the majority of Octo- j';/lr octosti/Je HcK. /'. mi)ior Joeg. 1. c. p. 64. These foi'ms are Ir-s developed than Tetrapylonium Clcrei, but seem, generally speak- iiiL'. to belong to the same species. To the same forms too, the I'li'Jiik-iinii jiijloiiiioii illustrated by IIaeckel would appear to lirlollg. It is. however, quite likely, that at least two species are con- it ahvavs in small luuibei deep Rather frequent, water samples. Disirilnif'ion : Not unfreipient on the west coast of Norway, also in deep water samples. Cleve has found it in samples from deep water from the sea west and south of Spitzberiren, as well as in surface samples from the American side of the North Atlantic. Also known from a few places in the Norwegian Ocean. IIaeckel designates Fliurticita» p;/lonium as cosmopolitaii (Mediterranean. Atlnntif. I'ficili.- etc ..surface and in various de|)ths".) VII A. «. IJllioliilH. lIcK. ■jHr«-OM|>ira minor (.hiw..) Liflicliun miliar .Iiihg. J^. <)1, p. (Jo, p|. .5, f. 24. This species has a very dirterent appearance, according to tin- position in which it is seen. In one position it has an appearance corresponding to tin; illu- stration referred to, and which caused me to consider it as a Li- thelius with a double spiral. On being rolled under the microscope it has, in another posi- tion, the appearance of 3 distinct (concentric) shells, one outside the other, the innermost being somewhat oblong, the other two rounder. In this last position, an iudefinite contour of an inner, smaller shell is seen in the innermost one. From which one may probably conclude that the innermost of the three shells is double, Larnucilla-shnped or trizonal fac- cording to Haeckel's designations). I have not, however, succeeded in seeing this clearly. Form this shell there extends, on both sides, a transverse girdle, which winds itself into a spn-al about the largest axis of the inner shell, the longitudinal or principal axis (after Haeckel). These two spirals give rise to the appearance of a LifhÆus with a double spiral, when looked at from above (transverse section, after Haeckel apical view). In a certain, a little oblique, position one gets again a more or less indefinite impression of a single spiral. In each spiral there is only a little more than one tuin. Pores somewhat uneven, not large. Numerous, long, narrow, needleshaped radial spines. (Cfr. also JORGENSEN 1. C. 1. One of the most frequent radiolaria in the north, sometimes also rather numerous, especially in ocean samples. Distribution: Also rather frequent on the west coast. Known too from a few places in the Norwegian Ocean, where it occurs together with southern forms. Note. \Miat is in one instance in the tables entered as Lithelins spiralis Hck. is very uncertain, and it is probably only a form of LurcospirK minw, which, as already mentioned, in certain positions gives the appearance of a single spiral. The same is the case with regard to L. spiralis .Tiikg. L. 91, p. >|»li:cra n. <,'eu. I have several times, but only in conserved material, come across an organism which appears to be a skeleton-less radio- laria of the division Aeantharia. It possesses, namely, the peculiar ])lasma products which Haeckel calls myophrisca, and wiiich he describes as characteristic of this group. For this species, I have had to coin a new iianic and have ■called the genus Radiosphæra. R. anacantliica JiiRc. n. »p. (I'l. XVU, fi.;. 105, lOfi). Central capsule sjjlierical, filled with numerous small and lai-ge balls (alveoli?) the majority, small. Spines and skeleton wanting. Kegularly distributed outside the central capsule, there are several bundles of myophrisca, probably 20 in number. They are short, linear, rather glossy, and are about even in size. In every bunch 6 — 8 of these bodies. These bunches (or bundles) lie in the outer part of the calymma which forms a structureless mass of slime (jelly), wliich is only Aåsible on being coloured. The diameter of the central capsule is 65—70 |i. Rare and scarce, is. however, easily overlooked: -'Vi 1899, Kvænangen, — 50 m.; Vs Evenstad I, 0—50 m. , "Va 1900 Bål- stad I, 0—200 m.; "A the Skjerstad Fiord IV, 0—300 m. and the Skjerstad Fiord V, 0—420 m.; V4 the Skjerstad Fiord XII, 0—500 m.; «A the Folden Fiord I, 500—400 m. From the above, the species would seem to be oceanic, uncer- tain whether it is temperate or boreal. VII C. Xas!i$ellaria. Of this division there was a comparatively large number of forms iu the plankton examined and also on the west coast of Norway; and, among these, there were a good many which, on account of their slightly developed skeletons, were at a low point of evolution. These proportionately simple forms are very interesting, in as much as they seem to be able to furnish valuable information with regard to the oi'iginal str-uctural type for the corresponding divisions, as well as \\"ith regard to the phylogeny of the whole class. H.4Eckel's splendid work on Radiolaria (L. 86) is on the whole admirable for its clearness and the ingeniousness with which apparently unimportant details are fitted together to make up a wonderful and consistently worked out system. If it had not been for this immortal work of Haeckel's, the immense material, which the Challenger and other expeditions provided, would have waited long before it could have been made useful to science to any great extent. There may be differences of opinion as to the justification or appropriateness of the genera and families erected by Haeceel; it is impossible, however, not to admire the immense amount of valuable observations which are so plainly and clearly set forth in his extentive work. As far as XasseUaria are concerned, Haeckel's system does not seem to be quite successful; but this di\ision is, as he himself mentions several times, particularly difficult, and can hardly be dealt with satisfactorily in any other way than by starting from the simplest forms. These simple forms are, however, small and in- conspicuous and may therefore easily be ignored for the beautiful and wonderful forms of which there are so many illusti-atidiis in Haeckel's famous work. It is just for these simple forms that it seems to be imjjossible to use Haeckel's classification. After mucli groping and maii\ fruitless attempts to arrange the Nassellaria, which I have fouml in my material, according to Haeckel's system, I have at length felt compelled to get out of the difficulty by erecting several new genera. Unfortunately the Nassellaria in my material — as is the case with Radiolaria on the whole — never occur iu any important numbei-s, but often only singly. I am, however, more and moie convinced that certain simple structural conditions, which seem to have been partly overlooked, partly considered to be of little im- portance by Haeckel, who does not use them in his classification, recur as the uround i)lan of a large number, ])robably the majority, if not all. of foi-nis of ya.'^rllaria. Protistplankton. 123 Mori'ovtT. I liavc bcni cniililtMl, l)y kiiiil assistance from differ- riii (|iiart('rs. to obtain soiiic ricluT nulioiaria samples — most of tlifiii. luifortuuateiy, of fossile species — , which, althoufrh 1 have not yet hy far been able to work them tiirougii, as far as I can see, show that my opinion of the strnctnre of this division of NasseUaria is on the wliole correct. 1 iiope in the futnre in a more detailed work to be able to eive more exact leasons for my opinion, and try to apply it consistently to the more important i:enera of ^V^s- scllariii. My remark, that Hakckel had to some extent ijruored certain piimary skeleton parts, which I consider to be the principal type fur all the forms which I have examined, may give rise to some niisnnderstandiny. Haeckel several times draws special attention to the ..basa'l tripodium" as a ground plan, from which a large number, perliajis all. of the forms may be developed. This triradial iiTonndplan also lies at the bottom of certain classitications in his system. According' to my opinion, thei'e is something wanting here — of which more further on — which is of gi-eat import- ance. Thus I found, quite at the beginning of my work with XasseJlaria (.IihuiExsEx L. 91 1 that Claparede's genus Playiacantha was of lUfferent structure than Haeckel (and Clapahede) had de- scribed, and, unfortunately, proved to have the same structure which Haeckel describes as characteristic for other genera (Plagonidium HcK., Plagiocarjya Hck., Peripleeta Hck.). This peculiar structure is, however, not contined to radiolaria beloHL^'ing to the genera mentioned, but is common to the whole division, \\-itli variations in development in ditferent directions (see below). This circumstance of itself makes it impossible to retain Haeckel's g"enera in their original detinition. Whoever has tried to use Haeckel's system of classification of Xassellariu foi' other divisions, as, for instance, the large one C'l/rtoiden, must certainly have found that the genera and divisions of his system are, at any rate in part, unsatisfactory and prove not to be so well limited as to be of practical service. In several instances, certain secondary structural conditions of comparative insignificance are taken to be a basis for division, as also, in not a few cases, accidental and passing stages of development are used as distinctive characteristics. Especially in several of the ( 'l/rtoi(Jca in my material there are — and must be according to my oiiinion — real radial apophyses, which are not found in the corresponding genera according to Haeckel, so that they would have to be classified under quite different divisions in his system. On this account, I have been obliged to start new genera here too. It seems to me that taken as a whole, Haeckel's system as regards the XanseUaria, — at any rate, large portions thereof — must be entirely reconstructed. It will then be possible to retain a large number of Heackels genera, but with different definitions. Haeckel mentions several times that the Xassellaria can monophyletically be traced from an oi-iginal ground form, but that great difficulties are met with when one tries to put this into practice. He states that „the basal tripodium" or a sagittal ring or a ce- phalis may be looked upon as such a ground form. He seems, however, to consider the tiipodium as the most natural starting point, as there are traces of such a tripodium to be met with in the ring species and Ci/rtoidca (..cortinar feet" in Cortimi and Cor- tiniscus, „cortinar septum" in several Ci/rfoidea). This tripodium corresponds best also to my ideas. As a foundation for the detailed desciiptidn which follovFs, I have, had to coin various designations which arc most easily ex- plained together when giving a comparative treaty of the whole group. Then too, I will explain my ideas with regard to the re- lation one to another, and the origin, of the g-enera found in the material under examination. Pliylogeny of the genera mentioned. As an original gi'ound foi'm, 1 take oni; which is similai' to Plagonidium Hck. (and Plagiocarpa Hck.) and which has four spines, extending in twos divergently from the ends of a short central rod. 'Vho plane thi'ough two of them, the sagittal plane, is perpendicular to the plane through the other two. With a change of direction, an apical spine, A, and .3 basal ones will soon appear. These basal spines are one of them dorsal^ D (fig. I) and two lateral, Lj. (right) and Lj (left). This seems to be a natural form for the skeleton, con- sidering the position of the central capsule. (Cfr. below, concerning the position of ba- lance in the water). These 4 primary spines are, as stated in my previous paper (L. 91), the same as constantly occur in the Xassel- laria which I mentioned. There they were called : Der primare Mittelstachel (= D), der Vor- derstachel (^ Li) and der Hinterstachel (= Lj.). :My reason now foi' changing the names is that the designations used will continuallv recur in ., . , , . ,.' , . , Fig-. I. The ground form: lateral view, per- the special descriptions, which ^ ,. , „ , ,. „ „ ,, » „ . ' ^ ' spectively. Schematically, as the foUowiiis.' it would not be at all easy to " figures, understand unless I gave these spines their special names, so that it was important to choose suitable ones, and such as agree as far as possible with the designa- tions used by Haeckel, whereever these latter could be retained. If the skeleton be placed so that the central rod is horizontal and seen from the ventral end, the sagittal plane being vertical and the apical spine directed upwards, then the primary dorsal,, basal spine D will be directed backwai-ds and downwards, the apical spine A somewhat backwards and upwards, the left, lateral spine Lj (from the ventral end of the central rod) downwards, forwards and to the left, and the right, lateral spine L^. downwards,. forwards and to the right (fig. II and fig. HI). Now there arises. a verticil of 3 branches on each main spine, and so we have the Plagiacantha type, as it is found in the spe- cies P. arachuoides Clap, (not the genus Plngiaeantha Hck.). The apical spine is here rather small and has (generally?) only two branches. ily reason for considering the apical spine, nevertheless, as be- longing to the primary skeleton, is that I have never come across- 124 E. Jørgensen. any form in ^\'hieh it was wanting. Its comparatively weak de- yelopment, in many cases, may tlierefore be due to retrogression. vVt any rate, it would have to be looked upon as a spine which appears at a very early stage of development, so that, in the case in question, it will only be immaterial whether it is considered as being formed at the same time as the 3 basal ones, or as having u 7ig. II. The ground form ; ai)ical view. Fig. in Tlie same; ventral D A been formed later. In other words, Haeckel's basal tripodium may be a more original form; but the ground form with 4 spines which I have chosen as a starting point, is the common type for all the forms which I have found. This primary verticil of branches is found, more or less di- stinct, in a series of forms, which appeal-, therefore, to originate, mure or less directly, from the Plagiaccmiha type. There is a peculiarity with regard to the verticil, whicii plays an important part when examining the skeletons, as it makes it easier to trace the corresponding parts and makes clear the rela- tion between certain forms. The branches of the dorsal spine, D, are placed one dorsally, two ventral-later- ally. (Here we only regard the projections of the branches on a plane perpendicular to the direction of the main spines. The actual direction of the branches is deter- niinod too liy tliat of the main spines, so that it will be, respectively, dorsally up- wards and ventral -laterally downwards.) On the right lateral spine, the direc- ^. ,,, „„ ,„ . „ , tioii is almost corresponding, that is with Fig. IV. The Plagiacantha tvpo; ^ •" transverse section of the basal One branch outwards (away from the cen- •spines. tral 1-od, cfr. fig. IV), while the verticil of the left lateral spine is turned so as to take the position as denoted on tig. 1\'. 'I'he edges liave also tlie same position, where they occur, as well as the secondary spines. In this Avay, tlie plasmatic body will be more perfectly jiro- tected, than would be the case if all three verticils were in the i-egular positions. A development in two directions now takes place. I'here appears a oth, important, spine, the ventral sagittal one (in my A- 1,. X pre^^ous paper, .Ioegensex L. 91, designated as ,.der secundilre Mittelstachel"), and the primary connecting arches appear. The ventral sagittal spine extends from the common starting point for the two lateral spines (the ventral end of the central rod) and is also basal (directed downwards and for'i\-ards). On those skeletons which are less richly developed, it is easy to i-ecognize it as a less strongly developed spine of later origin. The primary arches are developed between those primary branches of the basal spines which are nearest each other, and are, therefore, three in number: (1) The left la- teral arch. l!i tig. V, bet- ween the left branch of the dorsal spine. (1| and the inner branch, Ijj, of the left lateral main spine; (2) the ventral arch. 1^^. between 1^ branch, 1^.] > lateral main (3) the right, B„ between branch, h'd. and the left of the right spine and lateral arch, the lorsal of the right ioht branch of the dorsal one. d„ - de- being lateral main spine and the Thus, the ventral arch and the left, lateral arch run together to a point on b-, and consequently have a corner in common which is suspended under the left, lateral main spine. If one no\\- supposes the formation of a more complete net- work through tlie addition of secondary meshes and spines, in basal direction, on the sides of the pyramids, one has, in all important respects, Plectamntha oUaslvs. On the other hand there is — as above mentioned velopment in another direction, the ventral sagittal spine, V formed. iV simple form which belongs here is Cuvqijjluraufhn cladophora. In its most simple state (young forms?) it consists of the 5 s])i- nes D, L,. L]_ A and V (cfr. lig. VI and lig. Vll). The most fully developed individuals seem be- .sides to have Iwd secondary latfi'al spines, directed la- teral-dorsally and basally, 1,, and 1], ex- tending fniiii the ba.se of the apical spine. (These spines, 1, are perhaps only ProtistplaDktoii. 1 bi-aiiclios of tlu' (luito eonTs|H»ii(l ti rhuloiihoni). (hirsa Ihcii- CIV. full her iiKk-i (//(// Fig. VII. The Cam] .strongly bent towards ea opines unite at tlio [loint.- Ill ('iiiiijii/hifKiitliii. the primaiv verticil of braiidics is wanliiii;. lii.stoad of this, .seeoiulary branches (spines) are (leveloped on the 3 cdfres of the main sj)incs. It seems, therefore, most natural to derive Campylavaiiiha from the common yi'onnd form, as a parallel form to Phijjia- (■(iiitliii. It is, however, also possible that the verticil of branches is transformed into the scattered, strong spines on the edges, as this primary verticil appears to occur on the apical spine (?). The two basal sagittal spines. 1) and V, are in Cam- I (itlicr. Let us suppose that and we siiould have a sagit- 2)!/lac(iiitliii these two tal ring. It would be interesting if the ling forms (Steplwidea Hck.) as a whole could be derived in a similar way; but I am as yet un- able to judge if this be so, as my personal acquaintance with these forms is too deficient. In the material under examination, only one of these forms occurred, Dictyocircus chtthrafus, and even that was very sparsely represented. It seems, however, to me that this form most naturally may be derived in the manner mentioned. Such a derivation seems to be natural for the division Semantida Hck. I think, however, that the whole division Stephoidea Hck. requires a thorough revision. By help of the secondary lateral spines 1, (cfr. fii;-. VT and fig. VII) it seems that Dictyocircus dathratus may be quite natur- ally derived from Campylucantha cladophom. (Cfr. further under Dictyocircus). In this way too the long, protruding free spine, the apical one A. which is not seen in IIakckkl's rin;:- forms, is ex- plained. We also lind a clear and easy transition from Dictyocircus to Ceratospyris hypertiorea, additional meshes appearing on both sides •of the ring. The transition here is so evident that — as mentioned under Ceratospyris — there may be some reason to suppose that Dictyocircus is but a young form of Ceratospyris. That the network in Dictyocircus develops into the two lateral ■domes of Ccratosiiyris, seems ([uite natural. Several of the most important meshes are directed oblicjuely outwards from the ring (cf. under Dictyocircus). The additional growth therefore at first causes the network to be widened laterally. Later, byspines will be formed on the sides, and these will converge towards the open central space, for the direction of the byspines is generally such as to cover uni)rotected places. Thus the netwoik of the sides converges and the shell is finally closed. My opinion, therefore, is that the ring in Dictyocircus is basal, not apical, as in similar foi'uis accordin:: to Haeckel's interpre- tation. In the second scries, there is after Plictacantha the develop- ment lit a ventral .sagittal spine. 1 think I have seen a form which would beloiiL.'- Iierc, very similar to I'lcclunnitha oikishos. but having a ventral sagittal spine; but, as the study of the stuctiire of these forms has taken a great deal of time, [ have been obliged, for the present, to give up the thoutriit of attaining definite clearness with respect to the limits for the dilVerent sjæcies. it would al.so have proved impossible to di.stingiiisli with certainty between young ftmiis of ditlerent .species and genera, unless the most important structural conditions had first been settled. Krom the /'Icrtucantlui type, there is a further development to J'hormacanllui liystri.r. a venti-al, sagittal spine a.s well a.s .several ai'ches being (leveloped. These arches arc apical, extending from the apical spine to the three ba.sal ones or to the primary basal arches. I have not found time to study the course of these apical arches more closely; but there regularly appears to be one from the dorsal branch of the apical .spine (d,| lig. V) to the dorsal branch of the dorsal main spine, one from the right branch of the apical sjiine to the right lateral arch, l^^ as well as one from the left l)i;nicli u\' the apical .spine (here the apical spine has the piimary verticil of branches) to the left latei-al arch, ]{|. Besides these, there are al.so secondary apical arches outside the primary ones, distally, or between them. It is interesting to note that Phormuranthit hystrix shows the same course for the primary branches and the primary arches as Flectacantha oikishos. Only in the case of Flwnmumitha. the for- mation of arches has reached a further stage and the tips of the branches have mostly disappeared (the branches have become parts of the arches). Similarly, the outer branches of the primary ver- ticil of the lateral main .spines are retrograded and on well devel- oped individuals transformed into short spines. The ventral, sagittal spine is bent more downwards than the lateral ones, these being dii-ected more forwards and the apical one more backwards. Thus is formed an interesting type, which in one respect exhibits a re- markable likeness to the Cludosccnium type, while it is, on the other hand, difficult to separate with certainty fiom H.\eckkl's group Movocyrfida. The spine which H.\eckel, in Cladoscenium and the whole group Monocyrtidu, calls the apical spine (apical horn) is the same which I have called the dorsal, basal spine, I). Closer considera- tion will prove that this opinion is Justified (cfr. under Phonn- acanthu, Cladoscoiium. Peridium and LithomeUssa). Similarly to the foregoing ought, therefore, Cladoscenium and Mmiocyrtida, as well as the other Cyrtoidcu. to be placed in the contrary position with the .,ce2)halis" (Hck.) downwards, and not a-s IIaeckei, has done, with the rephalis upwards and the ..thorax" and the ..alidomcn" downwards. One would get the same relationship between the groups if one retained Haeckel's method of placing them for Cyrtoidcu, but turned the preceding ones over .so that the three spines (Haeckel's .,basal tripodium") turned upwards, and one — according to the above designation the apical one — downwaids. In this way, the network in Plerturunthu and Phormncuutlui slmulil be considered as apical, not biisal. If, however, one goes in the natnial order from the simi)le forms, without a network or with a very incomplete one. to such ones as the Cyrtoidcu, it seems most natural to consider the three spines — as above — to be basal, not apical. On the whole, perhaps this is the right place to say a few words about the natural position of balance in the water. 12 6 E. Jørge Haeckel considers those forms which have a marked principal axis to be „monostatic", supposes that they swim in one definite position of balance. As the skeletons of Nassellaria with their substantial spines and net walls must be considered decidedly heavier than water, their plasmatic parts are most probably lighter, in order that the form may be able to float in smooth water, when no selfmotion is supposed. It is another matter, whether it follows from this that tliese forms are monostatic, as Haeckel supposes. It seems, however, natural to conclude that the plasmatic parts support the skeleton and not the reverse, so that it would appear most likely that the central capsule is situated under, not over „the tripodium" (in those forms which have an imperfect skeleton). If, however, the centre of gravity of the plasmatic parts is under „the tripod", it is not impossible that the centre of gravity of the tripodium, by which, naturally, the basal position is deter- mined, may coincide with that of the plasmatic parts, and thus the balance in the water be indifferent. One would think that such a position of balance would provide important advantages and would safeguard against a separation of the central capsule from the plasmatic parts of the skeleton. There are, moreover, several details concerning the different Nasael- hirin skeletons which seem to suggest that the centre of gravity of the skeleton is very near that of the plasmatic parts. Thus the substantial „tophorn" (Hck.) which is found in numerous forms of Cjjrtoidea may be mentioned as an instance of this. It is especi- ally this solid tophorn which makes it appear not improbable that the centre of gravity of the skeleton, if it does not coincide with that of the plasmatic parts, even might well be nearer the cephalis, so that the form when thoroughly balanced ^\■o\M swim witli the cejihulis and the tophorn downwards. In this connection, it is an interesting fact that the central capsule in several Cyrtoidea — e. g. Clathrocijdas, Corocalyptra, Dicfi/ophlinits (cfr. Haeckel, L. 86, pi. 60, 61) is lobed, and has a small part in the cephalis, while four long, widened bags extend thi'ough a large part of the thorax. If these bags are lighter than water, their natural position in the heavier skeleton will be up- wards (although the species, of course, would also swim steadily with the cephalis upwards, if only the centre of gravity of the skeleton lies under that of the plasmatic parts). Here I will not omit to add that this peculiar condition of tile central capsule in Gyrtoidea suggests an original placement in till' cephalis, while later on it has got its greatest volume in the thniiix. Tills again points decidedly to the probability that those forms wliicli have an imperfect skeleton are to be considered as Munocyrtida with an imperfectly developed cephalis (and no thorax). The apical arches and their secondary arches in Phormacantha form a continuation of the net work up over the sides of the a I ileal spine A, thus causing an enclosed dorsal spine, i. e. a ,,col>i- iiirlla" (HcK.), as in Euscenium Hck. and Cladosceniuni Hck. The (vlionella is as yet only partially embodied in the skeleton. At tlie same time a further development of the opposite part takes place, a rather complete wall being formed outside the ventral arch, below the ventral sagittal spine, if this is considered as directed downwards. Probably this is to prevent that the centre of gra\ity of the skeleton shall be moved to one side. The genus Cladoscenium, as it is represented by C', trirolpium, with an almost central columella and even development of the skeleton all around it, may quite plainly be derived from an figure) and finally .3 arches bet- t ween the nearest branches of 1, k.L\Å Fig. vin. obli( interesting, simple form, Protosceninm, which can again be traced back to the Plagiacantha type. We may imagine the original type with the four main spines developed evenly, and having the primary verticil of branches on each of them placed in regular order. (Cfr. fig. VIII). If one now imagines 4 basal arches formed between the nearest branches of the dor- sal spine, D, on the one side, and each of the lateral spines, L, on the other (cfr. the lines .... on the figure), 2 similar ./ ^^ / ^. arches between the nearest / Å n \. branches of the apical spine. / / \ ■ A, on the one side, and the / ...--■■.•' ■■■••■•... \ dorsal spine on the other (cfr. the lines — — — - on the ■ ^'^ L _ .jj. . _-.e Protosren'ui,m-{\\w. the apical spine and the lateral oblique apical view ones, (cfr. the lines — — — on the figure) one has the Protoscenium type. Here there is an almost central columella, which naturally presents itself as an „ apical spine" in contradistinction to the other three, which are all about equally developed and want the outer branch in the primary verticil, while in the columella all three branches are well developed. The columella, however, also here corresponds to the dorsal spine in the foregoing species. This will also be seen if we regard the natural position of the central capsule, between D, L and Li From Protoscenium simplex to Cladoscenium tricolpium, we have again a very plain transition. The branches of the primary spines lose their tips and become parts of the arches (as in Phorm- acantha). The three branches from the spine D are the verticil on the apical spine (after Haeckel). A ventral sagittal spine is also developed, and in this way, perhaps, a counterbalance is formed to the net work at the spine A. From the Plectacantha type a series of forms may again be traced. The net work closes at the base (cfr. corresponding process in Ceratospyris) and we have the genus Peridium, which always seems too to have the ventral, sagittal spine whicli often is, how- ever, but weakly developed. One can here, partly because of the meshes round the dorsal spine, more especially because of the characteristic peculiarity in the position of the ventral and left lateral arch, (suspended from a common, basal, primary branch from the left lateral spine, cfr. Pkctacanthai be convinced tliat Haeckel's ,,apical spine" corresponds to tlie Imsal dorsal spine, D, in the genera with imperfect skeleton. ( )ir' linds also in Peridium several of the characteristic peculiarities of Plertacantha oikiskos, e. g. the larger, secondary meshes with their conspicuous byspines. If the connection with Plectacantha oikiskos may be taken as certain — there is, perhaps, an intermediate form, the one already mentioned which resembles Plectacantha oikiskos, but has a ventral sagittal spine — the connection between Peridium and Cyrtoidea is at any rate quite as certain. Here, however, as mentioned above, the ,,cephalis'' corresponds to the basal network of the simpler forms. One can plainly see in young Cyrtoidea, where it is prin- cipally the cephalis, which is fully formed, how the thorax is devel- oped betAveen the outward pointing- liysjiiucs on the ininiaiy and secondary arches of the cephalis. j In Lithomelissa setosu, whicii can quite naturally be derived 1 from Peridium, the spine A luns inside the thorax, wliich it then Protiiitplanktoii. pitM'ces ill a direction obliquely ilownwanls. In this way it un- doubtedly takes an iuipoitant part in the foiniation of the thonix. partly with brandies, partly witli arches to the other primary spines. The spine I) runs nearly in the cephalis wall, oblitjuely upwards, as an apical horn - .,topliorn" (IIok.) — which is but little con- spicuous, while the spines l^^. iinil l.| pierce tlie tlmnt.r in, or a little below, tlie ..neck". Tlie ventral sa-iltai spine protrudes obliiiuely from the region of the neck as a lower ..frontal horn" (HcK., in contradistinction to the „apical spine" as a ..hitrher occipital horn"). The peculiar swellings seen in tlie reL;ion of the neck in Lithomdifsa getosa and similar forms, will tind a natural explaiiatiuu throutrh the above mentioned process of formation of the thorax, and this also gives an explanation of the indistinct outer boundary between the ct'iihulis and the thorax. The i)roper liouiidary is to be found near the primary arches, where it is dclined liy internal lists („cortinar septum" as IIck. mentions in some species). These are not in the same plane, just as in Phrtacaiitha and Perklium. As the secondary spines on the left and right lateral arch through additional secondary arches now form the adjoining part of the thorax, two crimpings on the sides about the spine D will be caused at the boundary between the cephalis and thorax. In Cyrtoidea there is also developed an inner spine, which extends from the central rod through the thorax. It appears to be very variously developed, and is sometimes branched. It always seems to extend from the ventral end of the central rod, at the -same point which is also the starting point for the primary, lateral spines and the A'entral sagittal one, and it extends in a direction contrary to the cephalis. Its object seems to be to protect the large opening, which is the weak point, or perhaps it is to act as a support for the lobes of the central capsule. As a rudimentary spine, it can be traced right back to Phorjiiacantha. The more richly developed the Cijrtoidea forms become, the more it seems that the original spines and arches are retrograded. The four primary spines, as well as the ventral, sagittal spine can, however, be clearly recognized in every instance, as far as my experience goes. In the genera Helotholus, Androcyclas and Clathro- cijclas, perhaps also Sticlwcori/s, 3 of these spines, A, Lj. and Li, are found as simple, protruding spikes. In the genus Androcyclas the spine D forms the large, substantial „to])horn" (llcic). Sim- ilarly in Clathrocyclas. where the other ..tophorn" is formed by the protruding ventral sagittal spine. The consecutive links of the many linked Cyrtoidea are formed out from the cephalis as may easily be proved in young individuals. Such forms as Lithomelissa will, therefore, when young resemble 1 Peridium, Clathrocycla." and Androcyclas and be similar to Dicyrtida (instead of Tricyrtidn) etc. The genus Amphimelissa (Botryopylc si'tosa ('i..) seems to have a structure which is considerably ditferent to that of Litho- 1 melissa, with a fuller development of the primary skeleton parts of the cephalis. If I have understood it rightly, it would seem | that its thorax is formed from the cephalis by secondary spines on the secondary arches, that is with the starting point higher up on the cephalis, while the thorax of Lithomelissa and similar genera are chiefly formed from the i)rimary arches and their byspines. The i result is therefore, that Amphimelissa has a broader cephalis, which [ is more enclo.sed, or even entirely so, and which does not distinctly appear to be separated from the thorax. (Cfr. further under Am- | 2)hivtelissaJ. The genealoLncal tree for the forms which will, after the foregoing, be as follows: Sliclwcorys ccur in my mateiial Dictyoceras Amphimelissa \ Dirtyophvnins Androcyclas Helotholus Litho Pteroscenua Cladosceni/ Phormacantha Ceraiospyris \ Peridium Dicti/ocircus / / Plcctucantka / Camp])lacantha iToundform with 4 primary spines In the following paires. I have for practical reasons preferred to retain (at any rate preliminarily) Haeckels method of placing the Cyrtoidea, where therefore the ..apical spine" is the spine D, and the „dorsaI one" the spine A, while further the right and left lateral spines change places. Where, however, letters are used, I have applied them as above. W"\{\\ regard to the distribution of the species of Xasstlhiri<( which 1 liave observed, I will add a few remarks, and these will also, as a whole, be applicable to the above mentioned species of the division Spumellaria. It is difficult, from the material treated, to come to any re- liable conclusion as to whence the various species really come, and this indeed is the case with most of the plankton species which occur in my material. \\'c know very little indeed about the di- stribution of these radiotaria. for the majority of the species found are cither quite new or had only previously been known from the west coast of Norway. But, fortunately, Cleve has also observed some of the species in question (especially from the sea near Spitz- bergen), so that the distribution of just these species can be rather more completely stated. It has also been of great service to me that Dr. ILjout and Dr. Ghax have kindly favoured me with a number of plankton samples for examination which were taken on S/S Mi- chael Sars' expedition in the Norwegian Ocean. I have, however, not yet been able to find time to work through the whole of this material, which, having been collected from settled places in the most inq)ortant currents, will supi)Iy valuable information with i 128 E. Jorgensen. speet to tlie dependeuce of the radiolaria ou temperature and sali- nity. Unfortunately, there are no samples from deeper water. It may, nevertheless, be concluded with certainty that all the species here mentioned of the divisions SpumeMaria and NasseUaria are oceanic species. There may, however, be diiferences of opinion as to whether they are northern or southern forms. Cleve states (L. 40) that some species which belong here (from the Northern Atlantic) must be considered to be derived from the Northern Pacific by way of the Northern Arctic basin. He comes to this conclusion partly because several of these species have been found in the northern part of the Pacific, and partly because they do not occur in samples taken farther south than 40 " n. lat. Gran (L. 7(). p. 149 — 154) considers these species to be of southern orig